Mechanical 4 Command Reference

COMMAND REFERENCE

August 31, 1999

Copyright © 1999 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THESE MATERIALS AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC. BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc. reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future. Autodesk Trademarks The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Plan, 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3D Surfer, ADE, ADI, Advanced Modeling Extension, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, AME, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Data Extension, AutoCAD Development System, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk Animator, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University, Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoShade, AutoSketch, AutoSolid, AutoSurf, AutoVision, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Design Companion, Drafix, Education by Design, Generic, Generic 3D Drafting, Generic CADD, Generic Software, Geodyssey, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, Multimedia Explorer, NAAUG, Office Series, Opus, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, RadioRay, Rastation, Softdesk, Softdesk (logo), Solution 3000, Tech Talk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, TinkerTech, VISION*, WHIP!, WHIP! (logo), Woodbourne, WorkCenter, and World-Creating Toolkit. The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D on the PC, ACAD, ActiveShapes, Actrix, Advanced User Interface, AEC Office, AME Link, Animation Partner, Animation Player, Animation Pro Player, A Studio in Every Computer, ATLAST, Auto-Architect, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Animator Clips, Autodesk Animator Theatre, Autodesk Device Interface, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk PhotoEDIT, Autodesk Software Developer’s Kit, Autodesk View DwgX, AutoFlix, AutoPAD, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), ClearScale, Concept Studio, Content Explorer, cornerStone Toolkit, Design 2000 (logo), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer’s Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, DWG Linking, DWG Unplugged, DXF, Extending the Design Team, FLI, FLIC, GDX Driver, Generic 3D, Heads-up Design, Home Series, Kinetix (logo), Lightscape, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Ooga-Chaka, Photo Landscape, Photoscape, Plugs and Sockets, PolarSnap, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), ProjectPoint, Pro Landscape, QuickCAD, SchoolBox, SketchTools, Suddenly Everything Clicks, Supportdesk, The Dancing Baby (name), The Dancing Baby (image), Transform Ideas Into Reality, Visual LISP, Visual Syllabus, Volo, and Where Design Connects. Third Party Software Credits ACIS ® Copyright © 1994, 1997, 1999 Spatial Technology, Inc., Three-Space Ltd., and Applied Geometry Corp. All rights reserved. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Cypress Enable™, Cypress Software, Inc. dBASE is a registered trademark of Ksoft, Inc. Portions licensed from D-Cubed Ltd. DCM-2D is a trademark of D-Cubed Ltd. DCM-2D Copyright D-Cubed Ltd. 1989-1998 The license management portion of this product is based on Élan License Manager © 1989, 1990, 1998 Élan Computer Group, Inc. All rights reserved. Genius is a trademark of Genius CAD Software GmbH and CoKG licensed to Autodesk, Inc., for limited use in connection with: Genius™ 14, Genius™ LT, Genius™ Desktop, Genius™ Mold, Genius™ Motion, Genius™ Pool, Genius™ Profile, Genius™ SAP, Genius™ TNT, Genius™ Vario. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. LUCA TCP/IP Package, Portions Copyright © 1997 Langener GmbH. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Objective Grid ©, Stingray Software a division of Rogue Wave Software, Inc. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved. PKWARE Data Compression Library ©, PKWARE, Inc. Spread © 1996, Far Point Technologies, Inc. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. GOVERNMENT USE Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U. S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Issuing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Using the Desktop Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Using Context Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Using Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Using Pulldown Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Selecting Options from Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Quick Reference of Commands by Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Part Modeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Surface Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Drawing Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 1

Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 AM2DPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 AM2SF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Converting Single Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Converting All Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 AM3DPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Creating a 3D Helix Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Creating a 3D Spline Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Creating a 3D Edge Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Creating a 3D Pipe Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 AMABOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 AMACISOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Save File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

iii

AMACTIVATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Activating a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Activating an Assembly or Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Activating a Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 AMADDCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 AMANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Between Two Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Between Two Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Between a Plane and a Vector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Using the Animated Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 AMANNOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 AMARRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Array Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 AMASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Assign Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Add New Attribute Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 AMASSMPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Assembly Mass Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Select Material Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Assembly Mass Properties Results Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 New Massprop File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 AMAUDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Check External References Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Dependent External References Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 AMAUGMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 AMAUTODIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Automatic Dimensioning Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 PowerDim Options Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 AMBALLOON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 AMBASICPLANES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 AMBLDFEATNM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 AMBLEND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 AMBOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 BOM Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 BOM Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 BOM Representation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Balloon Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Properties for ANSI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Print Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Preview Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Assembly Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Export Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Import Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Set Values Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

iv

|

Contents

AMBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 AMBREAKLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 AMBROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 AMBROWSERFONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Font Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 AMCAPTUREUCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 AMCATALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Part Modeling Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Assembly Modeling Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Locate External Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 AMCENLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 AMCHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Chamfer Feature Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 AMCHECKFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Finding the Distance Between Two Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Finding Distance Between a Line and a Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Check Point Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 AMCOMBINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 AMCOPYFEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 AMCOPYIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 File to Load Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 AMCOPYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Part/Subassembly Out Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Output File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 AMCOPYSCENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 AMCOPYSKETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 AMCORNER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 AMCUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 AMDATUMID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Datum Identifier Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Modifying Datum Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 AMDATUMTGT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Termination Type Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Datum Target Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Modifying Datum Target Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 AMDELCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 AMDELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 AMDELFEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 AMDELTRAIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 AMDELTWEAKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 AMDELVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 AMDIMALIGN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 AMDIMARRANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Contents

|

v

AMDIMBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 AMDIMDSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Dimensions as Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Dimensions as Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Dimensions as Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 AMDIMFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Dimension Formatter Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 AMDIMINSERT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 AMDIMJOIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 AMDIRECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 AMDISPSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Individual Surface Display Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 AMDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 AMDWGDIMDSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Dimensions as Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Dimensions as Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Dimensions as Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 AMDWGVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Create Drawing View Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 AMEDGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 AMEDGESYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Edge Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 AMEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 AMEDITAUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 AMEDITCONST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Edit 3D Constraint Dialog Box (Browser) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Edit 3D Constraints Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 AMEDITFEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 AMEDITSF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Surface Edit Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 AMEDITTRAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Trail Offsets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 AMEDITVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 View Type Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Edge Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 AMEXTRUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Extrusion Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 AMEXTRUDESF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 AMFACEDRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Face Draft Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 AMFACESPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Creating a Planar Face Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Creating a Projected Face Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

vi

|

Contents

AMFCFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Feature Control Frame Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Modifying Feature Control Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 AMFEATID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Feature Identifier Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Modifying Feature Identifier Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 AMFILLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Fillet Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 AMFILLET3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 AMFILLETSF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Fillet Surface Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 AMFITSPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Fit Spline Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 AMFLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Surface Flow Lines Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 AMFLUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Using the Animated Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 AMHOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Hole Feature Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 AMHOLENOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Create Holenote Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Holenote Dimension Style Overrides Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 AMIDFIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Autodesk IDF Translator Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Edit IDFIN Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 AMINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Using the Animated Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 AMINTERFERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 AMINTERSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Surface Intersection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 AMJOIN3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Join 3D Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 AMJOINSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 AMLEGIBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Legible Entities Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 AMLENGTHEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 AMLISTASSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 AMLISTPART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 AMLISTVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 AMLOCKSCENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 AMLOFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Redefine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Loft Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Contents

|

vii

AMLOFTU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Loft Surface Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Polyline Fit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 AMLOFTUV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Correcting and Refining Input Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 AMMAKEBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 AMMANIPULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Using Rotate/Move Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Using Free Move Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Common Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Configuration Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 AMMATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Using the Animated Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 AMMIGRATEBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 AMMIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 AMMODDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 AMMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Switching to Model Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Switching to Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 AMMOVEDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 AMMOVEVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 AMNEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 The Part Modeling Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 The Assembly Modeling Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 AMNOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Note Symbol Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 AMOFFSET3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 AMOFFSETSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 AMOPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Desktop Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Dialog Controls Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Drawing Units Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Direction Control Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Show Messages Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Tolerance/Pickbox Size Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Constraint Display Size Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Polyline Fit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Approximate Model Size Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Hatch Patterns Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Layer/Object Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Drafting Standards Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Centerlines Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 AMPARDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 AMPARTEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

viii

|

Contents

AMPARTLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 AMPARTLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 AMPARTPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Part Mass Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Save As Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 AMPARTREF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Part Ref Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 AMPARTREFEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Part Ref Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Select Source of Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 AMPARTSPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 AMPATTERNDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Hatch Pattern Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 AMPLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 AMPOWERDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Power Dimensioning in Model Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Power Dimensioning in Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Power Dimensioning Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Parameters to Copy Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 AMPOWEREDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Power Editing in Model Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Power Editing in Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 AMPRIMSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Creating a Cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Creating a Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Creating a Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Creating a Torus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Using Grips with Primitive Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 AMPROFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Solving a Profile Containing One Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Solving a Profile Containing Multiple Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Solving a Profile Containing Nested Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Solving a Profile Containing Disjointed Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 AMPROJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Project To Surface Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Surface Projection Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 AMPROJECT2PLN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Projection Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 AMRECOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Recover Drawing Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Browse/Search Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Edit Path Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 AMREFDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 AMREFINE3D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Contents

|

ix

AMREFINESF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 AMREFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Refresh External Part/Subassembly Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 AMRENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Renaming a Part Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Renaming a Part Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Rename Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Renaming a Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Renaming a Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 AMREORDFEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 AMREPLACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Replace Part/Subassembly Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 AMREPLACEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 AMREPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Constraint Display Size Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 AMRESTOREUCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 AMREVOLVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Revolution Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 AMREVOLVESF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 AMROTCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 AMRSOLVESK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Re-Solving a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Appending a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 AMRULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 AMSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 AMSECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Surface Cross Sections Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 AMSELROT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 AMSHELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Shell Feature Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 AMSHOWACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 AMSHOWCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 AMSHOWINST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 AMSHOWSKETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 AMSKPLN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Using the Animated Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 AMSOLCUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 AMSPLITLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

x

|

Contents

AMSTITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Surface Stitching Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Custom Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 AMSTLOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Angular Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Aspect Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Surface Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Vertex Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Save File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 AMSTYLEI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Select Drawing Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Dim Style Importer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Substitute Dimension Style Name Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 AMSUPPRCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 AMSUPPRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Instance Suppression Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 AMSUPPRESSFEAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Suppress by Type Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Table Driven Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Create Table Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Link Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 AMSURFCUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 AMSURFPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 AutoSurf Mass Properties Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Create Mass and Area Properties File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 AMSURFSYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Surface Texture Symbols with Leaders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Surface Texture Symbols without Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Surface Texture Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Modifying Surface Texture Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 AMSWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Sweep Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 AMSWEEPSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Sweep Surface Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 AMSYMLEADER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Remove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Contents

|

xi

AMSYMSTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Symbol Standards Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Standard Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Surface Texture Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Feature Control Frame Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Welding Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Datum Target Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 BOM Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Balloon Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Properties for ISO Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Print Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Preview Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 AMTEMPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Hole Templates Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 AMTOLCONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Transformation of Model Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Manual Control of Dimension Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 AMTRAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Trail Offsets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 AMTUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 AMTWEAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Tweak Part/Subassembly Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 AMUCSFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 AMUCSPERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 AMUNSPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 AMUNSUPPRESSFEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Unsuppress by Type Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 AMUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Update Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Update Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Update Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Update Scene. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Update Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380

xii

|

Contents

AMVARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Design Variables Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Table Driven Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 AMVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 AMVIEWOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Export Drawing Views to AutoCAD Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 AMVISIBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Controlling Part Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Controlling Assembly Visibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Controlling Scene Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Controlling Drawing Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Desktop Visibility Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 AMVRMLOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 AMWELDSYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Weld Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Modifying Welding Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 AMWHEREUSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Part/Subassembly Locations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 AMWORKAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 AMWORKPLN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Work Plane Feature Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 AMWORKPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 AMXFACTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Setting a Scene Explosion Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Setting a Part or Subassembly Explosion Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Using the Browser to Set Explosion Factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 AMXREFCONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Chapter 2

System Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Contents

|

xiii

xiv

Introduction

In This Chapter

The Command Reference is a comprehensive guide to all Mechanical Desktop® Release 4 commands, listed in alphabetical order. In addition to the command listings, this manual includes information about system variables, the ways to issue commands, and a quick reference of commands by functional area.

1

Issuing Commands You can issue commands several ways: right-click menus in the Desktop Browser, select toolbar icons or options from menus, enter the command name on the command line, or enter an abbreviation of the command, called an accelerator key, on the command line. Here is an example of how command access is presented in this manual: Browser

Right-click the background and choose New Part. In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ New Part.

Toolbutton

New Part

Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ New Part

Command

AMNEW

Using the Desktop Browser Most of the commands in Mechanical Desktop can be accessed with the Browser menus. There are two types of menus: those you activate by rightclicking on an existing object in the Browser, and those you activate by rightclicking in the Browser background.

The menus that are displayed when you right-click an object change, depending on the type of object you have selected. Options that are not available are gray.

2

|

Introduction

The menus accessed by right-clicking in the Browser background change depending on whether you are in the Single Part, Part/Assembly, Scene, or Drawing environment.

Using Context Menus In addition to the Browser menus, context-sensitive menus are available in the graphics area as you are working on your model. When you start Mechanical Desktop, the Part menu is available in the graphics area. You can toggle between the Part and Assembly menus as you build your models. When you are in Scene mode, the Scene menu is available. In Drawing mode, you can toggle between the Drawing and Annotate menus.

Using Toolbars Toolbars have icons to represent frequently used commands, settings, and environments. You can choose an icon instead of selecting a command from a menu or entering its name on the command line. When you pause with the mouse selection arrow on an icon, the command action is shown at the bottom of the screen. A tooltip also appears under the mouse pointer. Click the left mouse button to select the command.

Some icons have a subtoolbar (flyout) with related icons. If the icon has a small arrow in the lower right corner, drag the mouse to reveal the additional icons, and then select one.

To hide a toolbar, click the button in its upper left corner. To unhide it, rightclick any toolbar. In the Toolbars dialog box, find the toolbar to redisplay and click the dialog box to the left of its description. To return the Mechanical Desktop toolbars to their default positions, choose View ➤ Toolbars ➤ Desktop Express (Left). If you prefer the toolbars at the right of your screen, choose Desktop Express (Right).

Issuing Commands

|

3

To display larger toolbar icons, right-click any toolbar and choose Customize. Select Large Buttons at the bottom left of the Toolbars dialog box. If you choose Large Buttons and you want to display the toolbars in a docked position in the screen header area, above the command line, or at either side of the screen, some toolbar icons may not be visible. In that case, you can drag the toolbar onto the screen.

Using Pulldown Menus To select a menu option or access a submenu, hold down the left mouse button while you navigate through the menu. When you find the command you want, release the mouse button. You can also access menu commands by using the keyboard. Hold down ALT while selecting the underlined letter of the menu option. For example, to select AMPROFILE from the keyboard, press ALT, then P, S, P.

Selecting Options from Dialog Boxes Many commands have options within dialog boxes. As the term dialog box suggests, you interact by selecting options to make a particular setting active, display a list of options, or enter a specific value. If a command has a dialog box, it is displayed whether you access the command on the command line or from a menu or toolbar icon. To get help on using a dialog box, click its Help button. Many dialog boxes also feature “What’s This?” Help. Click the ? button in the upper right corner of the dialog box and then click an option to find out more about it.

Using the Command Line You can directly access a command or system variable by entering its name on the command line. Many experienced users prefer this method because it is faster than using menus. Some experienced users are familiar with specifying command options from the command line and prefer to turn off the display of dialog boxes. However, because many Mechanical Desktop 4 commands require input through their dialog boxes, it is recommended that you use the dialog boxes instead of the command line to ensure that you have access to the full functionality of each feature. If for some reason the Mechanical Desktop dialog boxes do not display, set the AutoCAD® CMDDIA system variable to 1. All the commands and system variables for Mechanical Desktop 4 and AutoCAD are documented in Help.

4

|

Introduction

Using Accelerator Keys Many commands also have shortcuts called accelerator keys. To issue a command using an accelerator key, enter the command alias on the command line. For a complete list of Mechanical Desktop accelerator keys, see appendix B, “Accelerator Keys,” in the Getting Started manual.

Quick Reference of Commands by Function This section provides a brief description of each command in Mechanical Desktop. The commands are divided into six tables according to functional area: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Part Modeling Assembly Modeling Surface Modeling Scenes Drawing Layout General

Use these tables as a quick reference to locate the command you want to use. To see a list of toolbar icons by functional area, see appendix A, “Toolbar Icons,” in the Getting Started manual.

Part Modeling Use these commands to build and edit parts in Model mode. Part Modeling Command

Description

AM2DPATH

Creates a path for a sweep feature from an open or closed sketch.

AM3DPATH

Creates a 3D path for sweep features.

AMADDCON

Applies 2D parametric constraints to solved sketches.

AMARRAY

Creates rectangular and polar arrays of features on the active part.

AMAUTODIM

Automatically dimensions parts in Drawing mode.

AMBASICPLANES

Creates static work planes based on top, front, and side views of a specified point.

Quick Reference of Commands by Function

|

5

Part Modeling (continued) Command

Description

AMBREAKLINE

Creates a break line sketch to use for a breakout section drawing view.

AMCAPTUREUCS

Saves the current UCS and sketch plane.

AMCATALOG

Maintains a catalog of all standard parts, both local and external, being used in a combined part file or an assembly file.

AMCHAMFER

Creates a chamfer on the selected edge(s) of the active part.

AMCOMBINE

Combines the active base part with another parametric part, called the toolbody.

AMCOPYFEAT

Copies sketched and hole features, feature sets, or new features within the same part or from one part to another.

AMCOPYSKETCH

Selects single sketch to copy and specifies placement of the sketch center.

AMCUTLINE

Creates a cut line sketch for an offset section view.

AMDELCON

Removes constraints from the selected sketch.

AMDELFEAT

Deletes features from the selected part.

AMDIMARRANGE

Arranges dimensions in Model mode and Drawing mode.

AMDIMDSP

Changes the display mode for dimensions.

AMEDITFEAT

Edits existing features by displaying and modifying dimension values.

AMEXTRUDE

Creates an extruded solid feature.

AMFACEDRAFT

Creates a face draft or slight angle on the faces of a part.

AMFACESPLIT

Creates two faces from one face.

AMFILLET

Creates a smoothly fitted blend with a constant or variable radius between faces.

AMHOLE

Creates drilled, counterbored, or countersunk holes that may be terminated on planar faces.

AMLISTPART

Displays part, feature, and view information.

AMLOFT

Creates a solid shape through profiles.

AMMAKEBASE

Converts the active part into a static base feature.

6

|

Introduction

Part Modeling (continued) Command

Description

AMMANIPULATOR

Dynamically rotates, copies, and moves parts along selected axes, or freely in 3D space.

AMMIRROR

Generates a mirrored copy of a part.

AMMODDIM

Modifies parametric dimensions on sketches and drawings.

AMPARDIM

Creates parametric dimensions in Model mode.

AMPARTEDGE

Creates a line or an arc on a selected edge to use in a new profile.

AMPARTPROP

Lists the mass properties of the active part.

AMPOWERDIM

Creates dimensions in Model mode and Drawing mode.

AMPOWEREDIT

Edits parametric dimensions, reference dimensions, and annotation objects.

AMPROFILE

Solves 2D geometry to create a constrained sketch.

AMPROJECT2PLN

Projects planar objects and 3D faces to a work plane, sketch plane, or 3D face.

AMREORDFEAT

Changes the order of a feature in the part creation history.

AMREPLAY

Displays the steps used to create features of the selected part.

AMRESTOREUCS

Restores a sketch plane associated with a saved UCS.

AMREVOLVE

Creates a revolved solid feature from the selected profile.

AMRSOLVESK

Displays the number of constraints needed to fully constrain a sketch, or appends new geometry to a sketch.

AMSHELL

Creates a shell feature with an assigned wall thickness or multiple wall thicknesses.

AMSHOWACT

Highlights the active part or sketch plane.

AMSHOWCON

Displays 2D constraint symbols on the selected sketch.

AMSHOWSKETCH

Highlights geometry on the current sketch plane.

AMSKPLN

Sets the sketch plane location and XY axes orientation.

AMSPLITLINE

Solves an open or closed line sketch to divide a part or a face.

AMSUPPRESSFEAT

Suppresses features on the active part, either manually or by using an external table.

Quick Reference of Commands by Function

|

7

Part Modeling (continued) Command

Description

AMSURFCUT

Cuts free-form surface shapes on solid models.

AMSWEEP

Creates a solid feature from a profile moved along a path.

AMUCSFACE

Aligns the UCS with a selected face.

AMUCSPERP

Creates a UCS perpendicular to a line.

AMUNSUPPRESSFEAT

Unsuppresses suppressed part features.

AMVARS

Creates and manages active part and global design variables and provides table driven parts by linking to Microsoft® Excel spreadsheets.

AMWORKAXIS

Creates a work axis at the centerline of a cylindrical, conical, or toroidal surface.

AMWORKPLN

Creates a work plane at a specified location.

AMWORKPT

Creates work points on the active sketch plane.

Assembly Modeling Use these commands to build and modify assemblies and subassemblies in Model mode. Assembly Modeling Command

Description

AMACTIVATE

Activates a specified part, subassembly, assembly, or scene.

AMANGLE

Creates an angular assembly constraint.

AMASSIGN

Gives a value to a part attribute or adds a new user-defined attribute to the part definition.

AMASSMPROP

Generates mass properties information about parts and subassemblies.

AMAUDIT

Lists externally referenced drawing files that need updating.

AMBOM

Creates or edits a bill of materials database for generating parts lists.

8

|

Introduction

Assembly Modeling (continued) Command

Description

AMCATALOG

Maintains a catalog of all standard parts, both local and external, being used in a combined part file or an assembly file.

AMCOPYIN

Places an external part or assembly in the current drawing.

AMCOPYOUT

Places a part or subassembly in an external file.

AMDELETE

Deletes part definitions, part instances, and scenes from the current assembly model.

AMDIST

Measures the minimum 3D distance between selected objects or parametric parts.

AMEDITCONST

Changes distance and angle offsets in constraints and deletes individual or all assembly constraints.

AMFLUSH

Creates a parallel constraint at a specified offset between two planes.

AMINSERT

Creates a constraint to make two circular edges share the same axis and to make their planes coplanar.

AMINTERFERE

Checks for interference between parts in an assembly or a combined part file.

AMLISTASSM

Returns information about part instances.

AMMATE

Creates a mate constraint between two parts.

AMNEW

Converts a 3D solid into a part, and creates new part definitions, part instances, subassemblies, and scenes.

AMPARTSPLIT

Splits the active part into two parts about a work plane or planar face.

AMPATTERNDEF

Sets hatching pattern attributes for part definitions.

AMREFRESH

Updates external part or subassembly definitions.

AMRENAME

Renames an active part definition, part instance, scene, or drawing view.

AMREPLACE

Changes definitions for part or subassembly instances.

AMSHOWINST

Highlights selected part instances in the Desktop Browser.

AMWHEREUSED

Shows where a part or subassembly definition is used.

Quick Reference of Commands by Function

|

9

Surface Modeling Use these commands to create and modify surfaces in Model mode. Surface Modeling Command

Description

AM2SF

Changes objects into surfaces.

AMAUGMENT

Creates augmented lines from surface edges, internal trim lines, and display lines.

AMBLEND

Creates a surface between two, three, or four wires or surfaces.

AMBREAK

Breaks one surface into two surfaces along a specified edge.

AMCHECKFIT

Measures the distance between objects.

AMCORNER

Creates a blended fillet corner surface from three intersecting fillet surfaces.

AMDIRECTION

Displays the direction of objects and reverses their direction.

AMDISPSF

Controls how surfaces are displayed.

AMEDGE

Untrims, copies, and extracts edges of surfaces, and shows edge nodes of surfaces and faces.

AMEDITAUG

Resizes, rotates, copies, and corrects vectors on augmented lines and creates augmented lines from lines and polylines.

AMEDITSF

Changes the density of surface grip points, changes the grip span and the direction of surface normals, and truncates surfaces.

AMEXTRUDESF

Creates a surface by extruding a line, arc, circle, ellipse, spline, or polyline.

AMFILLET3D

Creates a smoothly fitted arc of constant radius between wires.

AMFILLETSF

Creates a fillet surface along the intersection of two surfaces.

AMFITSPLINE

Smooths wire objects by fitting them with a smooth NURBS spline.

AMFLOW

Creates flow wires in the U and V directions.

AMINTERSF

Intersects two surfaces and creates a 3D polyline at the intersection.

AMJOIN3D

Joins wires to form one 3D polyline, spline, or augmented line.

AMJOINSF

Joins two or more surfaces at their untrimmed base edges into one continuous surface.

10

|

Introduction

Surface Modeling (continued) Command

Description

AMLENGTHEN

Extends or shortens base surface edges by a percentage or distance.

AMLOFTU

Creates a surface through a set of wires.

AMLOFTUV

Creates a surface through two sets of wires.

AMOFFSET3D

Creates copies of 3D polylines that are set off from the original.

AMOFFSETSF

Creates a surface offset from a selected surface.

AMPARTLINE

Creates a 3D polyline on the profile of the surface in the current view.

AMPLANE

Creates one or more planar surfaces.

AMPRIMSF

Creates a cone, cylinder, torus, and sphere.

AMPROJECT

Projects a wire onto a surface.

AMREFINE3D

Changes the point density of lines and 3D polylines.

AMREFINESF

Refines surfaces by increasing or decreasing the number of U and V patches.

AMREPLACEDGE

Replaces a surface edge with an edge of another surface.

AMREVOLVESF

Creates a surface by rotating a path wire around a selected axis.

AMRULE

Creates a straight element surface between two wires.

AMSCALE

Scales wires and surfaces along their axes by a specified factor.

AMSECTION

Creates section cuts through one or more surfaces.

AMSOLCUT

Cuts an AutoCAD solid model with a Mechanical Desktop surface.

AMSTITCH

Stitches surfaces together and heals gaps between existing surfaces.

AMSURFPROP

Calculates the mass properties of surfaces.

AMSWEEPSF

Creates a surface by sweeping cross sections along one or two rails.

AMTUBE

Creates a tubular surface around a selected wire that becomes the axis of the tube.

AMUNSPLINE

Converts a spline to an angular or smooth polyline.

Quick Reference of Commands by Function

|

11

Scenes Use these commands to create and modify scenes in Model mode. Scenes Command

Description

AMCOPYSCENE

Makes a copy of the active scene.

AMDELTRAIL

Deletes a selected trail.

AMDELTWEAKS

Deletes all tweaks associated with the selected parts.

AMEDITTRAIL

Modifies the explosion path start and end offsets in an assembly scene.

AMLOCKSCENE

Locks the position of part instances on a scene-by-scene basis.

AMSUPPRESS

Suppresses the display of instances in a scene.

AMTRAIL

Adds an explosion path to an assembly scene.

AMTWEAK

Adjusts the position of a part or subassembly in an exploded assembly scene.

AMXFACTOR

Controls the explosion factor for scenes.

Drawing Layout Use these commands to create, modify, and annotate drawing views in Drawing mode. Drawing Layout Command

Description

AMANNOTE

Creates, adds, moves, or deletes drawing annotations.

AMAUTODIM

Automatically dimensions parts in Drawing mode.

AMBALLOON

Creates and places balloons.

AMBOM

Creates or edits a bill of materials database for generating parts lists.

AMCENLINE

Creates a parametric centerline in Drawing mode.

AMDATUMID

Creates datums represented as frames containing an alphabetic character.

12

|

Introduction

Drawing Layout (continued) Command

Description

AMDATUMTGT

Creates datum target symbols.

AMDELVIEW

Deletes specified views and all views dependent upon them.

AMDIMALIGN

Aligns linear, rotated, aligned, or angular dimensions with a base dimension of the same type.

AMDIMBREAK

Creates breaks in an existing dimension or extension line of a single associative dimension, while maintaining associativity.

AMDIMFORMAT

Edits individual linear, radial, diameter, or angular dimensions, using a graphical interface, and reflects changes in your drawing while you use the Dimension Formatter dialog box.

AMDIMINSERT

Edits linear, aligned, rotated, and angular dimensions by inserting a new dimension between existing dimensions of the same type simultaneously, as opposed to inserting dimensions individually.

AMDIMJOIN

Edits linear, aligned, and angular (3-point or 2-line) dimensions by joining similar dimensions into a single dimension.

AMDWGDIMDSP

Changes the display of parametric dimensions in Drawing mode.

AMDWGVIEW

Creates base, orthographic, auxiliary, isometric, detail, section, and broken drawing views.

AMEDGESYM

Creates a symbol that defines the condition of a selected edge.

AMEDIT

Edits welding, surface texture, datum and feature identifier symbols, feature control frames, and datum targets.

AMEDITVIEW

Modifies the scale, associativity, and hidden line display of a drawing view.

AMFCFRAME

Creates a feature control frame.

AMFEATID

Creates a feature identifier symbol.

AMHOLENOTE

Creates custom diameter, depth, and angle information for standard hole notes.

AMLEGIBLE

Creates 2D entities representing parts and assemblies in drawing views.

AMLISTVIEW

Lists view information in a text window.

AMMIGRATEBB

Converts data from previous Genius™ releases so that it can be used in Mechanical Desktop 4.

AMMOVEDIM

Controls location of dimensions in Drawing mode.

Quick Reference of Commands by Function

|

13

Drawing Layout (continued) Command

Description

AMMOVEVIEW

Moves a drawing view in Drawing mode.

AMNOTE

Attaches an associative note to holes, undercuts, and parts in Drawing mode.

AMPARTLIST

Creates and places a parts list in a drawing.

AMPARTREF

Creates a reference to a part.

AMPARTREFEDIT

Edits data associated with a part reference.

AMPOWERDIM

Creates dimensions in Model mode and Drawing mode.

AMPOWEREDIT

Edits parametric dimensions, reference dimensions, and annotation objects.

AMREFDIM

Creates Drawing mode reference dimensions between part edges created in Model mode, and a limited set of objects created in Drawing mode.

AMSTYLEI

Imports dimension styles defined in any DWG file without your having to attach and detach or insert an entire drawing.

AMSURFSYM

Adds surface texture finish symbols to drawings.

AMSYMLEADER

Adds or removes leaders from existing symbols.

AMSYMSTD

Edits and defines drafting standards for symbols.

AMTEMPLATE

Creates, renames, and edits templates for hole notes.

AMTOLCONDITION

Controls tolerances used by parametric dimensions.

AMVIEWOUT

Converts Mechanical Desktop drawing views to AutoCAD 2D data.

AMWELDSYM

Creates a welding symbol.

General Use these commands to control overall settings and general functions in Mechanical Desktop.

14

|

Introduction

General Command

Description

AMABOUT

Displays version and copyright information.

AMACISOUT

Exports parts and assemblies directly to ACIS files for import into other applications.

AMBLDFEATNM

Changes the Browser feature names to the localized language.

AMBROWSER

Controls the display of the Desktop Browser.

AMBROWSERFONT

Changes the text font and size used by the Desktop Browser.

AMIDFIN

Reads printed circuit board (PCB) data in the Intermediate Data Format (IDF) and converts it to AutoCAD and Mechanical Desktop objects.

AMMODE

Controls whether Model or Drawing mode is in effect.

AMOPTIONS

Manages part, assembly, surface, scene, drawing, and desktop preferences from a single dialog box.

AMRECOVER

Audits a file and fixes any errors.

AMROTCENTER

Calculates a new center of rotation at the 3D center of all visible objects.

AMSELROT

Calculates a new center of rotation by allowing the user to specify a point for the rotation.

AMSTLOUT

Outputs solids, regions, parts, and subassemblies to the STL format used for stereo lithography.

AMSUPPRCOLOR

Controls the color of suppressed dimensions and DOF symbols.

AMUPDATE

Regenerates the active part, assembly, scene, or drawing view to reflect new dimensions, constraints, and changes to existing features.

AMVIEW

Controls viewing in Model mode.

AMVISIBLE

Controls the visibility of work features, parts, assemblies, scenes, drawings, and geometric objects.

AMVRMLOUT

Converts selected objects to VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language) to be viewed on a Web page.

AMXREFCONVERT

Simplifies the names of layers, blocks, linetypes, text styles, dimension styles, and multiline styles that are imported with external references and remain after the external references have been localized.

Quick Reference of Commands by Function

|

15

16

Commands

1

In This Chapter

This chapter contains a comprehensive description of

■ Using commands

each Mechanical Desktop® command. The commands are listed in alphabetical order. Each description includes the different methods for issuing the command. The command reference information in this chapter is also available in online Help. From the Help menu, choose Reference Topics. Select Quick Reference of Commands, then Mechanical Desktop.

17

AM2DPATH Creates a path for a sweep feature from an open or closed sketch

Use AM2DPATH to create paths for sweep features. AM2DPATH solves the 2D geometry and dimensions on the active sketch plane. Paths are used in sweep features to describe the trajectory that the profile sweeps along. In addition to creating 2D paths, use AM2DPATH to ■ ■

Create a work plane perpendicular to the start of a path Automatically place a work point at the start of a path

work point created

work point and work plane created

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ 2D Path.

Toolbutton

2D Path

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ 2D Path

Command

AM2DPATH

Select objects: Select objects Select objects: Select more objects or press ENTER to continue Select start point of the path: Specify a point near the beginning of the path Solved underconstrained sketch requiring n dimensions or constraints. Create a profile plane perpendicular to the path? [Yes/No] : Choose an option or press ENTER

Yes Places a work plane and a work point at the start of the path. Plane=Parametric, ENTER to Accept Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate]:

18

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Choose an option or press ENTER

Z-Flip Flips the direction of the Z axis for the work plane. Rotate Rotates the XY axes of the work plane.

No Places a work point at the start of the path, but not a work plane.

AM2SF Changes objects into surfaces

AM2SF changes the following objects into 3D surfaces ■ ■ ■ ■

Arcs, circles, lines, and polylines with thickness 3D polygon meshes AutoCAD solids and bodies Mechanical Desktop solid parts

Use AM2SF to convert individual faces or all faces of a 3D object. If you are converting a Mechanical Desktop part, save a copy of your drawing first. AM2SF does not keep the original part.

parametric part

surfaced part

Avoid converting 3D polygon meshes that haven’t been smoothed. Such a conversion creates blended areas between each facet. AM2SF ignores the width of polylines.

NOTE Some solids produce multiple surfaces.

AM2SF

|

19

Converting Single Faces Toolbutton

Convert Face

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ From ACAD

Command

AM2SF

Enter an option [Face/Objects] : Enter f to select a single face

Converting All Faces Toolbutton

Convert All

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ From ACAD

Command

AM2SF

Enter an option [Face/Objects] : Press ENTER to select objects

Face Converts selected faces of 3D objects into trimmed surfaces. The original object is not changed or deleted. Select face: Select a face Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n to toggle to the next face, or press ENTER to continue Select face: Select another face, or press ENTER

Objects Converts all faces of selected objects into trimmed surfaces. The original object is deleted. Select objects: Select an object Select objects: Select another object, or press ENTER

AM3DPATH Creates a 3D path for sweep features

Use AM3DPATH to create a ■ ■ ■ ■

20

|

Chapter 1

Helical path Spline path Pipe center path Path from existing part edges

Commands

Creating a 3D Helix Path Helical paths are used to create swept features such as threads, springs, and coils. You must have an existing work axis, circular edge, or circular face before you can create a helical path.

circular 3D helix path

elliptical 3D helix path

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ 3D Helix Path.

Toolbutton

3D Path

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ 3D Helix Path

Command

AM3DPATH

Path type: [Helical/Spline/Pipe/Edge] :

Press ENTER to continue

The first prompt is displayed only if you are using the toolbutton or command method. Select work axis, circular edge, or circular face for helical center: Select an existing work axis, circular edge, or circular face

Helix Dialog Box

AM3DPATH

|

21

Type Determines the type of controls to use to define the path. Pitch and Revolution

Creates a 3D path using a specified number of revolutions and the pitch between revolutions.

Revolution and Height

Creates a 3D path with a specified number of revolutions and the overall height.

Height and Pitch

Creates a 3D path using an overall height and the pitch between revolutions.

Spiral

Creates a planar path controlled by the number of revolutions and the pitch between revolutions.

Orientation Controls the direction and start angle of the path. Specify whether the path rotates clockwise or counter-clockwise, and define a start angle from the sketch plane that the path starts from. Shape Controls the shape of the path, its overall diameter, the major and minor axes of an elliptical path, and the taper angle. Circle

Creates a circular path.

Ellipse

Creates an elliptical path.

NOTE If you choose to create a circular path, specify the diameter. If you choose to create an elliptical path, specify the major and minor axes. Taper Angle

Controls the amount of taper applied to the path.

Profile Plane Controls whether a work plane is created and where it is located.

22

|

None

No work plane is created.

Center Axis/Path

A work plane is created aligned with the start of the path and the work axis used to create the path.

Normal to Path

A work plane is created perpendicular to the start point of the path.

Chapter 1

Commands

Creating a 3D Spline Path 3D spline paths create features, such as hangers, tubes, and complex wire shapes, that are swept along a 3D spline.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ 3D Spline Path.

Toolbutton

3D Path

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ 3D Spline Path

Command

AM3DPATH

Path type: [Helical/Spline/Pipe/Edge] :

Enter s and press ENTER

The first prompt is displayed only if you are using the toolbutton or command method. Select 3D spline path source: Specify a spline Specify start point: Specify an endpoint

3D Spline Path Dialog Box

No. Lists the control points of the path. Select a fit point, and right-click to display a menu. You can constrain a fit point to a work point or a path point, unconstrain a fit point, delete a fit point, or insert a new fit point.

AM3DPATH

|

23

C Indicates the type of constraint applied to the fit point. From Indicates constraint relationships with another fit point on the spline. Delta X, Delta Y, Delta Z Indicates the distance the selected fit point is located from the origin of the path along the X, Y, and Z axes of the sketch plane. Click any field to adjust the value. C Indicates whether a tangency constraint is applied to a fit point. I, J, K Control tangency vectors into and out of a spline. These fields are available only for the spline’s start points and endpoints. Weight Determines the distance a spline segment maintains tangency before it transitions to the next fit point. Create Work Plane This option creates a work plane at the start point of the 3D path. Plane=Parametric Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] : Choose an option or press ENTER Z-Flip

Flips the direction of the Z axis of the work plane.

Rotate

Rotates the XY axes of the work plane.

Creating a 3D Edge Path 3D edge paths are used to sweep a feature along the path of existing part edges.

24

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ 3D Edge Path.

Toolbutton

3D Path

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ 3D Edge Path

Command

AM3DPATH

Path type: [Helical/Spline/Pipe/Edge] :

Enter e and press ENTER

The first prompt is displayed only if you are using the toolbutton or command method. Select model edges (to add): Specify a part edge Select model edges (to add): Specify another part edge, or press ENTER Specify start point: Specify a point Create workplane? [Yes/No] : Choose an option or press ENTER

No Exits the command without creating a work plane.

Yes Creates a work plane and a sketch plane normal to the start of the path. Plane=Parametric Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] : Choose an option or press ENTER Z-Flip Flips the direction of the Z axis of the work plane. Rotate Rotates the XY axes of the work plane.

Creating a 3D Pipe Path 3D pipe paths are used to sweep a feature along a path that is defined by filleted lines and polylines.

AM3DPATH

|

25

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ 3D Pipe Path.

Toolbutton

3D Path

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ 3D Pipe Path

Command

AM3DPATH

Path type: [Helical/Spline/Pipe/Edge] :

Enter p and press ENTER

The first prompt is displayed only if you are using the toolbutton or command method. Select polyline path source: Specify a polyline, arc, or line segment Select polyline path source: Specify another segment, or press ENTER Specify start point: Specify a start point

3D Pipe Path Dialog Box

No. Lists the fit points of the path. Select a fit point, and right-click to display a menu. You can constrain a fit point to a work point or a path point, unconstrain a fit point, delete a fit point, or insert a new fit point. C Indicates the type of constraint applied to the fit point. From Indicates constraint relationships with another fit point on the spline. Delta X, Delta Y, Delta Z Indicates the distance the selected fit point is located from the origin of the path along the X, Y, and Z axes of the sketch plane. Click in any field to adjust the value.

26

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Length Indicates the length of the selected segment. Click the field to change the value. Angle XY Indicates the angle of the segment in the World XY plane. Click the field to change the value. Angle Z Indicates the angle of the segment from the World Z axis. Click the field to change the value. Radius Indicates the radius of the segment. Click the field to change the value. Create Work Plane This option creates a work plane at the start point of the 3D path. Plane=Parametric Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] : Choose an option or press ENTER Z-Flip

Flips the direction of the Z axis of the work plane.

Rotate

Rotates the XY axes of the work plane.

AMABOUT Displays version and copyright information

AMABOUT displays the Mechanical Desktop version and copyright information,

and the contents of the message file mcad.msg.

NOTE You can customize the mcad.msg file. Use any text editor that saves in ASCII format. For example, you can replace the contents of the file with a company banner or user instructions. You can delete the file and no message is displayed. Desktop Menu

Help ➤ About Mechanical Desktop

Command

AMABOUT

AMABOUT

|

27

AMACISOUT Exports parts and assemblies directly to ACIS files for import into other applications

Use AMACISOUT to export parts and assemblies directly to .sat files that can be read by other applications. ACIS models retain the associations between spatial orientations, but the parametrics are lost. To control which version of ACIS to export to, use the ACISOUTVER system variable. The default value is 0, which exports data to ACIS v.5.0. Command

AMACISOUT

Select parts, subassemblies, or 3D solids for output: Select objects Select parts, subassemblies, or 3D solids for output: Select objects or press ENTER

Save File Dialog Box

Save in Specifies the folder for the .sat file.

File Name Specifies the file name.

28

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Save as Type Specifies the type of file to save.

Save Saves the file you have specified.

Cancel Cancels the operation.

AMACTIVATE Activates a specified part, subassembly, assembly, or scene

Use AMACTIVATE to activate ■ ■ ■ ■

A local part or an external part An unconsumed toolbody in the Part Modeling environment A subassembly or an assembly A scene

You can make modifications only if the part, unconsumed toolbody, subassembly, assembly, or scene is active.

Activating a Part Browser

Right-click the part icon and choose Activate Part.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ Activate Part.

Toolbutton

Activate Part

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ Activate Part

Command

AMACTIVATE

(Active: Part PARTNAME, Assembly DRAWINGNAME, Scene SCENENAME) Activate: [Assembly/Part/Scene] <Part>: Press ENTER Select part to activate (or ?) : Specify a name, enter ?, select a part on screen, or press ENTER

AMACTIVATE

|

29

Activating an Assembly or Subassembly Browser

Right-click the assembly or subassembly icon and choose Activate Assembly.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Assembly ➤ Activate Assembly.

Toolbutton

Activate Assembly

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ Activate Assembly

Command

AMACTIVATE

(Active: Part PARTNAME, Assembly DRAWINGNAME, Scene SCENENAME) Activate: [Assembly/Part/Scene] <Part>: Enter a and press ENTER Activate assembly (or ?) : Specify a name, enter ?, or press ENTER

Activating a Scene Browser

Right-click the scene icon and choose Activate Scene.

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Scene ➤ Activate Scene

Command

AMACTIVATE

(Active: Part PARTNAME, Assembly DRAWINGNAME, Scene SCENENAME) Activate: [Assembly/Part/Scene] <Part>: Enter s and press ENTER Scene to activate (or ?) : Specify a name or press ENTER

AMADDCON Applies 2D parametric constraints to solved sketches

Use AMADDCON to add parametric constraints to a selected profile, path, split line, or cut line sketch. You can turn constraints on and off, control their text size, and delete them as required. For information about ■ ■ ■

30

|

Chapter 1

Turning constraints on and off, see “AMSHOWCON” on page 320 Adjusting constraint text size, see “AMOPTIONS” on page 232 Deleting constraints, see “AMDELCON” on page 111

Commands

When you create a profile or path, each object in the sketch is numbered. If a constraint is between two objects, the number of the partner object follows the constraint symbol.

preliminary sketch

2D constraints added

Use AMADDCON to ■ ■ ■

Add constraints between the current sketch and existing model edges, work planes, or work axes that are not part of the selected sketch geometry Clean up loosely sketched geometry where the sketch did not solve as you expected Reduce the number of dimensions required to constrain a sketch

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose 2D Constraints. Choose a constraint from the flyout menu.

Toolbutton

Select the appropriate toolbutton from the 2D Constraints toolbar.

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ 2D Constraints

Command

AMADDCON

[Hor/Ver/PErp/PAr/Tan/CL/CN/PRoj/Join/XValue/YValue/Radius/Length/Mir/Fix]: Choose an option or press ENTER

Hor Forces line, ellipse, and spline segments to be horizontal. Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select an object to add constraint Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select another object or press ENTER

Ver Forces line, ellipse, and spline segments to be vertical. Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select an object to add constraint Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select another object or press ENTER

AMADDCON

|

31

Perp Forces line, ellipse, and spline segments to be perpendicular. Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment Select object to be made perpendicular to: Select the second object to add constraint Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select first object or press ENTER

Par Forces line, ellipse, and spline segments to be parallel. Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment Select object to be made parallel to: Select the second object to add constraint Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object or press ENTER

Tan Forces lines, circles, arcs, ellipse, and spline segments to be tangent. Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse or spline segment Select object to be made tangent to: Select the second object to add constraint Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object or press ENTER

CL Forces line and spline segments to be collinear. Valid selection(s): line or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object Valid selection(s): line or spline segment Select object to be made collinear to: Select the second object to add constraint Valid selection(s): line or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object or press ENTER

32

|

Chapter 1

Commands

CN Forces arcs, circles, ellipses, and work points to be concentric. Valid selection(s): arc, circle or ellipse Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object Valid selection(s): arc, circle, or ellipse, or work point Select object to be made concentric to: Select the second object to add constraint Valid selection(s): arc, circle or ellipse Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object or press ENTER

Proj Forces lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, and splines to be projected to another object in the sketch. An object snap must be used to specify which point on the first object is projected to the second object. Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse or spline segment Specify a point to project: Select the first object using an object snap Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse, work point or spline segment Select object to be projected to: Select the second object to add constraint Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse or spline segment Specify a point to project: Select the first object or press ENTER

Join Joins two objects together. Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse or spline segment Specify the first point to be reoriented: Select the first object Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse, work point or spline segment Specify the second point to be joined to: Select the second object to add constraint Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse or spline segment Specify the first point to be reoriented: Select the first object or press ENTER

XValue Forces the centers of arcs and circles, or the endpoints of lines, arcs, and splines to have the same X value. Valid selection(s): line, arc, circle, or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object Valid selection(s): line, arc, circle, or spline segment Select object x value is based on: Select the second object to add constraint Valid selection(s): line, arc, circle, or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object or press ENTER

AMADDCON

|

33

YValue Forces the centers of arcs and circles, or the endpoints of lines, arcs, and splines to have the same Y value. Valid selection(s): line, arc, circle, or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object Valid selection(s): line, arc, circle, or spline segment Select object y value is based on: Select the second object to add constraint Valid selection(s): line, arc, circle, or spline segment Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object or press ENTER

Radius Forces arcs and circles to have the same radius. Valid selection(s): arc or circle Select object to be resized: Select the first object Valid selection(s): arc or circle Select object radius is based on: Select the second object to add constraint Valid selection(s): arc or circle Select object to be resized: Select the first object or press ENTER

Length Forces line and spline segments to have the same length. Valid selection(s): line or spline segment Select object to be resized: Select the first object Valid selection(s): line or spline segment Select object to base size on: Select the second object to add constraint Valid selection(s): line or spline segment Select object to be resized: Select the first object or press ENTER

Mirror Forces lines, arcs, circles, ellipses, and spline segments to become mirror images about a specified axis. The mirror axis must be part of the current sketch or a linear part edge. Select axis to mirror about: Select an object to serve as the mirror axis Select line, circle, arc, or ellipse (object to be constrained as symmetrical): Select the first object Select line, circle, arc, or ellipse (object to be constrained as symmetrical): Select the second object Select axis to mirror about: Select an axis or press ENTER

34

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Fix Forces the endpoint of a sketch segment, or the segment itself, to be fixed in position. This constraint replaces AMFIXPT. Select endpoint or sketch segment to lock its position: Select an object

AMANGLE Creates an angular assembly constraint

Use AMANGLE to create an angular assembly constraint between parts, subassemblies, or assemblies. With AMANGLE you can control the angle between two planes, two vectors, or a combination of a plane and a vector.

before angle constraint

after angle constraint

Planes and vectors can be defined by selecting a combination of points, axes, and planes.

Point A point is defined by ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The end of a line The end of a solid edge The center of an arc, sphere, or torus A work point An AutoCAD point A point on a selected surface edge, specified using Nearest Osnap

Axis An axis is defined by ■ ■ ■ ■

A line or a linear solid edge An axis of an arc, a cylinder, cone, or torus A work axis Two point entities

AMANGLE

|

35

Plane A plane is defined by ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

A part’s planar face An arc A work plane Two axis entities A point and an axis Three point entities

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose 3D Constraints ➤ Angle.

Toolbutton

Angle

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ 3D Constraints ➤ Angle

Command

AMANGLE

Between Two Vectors Select first set of geometry: Define a vector by selecting geometry First set = Axis/Vector, (line) Select first set or [Clear/fAce/Point/Flip/cYcle] : Choose an option or press ENTER Select second set of geometry: Define another vector by selecting geometry Second set = Axis/Vector, (line) Select second set or [Clear/fAce/Point/Flip/cYcle] : Choose an option or press ENTER Angle <0>: Specify an angle and press ENTER

Between Two Planes Select first set of geometry: Define a plane by selecting geometry First set = Plane/Vector Enter an option [Clear/Next/Flip/cYcle] : Choose an option or press ENTER Select second set of geometry: Define another plane by selecting geometry Second set = Plane/Vector Enter an option [Clear/Next/Flip/cYcle] : Choose an option or press ENTER Enter angle <0>: Specify an angle and press ENTER

36

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Between a Plane and a Vector Select first set of geometry: Define a plane by selecting geometry First set = Plane/Vector Enter an option [Clear/Next/Flip/cYcle] : Choose an option or press ENTER Select second set of geometry: Define a vector by selecting geometry Second set = Axis/Vector, (line) Select second set or [Clear/fAce/Point/Flip/cYcle] : Choose an option or press ENTER Angle <0>: Specify an angle and press ENTER

Clear Clears the current selection.

Axis Switches selection to an axis.

Face Switches selection to a face.

Point Switches selection to a point.

Next Highlights the next available face.

Flip Flips the direction for the constraint.

Cycle Cycles through axis, point, line, and plane if they are available for selection.

AMANGLE

|

37

Using the Animated Cursor Use the animated cursor to automate the selection process when you create constraints. By using the animated cursor, you can minimize your response to the command prompts.

Cycling When the cursor is displayed with rotational arrows, use the left mouse button to cycle through available options. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

Flipping When the cursor is displayed with directional arrows, use the left mouse button to flip directions. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

AMANNOTE Creates, adds, moves, or deletes drawing annotations

Use AMANNOTE to create, delete, add, and move annotations associated with drawing views. AMANNOTE parametrically attaches AutoCAD geometry, text, and leaders to points in drawing views, including silhouette edges (the point at which a curved surface turns away from the viewer). When the view is moved or parts updated, the annotation remains attached to the selected point. You can also use AMANNOTE to parametrically attach items such as surface finish symbols and GD&T symbols to drawing views. Toolbutton

Annotation

Command

AMANNOTE

Enter option [Add/Remove/Delete/deTach/Move/Create] : Choose an option or press ENTER

NOTE You can use the Context Menu to create and move annotations, and the Desktop Menu to access all options individually.

38

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Add Adds additional objects to an existing annotation. Select annotation by selecting any of its objects: Select an existing annotation Select objects to add to annotation. Select objects: Select an object to add Select objects: Select another object or press ENTER

Remove Removes selected objects from an existing annotation. Select annotation by selecting any of its objects: Select an existing annotation Select objects to remove from annotation. Select objects: Select an object to remove Select objects: Select another object or press ENTER

Delete Deletes an existing annotation. Select annotation by selecting any of its objects: Select an annotation

Detach Detaches an annotation from the view it is associated with, but does not delete it. Select annotation by selecting any of its objects: Select an annotation

Move Moves an annotation to another location, maintaining its association with the view to which it is attached. Select annotation by selecting any of its objects: Select an annotation Annotation location: Specify a new location Annotation location: Respecify a location or press ENTER

Create Creates an annotation object from selected geometry and associates it to a specified view. Select objects to associate to view. Select objects: Select geometry Select objects: Select more geometry or press ENTER to continue Select point in view to attach annotation: Select a point Annotation containing n objects attached to view.

AMANNOTE

|

39

AMARRAY Creates rectangular and polar arrays of features on the active part

Use AMARRAY to create a rectangular or polar array of features on the active part. AMARRAY creates arrays of sketched features, extrusions, revolutions, sweeps, holes, and combined features. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed Features ➤ Array.

Toolbutton

Array

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Array

Command

AMARRAY

Select feature to be arrayed:

Select a feature

Array Dialog Box The Array dialog box has two tabs—Rectangular and Polar.

Rectangular Tab

40

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Columns Along X Axis Specifies the number of columns and the column spacing for the array. Rows Along Y Axis Specifies the number of rows and the row spacing for the array.

feature selected

rectangular array

To create an array in the negative X and Y directions, enter negative values in the Spacing field for rows and columns.

Polar Tab

Number of Instances Specifies the number of items to create. The selected feature counts as the first item. Angle Specifies the included or incremental angle for the array if it is not full circle. Enter a positive value to create the array in a counterclockwise direction, or a negative value to create the array in a clockwise direction.

AMARRAY

|

41

Angle Type Specifies the type of angle to use. Full Circle

Creates an array through 360 degrees.

Included Angle

Creates an array through a specified angle.

Incremental Angle

Creates an array in increments using the value specified for the angle.

135 60 full circle

included angle

incremental angle

Rotate as Copied Specifies whether the feature is rotated as it is copied. To array a feature without rotating it, you must first create a work point as a reference point for the array. The feature is arrayed about the center point of the array relative to this work point. If you choose to array the selected feature without rotating it, the following prompts are displayed: Select work point, work axis or cylindrical surface for center of array: Select a work point, work axis, or cylindrical surface Select work point to be used as reference point: Select a work point

circular face and work point selected

feature not rotated

OK Exits the Array dialog box and creates the array. A rectangular array is automatically created. A polar array issues the following prompt: Select work point, work axis or cylindrical surface for center of array: Select a work point, work axis, or cylindrical surface

42

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Selecting a Work Point or a Work Axis If you select a work point or a work axis, the array is automatically created. Selecting a Cylindrical Face If you select a cylindrical face, a work axis is first created through the center of the face, and then the array is created.

Done Exits the Array dialog box and the command.

Return to Dialog Returns to the Array dialog box after an array has been created.

AMASSIGN Gives a value to a part attribute or adds a new user-defined attribute to the part definition

Use AMASSIGN to attach information to your parts and subassemblies. You can change values of existing attributes or create new ones to hold additional information about the parts in your design. Toolbutton

Assign Attributes

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ Assign Attributes

Command

AMASSIGN

Assign Attributes Dialog Box

AMASSIGN

|

43

Part/Subassembly Definitions Lists the part and subassembly definitions that exist in the current drawing.

Value Specifies the value of the selected attribute. This value can be modified.

Attributes Specifies the names of the attributes on the current part definition.

Pick Closes the dialog box temporarily and displays a prompt for selecting a part or subassembly with your cursor. Select Part/Subassembly: Select a part or subassembly After you choose a valid part, the dialog box is displayed with the name of the part highlighted under Part/Subassembly definitions.

Add Opens the Add New Attribute dialog box.

Delete Deletes the currently selected attribute.

Add New Attribute Dialog Box

Attribute Name Specifies a name for the attribute you want to add.

Attribute Value Specifies a value for the new attribute.

44

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Column Data Type Sets the type of data to use for the new attribute. String Specifies that the new attribute is character data. Integer Specifies that the new attribute is a whole number. Real Specifies that the new attribute is a decimal value.

AMASSMPROP Generates mass properties information about parts and subassemblies

Use AMASSMPROP to calculate mass properties information for parts and subassemblies in an assembly. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Analysis ➤ Mass Properties.

Toolbutton

Mass Properties

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Analysis ➤ Mass Properties

Command

AMASSMPROP

Enter an option (parts/subassemblies) [Name/Select] <Select>: Choose an option

Name Specify a part or subassembly by name. Using this option, you can select only one part or subassembly. Enter part or subassembly instance name or [?]: Specify a name or press ENTER

Select Select parts and subassemblies to include in the mass properties calculations. You can select as many parts or subassemblies as you like. Select part and subassembly instances: Select a part or subassembly Select part and subassembly instances: Select another part or subassembly or press ENTER

AMASSMPROP

|

45

Assembly Mass Properties Dialog Box

% Error Specifies the maximum allowable error as a percentage.

Coordinate System Calculates mass properties values based on the part’s center of gravity, the current UCS, or the WCS. Part CG Reports calculated values relative to the part's center of gravity. UCS Reports calculated values relative to the current user coordinate system. WCS Reports calculated values in the World Coordinate System.

Material Displays the Select Material dialog box.

Assembly Units Specifies the units of measurement used in the assembly.

Mass Units Specifies the units of measurement used to report the mass of the parts or subassemblies.

OK Brings up the Assembly Mass Properties Results dialog box. This dialog box reports the specified data for the selected part(s).

46

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Select Material Dialog Box

Assign Assigns a material to the currently selected part or subassembly definition.

Part/Subassembly Definition Lists the part and subassembly definitions you have selected. Highlight a definition and use Assign to attach a material. Repeat for each definition.

OK Returns you to the Assembly Mass Properties dialog box.

Assembly Mass Properties Results Dialog Box

AMASSMPROP

|

47

File Displays the New Massprop File dialog box.

New Massprop File Dialog Box

Save in Displays the directory tree. Select a directory where the saved file will reside.

File Name Displays the file name for the mass properties information. You can edit the default file name.

Save as Type Specifies the extension for the saved file.

AMAUDIT Lists externally referenced drawing files that need updating

Use AMAUDIT to determine whether all externally referenced part definitions are up to date in the current combined part or assembly model. Drawing files, including nested external references, are listed if they have changed since the current file was opened or after the last refresh command. To update an external reference, it must be opened and saved. In the master drawing file, use AMREFRESH after all externally referenced files are updated. See “AMREFRESH” on page 298.

48

|

Chapter 1

Commands

NOTE If a changed part is externally referenced to a subassembly that is externally referenced to an assembly, AMAUDIT reports the drawing file that has changed and the subassembly that needs updating. Performing AMREFRESH on the assembly has no effect until the subassembly is opened and saved. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Assembly ➤ Audit.

Toolbutton

Audit External Refs

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ Audit

Command

AMAUDIT

If no out-of-date part definitions are found, an AutoCAD Message dialog box is displayed, indicating that all files are up to date. If out-of-date part definitions are found, the Check External References dialog box is displayed.

Check External References Dialog Box

Changed Files Displays the external files that have changed in the current assembly.

Files to Update Displays the files that must be updated in order. For information about dependencies, select a file from this list, and click Info.

Info Provides information about dependencies for the selected file. Opens the Dependent External References dialog box.

AMAUDIT

|

49

Dependent External References Dialog Box

Dependent Files Displays the files that are dependent on the selected file.

AMAUGMENT Creates augmented lines from surface edges, internal trim lines, and display lines

An augmented line has a vector at every point in the line. Using AMAUGMENT to create an augmented line on a surface does not change the surface. Augmented lines are displayed on the current layer and in the current color. You can use augmented lines to solve problems in positioning and orienting surfaces. For example, you can position the vectors of an augmented line to generate a helical surface. The capabilities of AMAUGMENT are critical in the following manufacturing applications: ■ ■ ■

Creating a cutter path for 4- and 5-axis milling Creating a cutter path for 4- and 5-axis cutting, such as laser, water jet, or wire electrodischarge machining (EDM) Creating a 5-axis coordinate measuring machine (CMM) path for quality assurance testing of manufactured parts or tooling

In surface modeling, use augmented lines to force tangency at surface edges and to produce single rail sweeps, using the vectors to orient the cross section.

50

|

Toolbutton

Augmented Line

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Wireframe ➤ Augmented Lines

Command

AMAUGMENT

Chapter 1

Commands

Angle=0 Distance=0.0000 Spacing=Optimal Select surface wire or [Angle/Distance/Spacing]: Select a surface wire Select surface wire or [Angle/Distance/Spacing]: Choose an option, select another wire, or press ENTER

Select Surface Wire Creates augmented lines from the surface wires you select. Valid input for surface wires is all surface edges, the actual base surface edges, internal trim edges, and surface display U and V lines.

before AMAUGMENT

after AMAUGMENT

The portion of the surface edge contained between any two nodes determines the limits of the selected edge.

Angle Controls the angle of the vectors of the augmented line. Enter an angle between 0 and 360 degrees to rotate the vectors. Rotation occurs in a plane normal to the surface trim line and parallel to each vector. The default setting for the angle of the vectors is 0, which is normal to the surface.

45 degree

90 degrees

Using AMAUGMENT to control the angle of the vectors, you can create custom augmented lines to build new surfaces at specific angles to other surfaces.

AMAUGMENT

|

51

Distance Offsets the augmented line from the edge to the interior of the surface. A negative distance offsets the augmented line from the interior of the surface.

positive distance

negative distance

Distance is a true 3D value measured along the surface.

Spacing Controls the number of vertices in the augmented line. To increase or decrease the number of vectors in the augmented line, increase or decrease the number of vertices. Optimal Determines the minimum number of vertices required on the augmented line to keep the accuracy within the current system tolerance setting. Vertices Establishes a specific number of vertices, equally spaced along an augmented line. Vertices <10>:

Enter a value or press ENTER

Step Separates vertices along the contour of the augmented line by the distance you enter. Use to control placement of the vectors in the augmented line. Step<1.0000>: Enter a value or press ENTER

52

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMAUTODIM Automatically dimensions parts in Drawing mode

Use AMAUTODIM to automatically dimension parts in Drawing mode. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Automatic Dimensioning.

Toolbutton

Automatic Dimensioning

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Automatic Dimensioning

Command

AMAUTODIM

The Automatic Dimensioning dialog box opens, where you can set up the type of dimensions to create.

Automatic Dimensioning Dialog Box Controls the settings for automatic dimensioning. The dialog box has three tabs: Parallel, Ordinate, and Shaft/Symmetric.

Parallel Tab

Type Controls the type of dimension to create. Baseline

Creates baseline dimensions.

Chain

Creates chain dimensions.

Both Axes Creates both horizontal and vertical dimensions.

AMAUTODIM

|

53

Rearrange in New Style Rearranges existing dimensions. Select Additional Contour Allows additional edges to be selected for dimensioning. Display Dim Dialog Opens the Power Dimensioning dialog box, where you can add tolerances and fit symbols to dimensions.

Ordinate Tab

Type Controls the type of dimension to create. Ordinate

Creates ordinate dimensions and varies leader lengths, to align dimension text.

Equal Leader Length

Creates ordinate dimensions with equal leader lengths.

Both Axes Creates both horizontal and vertical dimensions. Rearrange in New Style Rearranges existing dimensions. Select Additional Contour Allows additional edges to be selected for dimensioning. Display Dim Dialog Opens the Power Dimensioning dialog box, where you can add tolerances and fit symbols to dimensions.

54

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Shaft/Symmetric Tab

Type Controls the type of dimension to create. Full Shaft

Creates diameter dimensions for shafts and cylindrical parts.

Symmetric

Creates dimensions for symmetrical parts.

Place Dimensions Inside Contour Forces dimensions inside the contours of a shaft or cylindrical part. Rearrange in New Style Rearranges existing dimensions. Select Additional Contour Allows additional edges to be selected for dimensioning. Display Dim Dialog Opens the Power Dimensioning dialog box, where you can add tolerances and fit symbols to dimensions.

OK Closes the dialog box and continues on the command line. Select entities: Specify an object to dimension Select entities: Specify another object to dimension First extension line origin: Specify the first extension line origin Place dimension line [Options/Pickobj] : Choose an option or specify a location Starting point for next extension line: Specify the start point for another dimension, or press ENTER

Options Opens the PowerDim Options dialog box.

AMAUTODIM

|

55

Pick Objects Allows selection of additional part edges. Select object: Specify an edge Place dimension line [Options/Pickobj] : Choose an option or specify a location Starting point for next extension line: Specify the start point for another dimension, or press ENTER

PowerDim Options Dialog Box

Power Creates power dimensions.

Horizontal Creates horizontal dimensions.

Vertical Creates vertical dimensions.

Aligned Creates aligned dimensions.

Rotated Creates rotated dimensions.

Distance Snap Controls the settings for the distance snap used when dimensions are created. Use Distance Snap Controls whether a distance snap is used. Distance Specifies the value for the distance snap.

56

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Pick Object Contour Allows selection of additional part edges. Select object: Specify an edge Place dimension line [Options/Pickobj] : Choose an option or specify a location Starting point for next extension line: Specify the start point for another dimension, or press ENTER

AMBALLOON Creates and places balloons

Use AMBALLOON to attach associative balloon callouts to part references in your drawing. You can control the display of balloons by modifying the symbol standards you have set in your drawing. Use AMSYMSTD to control symbol standards. Typically, balloons are created in Drawing mode, but you can also create them in Model mode. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Parts List ➤ Balloon.

Toolbutton

Balloon

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Parts List ➤ Balloon

Command

AMBALLOON

Select balloon’s operation: [Auto/Collect/Manual/One/Renumber] : Choose an option to create a balloon, or press ENTER

Collect Places balloons for selected part references together and attaches them to an existing balloon. Select pick object: Select the part references Select pick object: Press ENTER Select balloon: [New]: Enter n or select a balloon

AMBALLOON

|

57

New Creates a new balloon.

Manual Creates a new part reference block at a specified point and attaches a balloon. Select point [Block/Copy/Reference]: Choose an option or specify a point The Part Ref Attributes dialog box opens. See “AMPARTREF” on page 262 for information about the dialog box options. Select position: Specify a point to place the new part reference Select a start point of balloon: Specify a start point for the balloon leader Next Point: Specify a point for the end of the first leader segment Next Point: Specify a point for the next leader segment end, or press ENTER

Block Attaches a balloon to a specified block reference. Select block reference:

Specify a block

Copy Creates a copy of an existing part reference and attaches a balloon. Select reference to make a copy: Specify an existing part reference Reference Creates a part reference that references another part reference or a balloon. Select reference: Specify an existing part reference or balloon

58

|

Chapter 1

Commands

One Places a single balloon. Select pick object: Select a part reference Select a start point of balloon: Specify a start point for the balloon leader Next Point: Specify a point for the end of the first leader segment Next Point: Specify a point for another leader segment end, or press ENTER Select pick object: Select another part reference, or press ENTER

Auto Places and aligns balloons for selected part references. Select pick object: Select part references Select pick object: Select additional part references, or press ENTER to continue Align Horizontal/: Choose an option or specify a point

vertically and horizontally aligned balloons

Renumber Renumbers selected balloons. Enter starting item number: <1>: Specify a number Enter increment: <1>: Specify an increment Select balloon: Specify a balloon Select balloon: Specify another balloon or press ENTER

AMBALLOON

|

59

AMBASICPLANES Creates static work planes based on top, front, and side views of a specified point

Use AMBASICPLANES to create static work planes based on the top, front, and side views of a specified point. Basic planes are useful when you are creating an initial feature for a part in a new drawing. AMBASICPLANES creates a new part definition before the work planes are placed. Toolbutton

Create Basic Work Planes

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Work Features ➤ Basic 3D Work Planes

Command

AMBASICPLANES

Pick origin: Specify a point

AMBLDFEATNM Changes the Browser feature names to the localized language

Use AMBLDFEATNM to display features listed in the Browser in a localized language. For example, if you load an English version and then a German version, this command resets the Browser feature names to German. Command

AMBLDFEATNM

AMBLEND Creates a surface between two, three, or four wires or surfaces

AMBLEND creates a surface that fits smoothly between two to four wires. The

new surface is tangent to each wire and effectively joins them. You can use AMBLEND to solve difficulties when surfacing 3D models that have little geometry. AMBLEND accepts augmented line input to control the tangency of the new surface at its edge. Given only the edges of the area to be surfaced, AMBLEND creates a new, blended surface.

60

|

Chapter 1

Commands

The following objects are valid wires: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Base surface edges Trimmed surface edges, including interior surface edges, such as the edges of a hole Arcs Augmented lines, circles, and ellipses Lines, polylines, and splines

You must select at least two wires. Select surfaces on the edges where you want the new blended surface created.

1 2

To create a blended surface from three objects, select two objects that face each other, then select the third object.

1

2 3

To create a blended surface from four objects, select edges of surfaces in nonadjacent pairs. 2 4

3 1

If the selected wires are surface edges or augmented lines, then AMBLEND maintains the tangency defined by the surface normals or augmented line vectors in the blended surface. If the selected wires are arcs, circles, ellipses, lines, polylines, or splines, AMBLEND doesn’t explicitly control the tangency along the edge of the

blended surface.

AMBLEND

|

61

If the selected wires are polylines, AMBLEND fits the blended surface between them based on the current settings of the AMPFITLEN and AMPFITANG system variables. Toolbutton

Blended Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Blend

Command

AMBLEND

Select first wire: Select the first wire Select second wire: Select the second wire Select third wire [Weights]: Choose an option, select a third wire, or press ENTER Select fourth wire [Weights]: Choose an option, select a fourth wire, or press ENTER

Weights Specifies the tangency of the blended surface to the original augmented lines or surfaces. This option is available only if you select wires from existing surfaces. First weight <1.0000>: Enter a value Second weight <1.0000>: Enter a value Using the same value for the first and second weights produces a blended surface that follows the tangents of the input wires at an equal distance. Using different values produces a blended surface that follows the tangent of one wire farther than the other.

AMBOM Creates or edits a bill of materials database for generating parts lists

Use AMBOM to create or edit a bill of materials (BOM) database. The BOM database is a spreadsheet that lists all the parts and subassemblies in your assembly file in the order in which they were created or instanced in your drawing.

62

|

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Parts List ➤ BOM Database.

Toolbutton

Edit BOM Database

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Parts List ➤ BOM Database

Command

AMBOM

Chapter 1

Commands

BOM Dialog Box

Use the toolbuttons at the top of the BOM dialog box to perform the tasks described below.

Print Prints the database.

Add Parts Adds parts to the database. This option is available in Model mode only. Use this option when you have added or created new parts since generating a BOM database. Mechanical Desktop scans your drawing and adds the new parts to your BOM. Use this option when you have deleted a part from the database and you need to add it again.

Delete Column Deletes the current column. A message requests confirmation. Item, Description, and Qty (Count) columns cannot be deleted.

Insert Column Inserts a column in front of the current column and opens the BOM Properties dialog box. The new column is highlighted. Double-click the Column, Caption, and Width fields to edit the default values.

Add Item Adds a row at the end of the database. Double-click the columns in the BOM dialog box to enter values.

AMBOM

|

63

Insert Item Inserts a row above the current row. Double-click the columns in the BOM dialog box to enter values.

Delete Item Deletes the current row. A message requests confirmation.

Standard Properties Opens the BOM Properties dialog box used to edit BOM, balloon, and parts list properties for the standards you are using in your drawing. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

Assembly Properties Opens the Assembly Properties dialog box, used to add or change properties for the assemblies in your drawing.

BOM Representation Opens the BOM Representation dialog box, used to control the appearance of part instances in subassemblies.

Sort Sorts the database.

Insert Parts List Inserts a parts list into your drawing. See “AMPARTLIST” on page 258.

Ballooning Creates balloons in your drawing. See “AMBALLOON” on page 57.

Export Opens the Export dialog box. You can export data in a variety of formats.

Import Opens the Import dialog box. You can import data in a variety of formats.

Set Values Opens the Set Values dialog box, used to control the values for each column in the database.

OK Closes the BOM dialog box and saves the changes.

64

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Cancel Closes the BOM dialog box without saving changes.

Apply Applies the changes made in the BOM dialog box and leaves the dialog box open.

BOM Properties Dialog Box

Column Lists the columns defined in the BOM database. Double-click a column name to change its value. Column names in red cannot be edited.

Caption Lists the captions to be used for the columns in the BOM and the parts list. Double-click a caption to change it.

Width Lists the widths of the columns. Double-click to edit.

Equivalents Lists equivalent attribute names for columns. Double click to edit.

AMBOM

|

65

Data Type Determines the type of data to use for the highlighted column. You may specify text, integer, or real data types.

Size Sets the maximum character size of data.

Precision Sets the decimal place precision for data. Available only if the data type is real.

Caption Alignment Provides options for left-aligned, right-aligned, and centered captions.

Data Alignment Provides options for left-aligned, right-aligned, and centered data.

Modify Provides access to the Balloon Properties and Properties for ANSI dialog boxes.

Default Resets all values to the default values.

BOM Representation Dialog Box

Expanded Lists all instances of parts in one field, whether they are in subassemblies or the main assembly.

Structured Lists instances separately. Part instances in the main assembly are listed in one field. Instances that are part of a subassembly are listed in their own field and numbered using a specified separator.

66

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Separator Specifies the separator to use when structuring a BOM.

Use Assembly Path Lists part instances that belong to a subassembly when it is expanded in the BOM dialog box.

Balloon Properties Dialog Box

Standard Balloon Controls the type of balloon to use. Available types are ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Circular Open Polygon Circular 2 Text Linear

AMBOM

|

67

Text Height Sets the text height for the balloon text. Color Sets the color of the balloon.

Use Custom Block Uses a user-defined block as the balloon type. Leader to Center of User Block Specifies that the leader is attached to the center of the user-defined block. Leader to Extents of User Block Specifies that the leader is attached to the extents of the user-defined block.

Arrow Type Sets the type of arrow for the balloon leader.

Use Auxiliary Arrow Type Sets the type of arrow for auxiliary leaders.

Columns to Display Determines the information that will be displayed in the balloon.

Default Resets values to the default values.

Apply Applies the settings to use when creating balloons.

Properties for ANSI Dialog Box The Properties for ANSI dialog box controls Parts List settings. It contains two tabs, Standard and Custom Blocks.

68

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Standard Tab

Parts List Heading Controls the settings for parts list headings. Insert Heading

Controls whether a heading is applied to the parts list and how it is formatted. You can place the heading at the top or bottom of the parts list.

Heading Gap

Controls the size of the gap between the parts list and the heading.

Text Color

Controls the color of the heading text.

Text Height

Controls the height of the heading text.

Title

Controls whether a title is used.

Attach Point Controls the location of the point used to attach the parts list to the drawing. Frame Color Controls the color of the parts list frame. Row Gap Controls the spacing between rows. Line Spacing Controls the spacing between lines in a row.

AMBOM

|

69

Wrap Text Controls whether text is wrapped to fit in the columns of the parts list. Printer Setup Opens the Printer Setup dialog box. Columns to Display Determines which columns are displayed in the parts list. Default Resets all values to the default values. Apply Applies the settings to use when creating parts lists.

Custom Blocks Tab

Use Custom Block for Parts List Specifies whether a custom block is used for a parts list. Block Name Scheme Specifies the name of the custom block to use. Parts List Heading Controls whether a parts list heading is used in the custom block.

70

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Attach Point Controls the location of the point used to attach the parts list to the drawing. Filter Empty References Filters references that are not attached to a part from the parts list. Evaluate dsk-File Reads a specified data file containing custom block information. Apply Applies the settings to use when creating parts lists.

Print Setup Dialog Box

Margins Sets values for the printer margins and specifies whether the parts list is centered on the page.

Print Specifies whether captions and headings are printed.

Fonts Tab Controls the fonts to use for the title, heading, and body of the parts list.

AMBOM

|

71

Line Tab Controls the line thicknesses to use in the parts list.

Printer Opens the Microsoft® Windows® Print Setup dialog box.

Preview Opens the Preview dialog box.

Default Returns all values to the default values for the current standard.

Preview Dialog Box

Previous Displays the previous parts list, if more than one exists in the current drawing.

Next Displays the next parts list, if more than one exists in the current drawing.

Close Closes the dialog box.

72

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Assembly Properties Dialog Box

Name By default, displays the drawing name. Double-click in the white field to specify a name for your assembly.

Material Specifies a material.

Note Specifies any notes you want assigned to the assembly.

Vendor Specifies a vendor name.

BOM Name Specifies a name for the bill of material to associate with this assembly. By default, the active assembly name is displayed.

AMBOM

|

73

Export Dialog Box

Save in Specifies the folder for the BOM table.

File Name Specifies the file name for the BOM table.

Save as Type Specifies the data type. Supported types are Microsoft® Access, Microsoft® Excel, dBase® III, dBase® IV, Microsoft® FoxPro, and Format Text.

Table Name Specifies the name for the exported table.

Import Dialog Box

74

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Look in Specifies the folder to look in for the BOM table.

File Name Specifies the file name for the BOM table.

Files of Type Specifies the data type. Supported types are Microsoft Access, Microsoft Excel, dBase III, dBase IV, Microsoft FoxPro, and Format Text.

Table Name Specifies the table name.

Set Values Dialog Box

Column Selects a column to modify.

Increment Specifies the increment for columns.

Add Adds a column to the database.

Start Value Specifies a start value. If the data is numeric, specify a start value. If the data is text, specify a value.

Step Specifies the increment for increasing the start value. This field is not available if the column being edited contains a text data type.

AMBOM

|

75

AMBREAK Breaks one surface into two surfaces along a specified edge

Use AMBREAK to split a surface by breaking it perpendicular to a selected edge. Selecting a point on the V edge causes a break along a U line. AMBREAK displays a preview of the break, using the color defined by the GRIPCOLOR system variable. The command line indicates the location of the

break, expressed as a percentage along the edge of the surface. Breaking a surface at every C1 tangency makes C2-continuous surfaces. A surface may or may not contain multiple C1 tangencies. Toolbutton

Break Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Break

Command

AMBREAK

Select surface: Select a surface (Percent = n%) Enter an option [C1 tangents/Flip/Reposition] : Choose an option or press ENTER The C1 Tangents option is not displayed if you select a surface that has no C1 discontinuity.

Break U, Break V, Break C1 Tangents Accepts the previewed break.

C1 Previews the break in the surface where there is a C1 discontinuity. Enter an option [U/V] :

Choose an option

Break C1 Tangents Breaks the surface at the previewed C1 tangency.

C1 tangent previewed

76

|

Chapter 1

Commands

surface broken

U Previews the surface break along the U line and returns to the prompt: Enter an option [C1 tangents/Flip/Reposition] : Enter an option or press ENTER

U line previewed

surface broken

Press ENTER to break the surface along the U line instead of at the C1 tangent. V Previews the surface break along the V line and returns to the prompt: Enter an option [C1 tangents/Flip/Reposition] : Enter an option or press ENTER

V line previewed

surface broken

Press ENTER to break the surface along the V line instead of at the C1 tangent.

Flip Flips the direction of the break shown in the preview. For example, if the preview shows a break in the V direction, this option changes it to the U direction. One of the following prompts is displayed, depending on the previewed direction of the break: Enter an option [Flip/Reposition] : Choose an option or press ENTER Enter an option [Flip/Reposition] : Choose an option or press ENTER

AMBREAK

|

77

Reposition Changes the location of the break. One of the following prompts is displayed, depending on the previewed direction of the break: Enter U break percentage or [Specify U break] : Choose an option or press ENTER Enter V break percentage or [Specify U break] : Choose an option or press ENTER Specify U (V) Break Use this option to select another location. Percentage Use this option to specify a new percentage.

AMBREAKLINE Creates a break line sketch to use for a breakout section drawing view

Use AMBREAKLINE to define a break line for a breakout section drawing view. The break line may be created on a part face or a work plane.

break line sketch

breakout drawing view

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ Break Line.

Toolbutton

Break Line

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Break Line

Command

AMBREAKLINE

Select objects for sketch: Select objects Select objects for sketch: Select more objects or press ENTER

78

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMBROWSER Controls the display of the Desktop Browser

Use AMBROWSER to control the display of the Desktop Browser. Toolbutton

Toggle Browser

Desktop Menu

View ➤ Display ➤ Desktop Browser

Command

AMBROWSER

Desktop browser? [ON/OFf] : Choose an option to control the Browser display

AMBROWSERFONT Changes the text font and size used by the Desktop Browser

Use AMBROWSERFONT to control the type and size of the font used by the Desktop Browser. Browser

Click the Options button.

Toolbutton

Options

Desktop Menu

Assist ➤ Desktop Options

Command

AMBROWSERFONT

In the Browser, menu, and toolbutton methods, select the Desktop tab and choose Browser Font to open the Font dialog box. If you use the command line, the Font dialog box opens automatically.

AMBROWSER

|

79

Font Dialog Box

Font Defines the typeface for the text.

Font Style Defines a regular, bold, italic, or bold italic text style.

Size Defines how large the text will be.

Effects Places a line through the text or under the text.

Color Defines the color of the text in the Browser.

Sample Displays an example of the font, style, size, color, and effects you have chosen for the Browser text.

Script Offers a Western script option.

80

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMCAPTUREUCS Saves the current UCS and sketch plane

Use AMCAPTUREUCS to save the current UCS and sketch plane. A UCS block is created containing the information about the UCS and its sketch plane. The X axis is indicated by a single arrow, the Y axis by a double arrow, and the Z axis by a triple arrow.

Use AMRESTOREUCS to recover the saved information. Toolbutton

Capture UCS

Desktop Menu

Assist ➤ Capture 3D UCS

Command

AMCAPTUREUCS

AMCATALOG Maintains a catalog of all standard parts, both local and external, being used in a combined part file or an assembly file

Use AMCATALOG to attach external parts to a part or an assembly drawing, to localize external parts, to create additional part instances in the assembly, and to detach parts from the drawing.

Part Modeling Environment In the Part Modeling environment, use AMCATALOG to attach the part files that are to be used as toolbodies for combined parts. The catalog is available only if a base part already exists in the part drawing. Browser

Click the Catalog icon.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click, and choose Catalog.

Toolbutton

Part Catalog

Desktop Menu

Toolbody ➤ Catalog

Command

AMCATALOG

AMCAPTUREUCS

|

81

Part Catalog Dialog Box The Part Catalog dialog box contains two tabs, External and All. External Tab Lists the external part definitions found in specified directories. By default, the directory where you installed Mechanical Desktop is displayed. Use this tab to control directories, to browse for files, to sort listed files, or to instance, rename, and replace external definitions.

82

|

Part Definitions

Lists all the external part files in the current working directory. Files that are already attached to the drawing have a white background; unreferenced files have a dark gray background. Right-click an attached file to display the menu, to instance, rename, replace, localize, or detach the file. Right-click an unreferenced file to display the menu to attach the file to the current drawing, to sort drawings alphabetically or chronologically, or to view the attached drawings only.

Directories

Lists all attached directories. Right-click in this window to display the menu to attach and detach directories, browse for drawing files, and detach all directories.

Chapter 1

Commands

Preview

Displays a preview of the highlighted drawing. The drawing file and its path are displayed in the field immediately below the Preview window.

Ground Base Part

Displays the name of the grounded base part.

All Tab Lists all externally referenced and localized part definitions. Use this tab to localize or externalize part definitions, create additional instances, and copy part definitions.

External Toolbody Definitions

Lists all externally referenced toolbody definitions. Right-click a part definition to display the menu to instance, rename, replace, localize, unlock, or detach the definition. Right-click the window background to display the menu to sort definitions, purge all locks, or view only the attached definitions.

Local Toolbody Definitions

Lists all localized part definitions. Right-click a definition to display the menu to instance, copy, rename, replace, externalize, or remove the definition from the drawing.

Ground Base Part

Displays the name of the grounded base part.

AMCATALOG

|

83

External Definition Found At

When an external definition is highlighted under External Toolbody Definitions, the path for the definition is displayed.

Browse

Opens the Locate External Definition dialog box.

Save Path

Saves the path for the external definition.

Return to Dialog Determines whether to return to the Part Catalog dialog box after performing a function. OK Closes the Part Catalog dialog box.

Assembly Modeling Environment Use AMCATALOG in the Assembly Modeling Environment to create assemblies of externally referenced and localized parts. Browser

Click the Assembly Catalog icon.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Catalog.

Toolbutton

Assembly Catalog

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Catalog

Command

AMCATALOG

Assembly Catalog Dialog Box The Assembly Catalog dialog box contains two tabs, External and All. External Tab Lists the external part and subassembly definitions found in specified directories. By default, the directory where you installed Mechanical Desktop is displayed. Use this tab to control directories, to browse for files, to sort listed files, or to instance, rename, or replace external definitions.

84

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Part and Subassembly Definitions

Lists all the external drawing files in the current working directory. Files that are already attached to the drawing have a white background; unreferenced files have a gray background. Right-click an attached file to display the menu to instance, rename, replace, localize, or detach the file. Right-click an unreferenced file to display the menu to attach the file to the current drawing, to sort drawings alphabetically or chronologically, or to view the attached drawings only.

Directories

Lists all attached directories. Right-click in this window to display the menu to attach and detach directories, browse for drawing files, or detach all directories.

Preview

Displays a preview of the highlighted drawing. The drawing file and its path are displayed in the field immediately below the Preview window.

Active Assembly

Displays the name of the active assembly.

AMCATALOG

|

85

All Tab Lists all externally referenced and localized part and subassembly definitions. Use this tab to localize or externalize part and subassembly definitions, create additional instances, or copy part definitions.

86

|

External Assembly Definitions

Lists all externally referenced part and subassembly definitions. Right-click a part or subassembly definition to display the menu to instance, rename, replace, localize, unlock, or detach the definition. Right-click the window background to sort definitions, purge all locks, or view only the attached definitions.

Local Assembly Definitions

Lists all localized part and subassembly definitions. Right-click a definition to display the menu to instance, copy, rename, replace, externalize, or remove the definition from the drawing.

External Definition Found At

When an external definition is highlighted under External Assembly Definitions, the path for the definition is displayed.

Browse

Opens the Locate External Definition dialog box.

Save Path

Saves the path for the external definition.

Chapter 1

Commands

Return to Dialog Determines whether to return to the Assembly Catalog dialog box after performing a function. OK Closes the Assembly Catalog dialog box.

Locate External Definition Dialog Box

Look in Specifies the folder to display.

File Name Specifies the name of the external file to open.

Files of Type Specifies the file type to display.

AMCENLINE Creates a parametric centerline in Drawing mode

Use AMCENLINE in Drawing mode to create a centerline and center marks through selected circles and arcs. The centerline is created on the current layer and is parametrically attached to the geometry it references. You can create a centerline between ■ ■ ■

Two edges Along the midpoint of an edge At the center of a circle or arc

AMCENLINE

|

87

AMCENLINE uses the system variables AMCLGAP, AMCLOSHT, and AMCLCM to determine the size of the centermark and centerlines. Center mark size remains fixed throughout updates unless AMCLPAR is turned on.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Annotation ➤ Centerline.

Toolbutton

Centerline

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤Annotation ➤ Centerline

Command

AMCENLINE

Select Edge: Select an edge, circle, or arc Select mirrored edge or : Select another edge, circle, or arc, or press ENTER

Single Edge If only one edge is selected, a centerline is created perpendicular to the selected linear edge through the midpoint. Trim the start and endpoints of the centerline. Select first trim point: Specify a start point for the centerline Select second trim point: Specify an endpoint for the centerline midpoint of linear edge selected

trimmed centerline

Single Circle or Arc If only one circle or arc is selected, a center mark is created at the center of the circle or arc. circle selected

88

|

Chapter 1

Commands

centerline created

Mirrored Edge Creates the centerline along the mirror line between two selected edges or arcs. Trims the centerline to specified start and endpoints. Select first trim point: Specify a start point for the centerline Select second trim point: Specify an endpoint for the centerline 1

2

trimmed centerline

AMCHAMFER Creates a chamfer on the selected edge(s) of the active part

Use AMCHAMFER to create bevelled edges on your parts. If you select an edge that ends at a point where two edges join and are continuously tangent, the chamfer automatically extends until it reaches a noncontinuous end. Multiple chamfers created at the same time become a single feature controlled by one chamfer definition. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed Features ➤ Chamfer.

Toolbutton

Chamfer

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Chamfer

Command

AMCHAMFER

AMCHAMFER

|

89

Chamfer Feature Dialog Box

Operation Determines the method for creating the chamfer. Equal Distance Creates a chamfer at an equal distance along two surfaces, meeting at the selected edge. Uses the Distance1 value in the Parameters section of the dialog box. Select the edge to chamfer: Select the edge to chamfer:

Select an edge Select another edge or press ENTER

distance 1

distance 1

Two Distances Creates a chamfer designated by values in the Distance1 and Distance2 fields in the Parameters section of the dialog box. Select edge to chamfer: Select an edge Press <ENTER> to continue: Press ENTER Apply distance 1 to highlighted face. Enter an option [Next/Accept] : Enter n to cycle to the next face or press ENTER

90

|

Chapter 1

Commands

distance 2 distance 1

Distance x Angle Creates a chamfer defined by values in the Distance1 and Angle fields in the Parameters section of the dialog box. Select edge to chamfer: Select an edge Press <ENTER> to continue: Press ENTER Apply angle value to highlighted face. Enter an option [Next/Accept] : Enter n to cycle to the next face or press ENTER

distance 1 angle

Parameters Sets the values used to create the chamfer. Distance1 Sets the first distance for the chamfer. Distance2 Sets the second distance for the chamfer. Angle Sets the angle for the chamfer.

Return to Dialog Determines whether or not the Chamfer Feature dialog box is displayed after the chamfer has been created.

OK Closes the Chamfer Feature dialog box and continues AMCHAMFER on the command line.

AMCHAMFER

|

91

AMCHECKFIT Measures the distance between objects

Use AMCHECKFIT to measure the minimum 3D distance and maximum 3D deviation between two wires or between a wire and a surface. You can examine, point by point, the distance from every point in a polyline to a selected wire or surface. Distance is important in checking product design and data for CMM (Coordinate Measuring Machine) work; it is used in all types of tooling design. AMCHECKFIT makes wire-to-wire or wire-to-surface comparisons of ■ ■ ■

Original 3D polyline to a spline version made with fewer control points Original input lines to the new surface in order to determine maximum tolerances for conforming to the specification Digitized 3D input from a scanned physical model to the original mathematical surface model

Valid input for a check or target wire is an arc, augmented line, ellipse, point, polyline, or spline. Valid surface input is a surface edge or a surface U or V display line. Toolbutton

Check Fit

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Utilities ➤ Check Fit

Command

AMCHECKFIT

Select check wires: Select a wire Select check wires: Select another wire or press ENTER Select target wire or surface: Select a target wire or surface Minimum distance = n, Maximum distance = n (Scale = 1.0000) Enter an option [Graph/Scale/Table] <exit>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Finding the Distance Between Two Lines To calculate the distance between two wire objects, AMCHECKFIT first converts arcs or splines to polylines at the current tolerance setting. Then it compares the vertices of the check wire with the vertices and linear transition between vertices of the target wire.

92

|

Chapter 1

Commands

It builds a table of minimum corresponding values, and then displays the relative position of the minimum and maximum corresponding values using temporary lines. The temporary lines are displayed using the color defined by the GRIPHOT variable. check wire

target wire

temporary lines displayed

The resulting maximum distance is actually the maximum of the minimums, or the maximum deviation between the two objects.

Finding Distance Between a Line and a Surface To calculate the distance between a wire object and a surface, AMCHECKFIT first converts an arc or spline to a polyline at the current tolerance setting. Then it compares the corresponding values between each polyline vertex and the minimum distance to a normal surface vertex. AMCHECKFIT then calculates a table of minimum values and displays the

relative position of the minimum and maximum corresponding values with temporary lines.

surface

check wire

temporary lines displayed

Graph Displays the relative distances between check and target objects in the form of a graph overlaid on the drawing. The actual distances measured between vertices are scaled by a specified factor to produce the temporary lines of the graph. The minimum and maximum distances are controlled by the GRIPHOT color; all other lines are controlled by GRIPCOLOR.

Scale Changes the scale factor used to display temporary lines. Scale <1.0000>: Enter a value or press ENTER

AMCHECKFIT

|

93

Table Displays the Check Point Data dialog box, which lists vertices and the minimum 3D distance and maximum 3D deviation between two wires or between a wire and a surface.

Check Point Data Dialog Box

Vertex Lists the vertices found on the check wire.

Differences Lists the distances between check wire vertices and target object vertices.

Check Entity Lists the X, Y, Z coordinates of a selected check wire vertex.

Target Entity Lists the X, Y, Z coordinates of the vertex on the target object that corresponds to the selected check wire vertex.

Show Hides the dialog box and shows temporary lines for the vertices you have selected. ENTER to continue: Press ENTER to return to the dialog box

Clear All Unselects all vertices that you have highlighted.

94

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMCOMBINE Combines the active base part with another parametric part, called the toolbody

Use AMCOMBINE to create a single, complex part from two or more parts, using parametric Boolean operations. The active part is called the base part, and the part being combined with the base part is called the toolbody. You can combine as many toolbodies with the base part as you need. The toolbody is nested below a Combine icon that is created in the Desktop Browser.

toolbody base part

Toolbodies can also be combined with other toolbodies. These parts are called nested toolbodies. You cannot combine a part with an instance of itself. After the combined part has been created, you can edit the base part and any of the toolbodies or any of the 3D constraints you have applied to position the parts. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed Features ➤ Combine.

Toolbutton

Combine

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Combine

Command

AMCOMBINE

Enter parametric boolean operation [Cut/Intersect/Join] : Choose an option

Cut Cuts material from a base part, using a selected toolbody. Select part (toolbody) to use for cutting: Select a part

AMCOMBINE

|

95

Join Joins a selected toolbody to a selected part. Select part (toolbody) to be joined:

Select a part

Intersect Creates a new part from the intersecting volume of a base part and a toolbody. Select part (toolbody) to use for intersecting:

Select a part

AMCOPYFEAT Copies sketched and hole features, feature sets, or new features within the same part or from one part to another

Use AMCOPYFEAT to copy a selected feature within the same part or from one part to another. The copied feature will be oriented to the current sketch plane. You can rotate or flip the feature once you have specified its location. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed Features ➤ Copy Feat.

Toolbutton

Copy Feature

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Copy

Command

AMCOPYFEAT

Select feature: Select feature to copy

Sketched Features Parameters=Independent Select location [Parameters]: Enter p to change parameters or specify a point to place the copied feature Parameters=Independent Select location [Parameters/Rotate/Flip]: Specify a new location, choose an option, or press ENTER

selected feature feature copied and rotated

96

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Hole Features Parameters=Independent Select location [Parameters]: Enter p to change parameters or specify a point to place the copied feature Select location [Parameters]: Specify a new location, choose an option, or press ENTER selected feature

active part

copied feature

Parameters Toggles between independent and dependent features. Rotate Changes the rotation of the copied feature. Flip Flips the orientation of the copied feature. Select Location Selects the location for the copied feature. This prompt remains active until you press ENTER, allowing you to fine tune the placement of the feature.

AMCOPYIN Places an external part or assembly in the current drawing

Use AMCOPYIN to place an external part or assembly in the current drawing with the File to Load dialog box. AMCOPYIN localizes the external part or assembly, maintaining parametric relationships. If you are working in a part file that already contains a part, the new localized part automatically becomes an unconsumed toolbody. If you are working in an assembly file, and the new localized assembly has external references, they are maintained. Scenes and drawing views are not imported. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ Copy In.

Toolbutton

Input Part Definition

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ Copy In

Command

AMCOPYIN

AMCOPYIN

|

97

File to Load Dialog Box

Look in Specifies the directory for the file.

File Name Displays the file name of the selected file.

Files of Type Displays files with the specified extension type.

Open Selects the new part to place in the current open file.

Find File Displays the Browse/Search dialog box. The Browse tab displays small bitmap images of drawings in the specified directory and sorts images by file type. The Search tab searches for files by specified type or date of creation.

Locate Searches for the file name you enter in the File name window.

Preview Displays a bitmap of the selected file.

98

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMCOPYOUT Places a part or subassembly in an external file

Use AMCOPYOUT to create a new drawing file of a selected part or subassembly. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ Copy Out.

Toolbutton

Output Part Definition

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ Copy Out

Command

AMCOPYOUT

Part/Subassembly Out Dialog Box

Select Part/Subassembly Select a part or subassembly from the list.

Pick Select a part or subassembly on screen. Select Part/Subassembly: Specify a part or subassembly

File Opens the Output File dialog box and specifies the file name for the new part or subassembly.

OK Writes the selected part or subassembly to a new file.

AMCOPYOUT

|

99

Output File Dialog Box

Save in Specifies the folder for the new file.

File Name Specifies the file name of the new file.

Save as Type Specifies the file extension type for the new file.

AMCOPYSCENE Makes a copy of the active scene

Use AMCOPYSCENE to create a new copy of the active scene. The copy will include tweaks, trails, and individual explosion factors.

100

|

Browser

In the Scene tab, right-click a scene icon and choose Copy.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Scene ➤ Copy Scene.

Toolbutton

Copy Scene

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Scene ➤ Copy Scene

Command

AMCOPYSCENE

Chapter 1

Commands

Enter new scene name of the active scene (SCENE1) <SCENE2>: Specify a name for the new scene, or press ENTER Enter overall explosion factor <0>: Specify an explosion factor, or press ENTER to accept the default Activate new scene? [Yes/No] : Choose an option or press ENTER The name of the new copy is set in Scene Options and can be modified.

AMCOPYSKETCH Selects single sketch to copy and specifies placement of the sketch center

Use AMCOPYSKETCH to create a copy of an existing sketch. AMCOPYSKETCH copies all independent constraints, dimensions, sketch geometry, and construction geometry. Browser

Right-click the profile, path, cut line, break line, or split line icon, and choose Copy.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ Copy Sketch.

Toolbutton

Copy Sketch

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Copy Sketch

Command

AMCOPYSKETCH

Enter an option (source of the sketch) [Sketch/Feature] <Sketch>: Specify an option If you select the Browser or Context Menu method, the sketch option is automatically activated.

Sketch Copies a selected sketch and specifies placement of the sketch center. Select sketch to copy: Specify a sketch Sketch center: Specify a point Sketch center: Specify another point or press ENTER

AMCOPYSKETCH

|

101

Feature Copies the sketch used to create a feature from any other part in the current drawing and specifies placement of the sketch center. Select the feature that the sketch will be copied from: Specify a feature Select the destination part or : Select a part Select the destination face or : Select a face or press ENTER Specify the sketch center for placement: Specify a point Parameters=Independent Specify the sketch center for placement or [Parameters/Rotate/Mirror] : Specify another point or choose an option Parameters Specifies whether the copied sketch is dependent on, or independent from, the original sketch. If it is dependent on the original sketch, any modifications to either sketch affects both sketches. Enter an option [Dependent/Independent] : Choose an option Rotate Allows you to rotate the copied sketch, using an existing part edge or a rotation angle. Select an edge for alignment or Enter the rotation angle <90>: Select an edge or specify an angle Mirror Mirrors the copied sketch in its current position. No prompt is displayed with this option.

102

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMCORNER Creates a blended fillet corner surface from three intersecting fillet surfaces

Use AMCORNER to create blended corner fillets from three intersecting fillet surfaces. Each surface edge of the corner fillet that AMCORNER creates can have a different radius and can be trimmed or not trimmed. The resulting fillet surface is independent of the other surfaces.

1

3

2

fillet surfaces selected

corner fillet created

Toolbutton

Corner Fillet Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Corner Fillet

Command

AMCORNER

Trim=Yes Select first fillet surface or [Trim]: Enter t or select the first surface Trim=Yes Select second fillet surface or [Trim]: Enter t or select the second surface Trim=Yes Select third fillet surface or [Trim]: Enter t or select the third surface

Trim Trims the edges of the selected surfaces to the edge of the new corner surface. Trim surfaces? [Yes/No] : Specify whether or not surfaces are trimmed

NOTE If the fillet surfaces do not intersect each other because they are too short, remake these surfaces using the AMFILLETSF command’s Base option. The Base option creates surfaces that are long enough to intersect each other. The following error message is displayed if the selected surfaces don’t intersect: Error - No intersections found

AMCORNER

|

103

AMCUTLINE Creates a cut line sketch for an offset section view

Use AMCUTLINE in Model mode to create parametric cut lines for an offset section view. Because the cut line is parametric, it changes when parent features change. The start and end points of the cut line must be outside the part. You can create an offset cut line or an aligned cut line.

offset cut line

aligned cut line

An offset cut line is constructed with orthogonal segments. Any number of segments can be used to create an offset cut line, but the first and last segments must be parallel. Segments can change direction only in 90-degree increments. An aligned cut line is constructed of nonorthogonal segments. Only two segments are allowed, but they can change direction at any angle. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ Cut Line.

Toolbutton

Cut Line

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Cut Line

Command

AMCUTLINE

Select objects to define the section cutting line: Select objects Select objects to define the section cutting line: Select more objects or press ENTER Constrain the cut line to the active part using AMADDCON and AMPARDIM.

104

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMDATUMID Creates datums represented as frames containing an alphabetic character

Use AMDATUMID to create datum identifiers that conform to ANSI, BSI, DIN, ISO, JIS, CSN, and GB International Drafting Standards.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Symbols ➤ Datum Identifier.

Toolbutton

Datum Identifier

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Datum Identifier

Command

AMDATUMID

Select object to attach: Specify a drawing object Start Point: Specify a start point for the leader Next Point <Symbol>: Specify an endpoint or press ENTER To place a symbol without a leader, press ENTER after you specify a start point.

Datum Identifier Dialog Box

The Datum Identifier dialog box contains a field for entering the value of the Datum Identifier and a button that controls the type of arrowhead to use. In the lower-left corner of the dialog box, the button with the symbol accesses the Symbol Standards dialog box, allowing you to set and modify the symbol standards you are using in your drawing. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

AMDATUMID

|

105

Attach Allows you to respecify the object the datum identifier is attached to.

Standard Properties Click the button in the lower-left corner of the Datum Identifier dialog box to open the Standard Properties dialog box, where you can control the properties of the current symbol. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

Modifying Datum Identifiers When making changes to datum identifiers, consider the following: ■ ■ ■ ■

To retain the associativity of a datum identifier with the geometry it is attached to, use AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT to make changes. If you copy a datum identifier to the Windows clipboard, pasting it back into a drawing brings it in as a block. Pasting a datum identifier into other applications brings it in as a .wmf, .dwg, or .bmp file. If you explode a datum identifier, the symbol and leader become unassociated lines and text, and you can no longer edit them using AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT.

AMDATUMTGT Creates datum target symbols

Use AMDATUMTGT to place datum targets in your drawing. A datum establishes a theoretically exact plane, line, or profile. Because all features are subject to deviation, it may be impractical to control the tolerance of an entire surface via a datum. To specify practical datums, you select relevant locations called datum targets. Datum target symbols conform to variations unique to ANSI, BSI, DIN, ISO, JIS, CSN, and GB International Drafting Standards. You can place a datum target on a leader or attach one datum target to another. A datum target can be a point, a line, or an area.

106

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Symbols ➤ Datum Identifier.

Toolbutton

Datum Target

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Datum Identifier

Command

AMDATUMTGT

Select object to attach: Specify an object

Termination Type Dialog Box

Hold your cursor over each button for a descriptive tooltip.

Attached to Another Attaches the current datum target to an existing datum target, and opens the Datum Target dialog box. Select Datum Target: Select an existing datum target

AMDATUMTGT

|

107

None Creates a datum target without a special termination symbol, and opens the Datum Target dialog box. Select first point: Specify a point Next Point: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

Point Creates a datum target symbol, using a point symbol as the termination type, and opens the Datum Target dialog box. Select first point: Specify a point Next Point: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

Line Attaches a datum target to a line, and opens the Datum Target dialog box. First line point: Specify the start point Second line point: Specify the endpoint Next Point: Specify an endpoint for the leader Next Point: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

108

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Circle Attaches a datum target to a hatched circle, and opens the Datum Target dialog box. Center point: Specify a center point Diameter/<1.0000> Choose an option or press ENTER Next Point: Specify an endpoint for the leader Next Point: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

Rectangle Attaches a datum target to a hatched rectangle, and opens the Datum Target dialog box. Center point: Specify a center point Corner: Specify a point for one corner Next Point: Specify an endpoint for the leader Next Point: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

Datum Target Dialog Box The Datum Target dialog box contains two tabs, Datum Target and Leader.

Datum Target Tab

AMDATUMTGT

|

109

Dimension Specifies the dimension for the target area. Datum Specifies the datum reference for the target.

Leader Tab

Linetype Toggles the leader linetype between solid and hidden. Arrowhead Changes the leader arrowhead. Attach Allows you to respecify the geometry the datum target is attached to.

Standard Properties Click the button in the lower-left corner of the Datum Target dialog box to open the Standard Properties dialog box, where you can control the properties for the current symbol. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

Modifying Datum Target Symbols When making changes to datum target symbols, consider the following: ■ ■ ■ ■

110

|

Chapter 1

To retain the associativity of a datum target symbol with the geometry it is attached to, use AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT to make changes. If you copy a datum target symbol to the Windows clipboard, pasting it back into a drawing brings it in as a block. Pasting a datum target symbol into other applications brings it in as a .wmf, .dwg, or .bmp file. If you explode a datum target symbol, the symbol and leader become unassociated lines and text, and you can no longer edit them using AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT.

Commands

AMDELCON Removes constraints from the selected sketch

Use AMDELCON to remove constraints from the selected sketch, changing the geometric relationships between sketched objects. AMDELCON displays the constraints already applied to the sketch, and provides you with options to change the constraint display size and select constraints to delete individually or globally. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose 2D Constraints ➤ Delete Constraints.

Toolbutton

Delete Constraint

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ 2D Constraints ➤ Delete Constraints

Command

AMDELCON

Select sketch from which to remove the constraint: Select a sketch

NOTE If there is only one sketch in the drawing, this prompt is not displayed. Select or [Size/All]: Select or [Size/All]:

Choose an option or specify a constraint Choose an option, specify another constraint, or press ENTER

All Selects all constraints. If you choose this option, all constraints are deleted and the command exits.

Size Redisplays all constraints at a specified size. Enter new value for AMCONDSPSZ (Constraint display size) <current>: Specify a value

AMDELCON

|

111

AMDELETE Deletes part definitions, part instances, and scenes from the current assembly model

Use AMDELETE to remove a part definition, a part instance, or a scene from your drawing. Browser

Right-click the part or scene icon and choose Delete.

Command

AMDELETE

Delete: [part Definition/part Instance/Scene] <part Instance>: Choose an option or press ENTER If you use the Browser method, the prompt is not displayed.

Part Definition Specifies the part definition to delete. Select part definition to delete or [?] : Select the part or enter ? for a list

Scene Specifies the scene to delete. Enter scene name to delete or [?] <SCENE1>: Enter ? for a list or press ENTER

Part Instance Specifies the part instance to delete. Select part instance to delete or [?] : Enter ? for a list or press ENTER If the part instance you are deleting is the last instance in the drawing for a specific part definition, an AutoCAD message asks if you also want to remove the part definition from the drawing.

112

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMDELFEAT Deletes features from the selected part

Use AMDELFEAT to delete part geometry by selecting an edge or face belonging to the feature. For a work plane, work point, or work axis, select the displayed feature. If the selected feature has dependent features, they are also deleted. Browser

In the Part or Assembly tab, right-click the feature icon and choose Delete.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Features ➤ Delete.

Toolbutton

Delete Feature

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Delete Feature

Command

AMDELFEAT

Select feature to delete: Select feature Enter an option [Next/Accept] : Hole1: Enter n to cycle to the next feature or press ENTER Highlighted features will be deleted. Continue? [Yes/No] : Choose an option or press ENTER

Yes Deletes the highlighted feature.

No Cancels the command.

AMDELFEAT

|

113

AMDELTRAIL Deletes a selected trail

Use AMDELTRAIL in Scene mode to delete assembly trails. Browser

In the Scene tab, right-click the part icon and choose Delete Trail.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Delete Trail.

Toolbutton

Delete Trail

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Exploded Views ➤ Delete Trail

Command

AMDELTRAIL

Select trail to delete: Select the trail to delete

AMDELTWEAKS Deletes all tweaks associated with the selected parts

Use AMDELTWEAKS in Scene mode to remove tweaks. Once the tweaks are removed, the part moves back to its original position. Browser

In the Scene tab, right-click the part icon and choose Delete Tweak.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Delete Tweak.

Toolbutton

Delete Tweak

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Exploded Views ➤ Delete Tweak

Command

AMDELTWEAKS

Select part/subassembly to delete tweaks from: Select a part or subassembly

114

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMDELVIEW Deletes specified views and all views dependent upon them

Use AMDELVIEW in Drawing mode to delete specified drawing views and all dependent views. If the selected drawing view has dependent views, you can delete the view and its dependent views, or delete only the selected view. Browser

In the Drawing tab, right-click a view icon and choose Delete.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Delete View.

Toolbutton

Delete View

Desktop Menu

Drawing ➤ Delete View

Command

AMDELVIEW

Select view to delete: Select the view to delete If the view you are deleting has dependent views, the Delete Dependent Views dialog box is displayed. Use this dialog box to delete or retain dependent views.

AMDIMALIGN Aligns linear, rotated, aligned, or angular dimensions with a base dimension of the same type

Use AMDIMALIGN to align dimensions in Drawing mode to a selected base dimension. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Dimensions ➤ Align Dimension.

Toolbutton

Align Dimension

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Edit Dimension ➤ Align Dimension

Command

AMDIMALIGN

AMDELVIEW

|

115

Select base dimension: Select a linear, rotated, aligned, or angular base dimension Select linear dimensions to align: Select a dimension that matches the base type Select linear dimensions to align: Select another dimension or press ENTER The base dimension determines the type of dimension to align. AMDIMALIGN ignores dimensions that do not match the base dimension type.

If you select a set of dimensions that have dimension lines inside and outside the extension lines, and the dimension lines and arrowheads overlap, use UNDO, or adjust the dimensions individually instead of using AMDIMALIGN. AMDIMALIGN does not recognize extension line suppression.

AMDIMARRANGE Arranges dimensions in Model mode and Drawing mode

Use AMDIMARRANGE to arrange dimensions in Model mode and Drawing mode.

before AMDIMARRANGE

Command

after AMDIMARRANGE

AMDIMARRANGE

Select dimensions and contour entities: Specify a dimension or an edge Select dimensions and contour entities: Specify another dimension or edge, or press ENTER Select point on contour (RETURN for automatic): Specify a point on an edge, or press ENTER

116

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMDIMBREAK Creates breaks in an existing dimension or extension line of a single associative dimension, while maintaining associativity

Use AMDIMBREAK in Drawing mode to break the dimension or extension lines of a linear, aligned, rotated, ordinate, radial, diameter, or angular, associative dimension without losing associativity.

With AMDIMBREAK, you can increase the readability of drawings without having to explode dimensions. If the dimension is updated, modified, or restored, the break will revert to a solid line. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Dimensions ➤ Break Dimension.

Toolbutton

Break Dimension

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Edit Dimensions ➤ Break Dimension

Command

AMDIMBREAK

Select dimension or extension line to break: Select a dimension Second point [First point/Restore]: Choose an option, or specify a second point

First Point Specifies the first break point. First point: Specify the first break point Second point: Specify the second break point

Restore Removes the break from a selected dimension.

Second Point Specifies the second point for the break. Second point: Specify the second break point

AMDIMBREAK

|

117

AMDIMDSP Changes the display mode for dimensions

Use AMDIMDSP to change the display mode for the dimensions of all parts and sketches, without affecting the drawing. You can display the dimensions as parameters, equations, or numbers.

Dimensions as Parameters Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Dimensioning ➤ Dimensions as Parameters.

Toolbutton

Display as Variables

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Dimensioning ➤ Dimensions as Parameters

Command

AMDIMDSP

Dimensions as Equations Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Dimensioning ➤ Dimensions as Equations.

Toolbutton

Display as Equations

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Dimensioning ➤ Dimensions as Equations

Command

AMDIMDSP

Dimensions as Numbers Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Dimensioning ➤ Dimensions as Numbers.

Toolbutton

Display as Numbers

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Dimensioning ➤ Dimensions as Numbers

Command

AMDIMDSP

Enter an option [Parameters/Equations/Numeric] : Enter an option

118

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Numeric Shows dimensions as numbers.

Parameters Shows dimensions as variables.

Equations Shows dimensions as equations.

AMDIMFORMAT Edits individual linear, radial, diameter, or angular dimensions, using a graphical interface, and reflects changes in your drawing while you use the Dimension Formatter dialog box

Use AMDIMFORMAT to modify dimensions in Drawing mode. Changes made in the Dimension Formatter dialog box change on screen, so you can see the results before accepting them. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Dimensions ➤ Edit Format.

Toolbutton

Edit Format

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Edit Dimensions ➤ Edit Format

Command

AMDIMFORMAT

Select a dimension entity: Select a dimension AMDIMFORMAT recognizes the selected dimension type and opens the

Dimension Formatter dialog box with options that apply to the selected dimension type.

Dimension Formatter Dialog Box The Dimension Formatter dialog box contains five tabs whose options change, depending on the type of dimension selected.

AMDIMFORMAT

|

119

Geometry Tab The Geometry tab controls arrowheads, extension lines, and dimension line properties.

Format Tab The Format tab controls orientation, placement, and fit of text.

Units Tab The Units tab controls text style and primary unit information. Alternate unit precision can also be controlled.

120

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Tolerance Tab The Tolerance tab controls types of tolerances and tolerance values.

Text Edit Tab The Text Edit tab allows quick editing of text values, including the addition of special symbols.

NOTE AMDIMFORMAT does not format ordinate dimensions.

AMDIMFORMAT

|

121

AMDIMINSERT Edits linear, aligned, rotated, and angular dimensions by inserting a new dimension between existing dimensions of the same type simultaneously, as opposed to inserting dimensions individually

Use AMDIMINSERT to divide an existing dimension into two individual dimensions. AMDIMINSERT breaks the base dimension at a selected point and inserts a new dimension at the break. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Dimensions ➤ Insert Dimension.

Toolbutton

Insert Dimension

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Edit Dimensions ➤ Insert Dimension

Command

AMDIMINSERT

Select base dimension: Select a linear, aligned, rotated, or angular dimension (1) Select point on object for extension line origin: Select a start point for the new dimension (2)

2

1

AMDIMJOIN Edits linear, aligned, and angular (3-point or 2-line) dimensions by joining similar dimensions into a single dimension

Use AMDIMJOIN to join two dimensions. The base dimension determines the type of dimension that can be joined. AMDIMJOIN ignores dimensions that do not match the base dimension type. In an angular dimension, the direction of the join is determined by bisecting the dimension and using the half where the extension line was initially selected.

122

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Dimensions ➤ Join Dimension.

Toolbutton

Join Dimension

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Edit Dimensions ➤ Join Dimension

Command

AMDIMJOIN

Select base dimension: Select a linear, rotated, aligned, or angular base dimension Select linear dimensions to join: Select a dimension that matches the base type Select linear dimensions to join: Select another dimension or press ENTER

AMDIRECTION Displays the direction of objects and reverses their direction

In NC (Numeric Control) machining, and in design operations like CMM (Coordinate Measuring Machine) certification, you often need to know the direction of objects to control the approach angle of a machine. Use AMDIRECTION to check and change the direction of wires to get better results when creating certain kinds of surfaces. AMDIRECTION displays an indicator to show the direction of the selected objects and allows you to reverse direction. Toolbutton

Wire Direction

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Wire ➤ Direction

Command

AMDIRECTION

Select wires: Select a wire Select wires: Select another wire or press ENTER Reverse wire direction? [Yes/No] : Choose an option

AMDIRECTION

|

123

AMDISPSF Controls how surfaces are displayed

Use AMDISPSF to change the size of a surface normal, the number of U and V polylines displayed on a surface, and the number of surface patches displayed. Also use AMDISPSF to control how the base surface and the control points are displayed. Knowing the approximate number of internal patches helps you judge the complexity of a surface. Displaying the base surface can be useful when it is not the same as the current displayed surface. Toolbutton

Surface Display

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Surface Display

Command

AMDISPSF

Select surfaces: Select surfaces:

Select a surface Select another surface or press ENTER

Individual Surface Display Dialog Box

Persistent Display Shows and changes the attributes of a single or multiple surfaces. If the attributes of multiple surfaces differ, Varies is displayed. Enter a new value for the surface(s). Normal Length Changes the current length of the surface normals of the selected surfaces. Number of U Lines Changes the number of U lines in the selected surfaces.

124

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Number of V Lines Changes the number of V lines in the selected surfaces.

Temporary Display Displays surface patch normals and the base surface. Show Patch Normals Displays the surface normal at the beginning of each internal base surface patch until the viewport is redrawn. Show Base Surface Displays the boundaries of the base surface for the selected surface(s) until the viewport is redrawn. Show Control Points Displays the control points on the base surface until the viewport is redrawn. The points are connected to each other by temporary lines that represent the control net.

AMDIST Measures the minimum 3D distance between selected objects or parametric parts

Use AMDIST to measure the minimum 3D distance between selected objects or parametric parts. You can define any number of objects or parts as the first and second sets. AMDIST finds the minimum 3D distance between the two sets. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Analysis ➤ Minimum 3D Distance.

Toolbutton

Minimum 3D Distance

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Analysis ➤ Minimum 3D Distance

Command

AMDIST

Next instance [Objects]: Choose an option, or select the first part Next instance: Select another part for the first set, or press ENTER Next instance [Objects]: Choose an option, select the second part, or press ENTER Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n to cycle to the next part or press ENTER Next instance: Select another part for the second set, or press ENTER Output: [Display/Line] : Choose an option, or press ENTER Minimum distance: <2.880839>

Objects Specifies 2D and 3D AutoCAD objects.

AMDIST

|

125

Instance Specifies Mechanical Desktop part instances.

Line Draws a line representing the minimum 3D distance.

Display Displays a temporary line representing the minimum 3D distance.

AMDWGDIMDSP Changes the display of parametric dimensions in Drawing mode

Use AMDWGDIMDSP in Drawing mode to change the display mode for parametric dimensions to parameters, equations, or numbers.

Dimensions as Parameters Desktop Menu

Drawing ➤ Parametric Dim Display ➤ Dimensions as Parameters

Command

AMDWGDIMDSP

Dimensions as Equations Desktop Menu

Drawing ➤ Parametric Dim Display ➤ Dimensions as Equations

Command

AMDWGDIMDSP

Dimensions as Numbers Desktop Menu

Drawing ➤ Parametric Dim Display ➤ Dimensions as Numbers

Command

AMDWGDIMDSP

Enter option [Numeric/Equation/Parameter] <Parameter>: Enter an option Select dimension or [All/View/Select dimensions] <Select dimensions>: Choose an option or press ENTER Select objects: Select a dimension Select objects: Select another dimension or press ENTER

126

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Parameters Displays dimensions as variables.

Equations Displays dimensions as equations.

Numeric Displays dimensions as numbers.

All Selects all dimensions on the current layout.

View Selects all dimensions in the current view.

Select Dimensions Selects individual dimensions.

AMDWGVIEW Creates base, orthographic, auxiliary, isometric, detail, section, and broken drawing views

Use AMDWGVIEW to create views in Drawing mode of your parts and assemblies. Any changes to your design are automatically updated in the drawing views. Browser

Right-click a Layout icon in the Drawing tab, and choose New View.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose New View.

Toolbutton

New View

Desktop Menu

Drawing ➤ New View

Command

AMDWGVIEW

AMDWGVIEW

|

127

Create Drawing View Dialog Box

View Type Specifies the type of view to create. Base Creates a base view of a drawing according to the orientation you select. Multiple Creates multiple projected views of a parent view. If no view exists, creates a base view first which becomes the parent view. Ortho Creates an orthographic view of the parent view. Auxiliary Creates an auxiliary view of the part face you select. Iso Creates an isometric view of the parent view. Detail Creates an enlarged view of a portion of the parent view. Broken Creates a broken view.

Data Set Specifies the data set to use for the new view. Active Part Uses the active part for the view.

128

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Scene Uses a selected scene for the view. Select Uses selected objects for the view. Group Uses a specified group of objects. This option is only available if you have defined a group of objects in the drawing.

Layout Places the view on the selected layout.

Properties Controls view properties. Scale Sets the scale for the view. Relative to Parent Specifies whether the view is scaled relative to its parent view.

Options Opens the Desktop Options dialog box where you can set options for your drawing views. See “AMOPTIONS” on page 232.

Hidden Lines Tab Controls the settings for hidden lines in drawing views. Calculate Hidden Lines Turns on the Calculate Hidden Line option. If off, hidden lines are not calculated or displayed in the view. Display Hidden Lines Displays hidden lines in the view. Display Tangencies Displays tangent silhouettes in the view. Remove Coincident Edges Removes duplicate edges in the view. Display as Controls the display of hidden edges when the Calculate Hidden Lines option is disabled. Wireframe

Displays the view as a wireframe model.

Wireframe with Silh

Displays the view as a wireframe model with silhouette edges.

AMDWGVIEW

|

129

Section Tab Controls the settings for section views. Type Controls the type of section view. None

Does not create a section view.

Full

Creates a full section view for base, auxiliary, broken, and orthographic views.

Half

Creates a half section view through a work plane or work point.

Offset

Creates an offset section view from base, orthographic, broken, or auxiliary views.

Aligned

Creates an aligned section view from base, orthographic, or auxiliary views.

Breakout

Creates a breakout section view from base, orthographic, or auxiliary views.

Radial

Creates a radial section view from base, orthographic, or auxiliary views.

Symbol Specifies the symbol to use for section views. View Label Specifies the label for the section view. Hatch Specifies whether a section view is hatched. Pattern Sets the hatch pattern and parameters for a section view. Opens the AutoCAD Hatch Patterns dialog box. Hide Obscured Hatch Hides hatch patterns normally out of view or obscured.

130

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMEDGE Untrims, copies, and extracts edges of surfaces, and shows edge nodes of surfaces and faces

Automatic trimming meets most design requirements for trimming simple surfaces. To solve more complex situations, use AMEDGE. AMEDGE removes trim edges from a surface and converts the surface either to

ordinary 3D polylines or to splines. You edit the edges as 3D polylines or splines using standard AutoCAD editing commands and project them back onto the surface. AMEDGE can permanently remove trim edges from a surface (untrim it) to make it a base surface, and make copies of edges or surface trims (in the form of 3D polylines or splines). You can also use AMEDGE to display the nodes of both base surface edges (untrimmed surfaces) and faces (trimmed surfaces).

Toolbutton

Copy Surface Edge

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Wireframe ➤ Copy Edge

Command

AMEDGE

Output=Polyline Select surface loop to copy or [Copy edge/Output/Show nodes/Untrim]: Select a surface or choose an option Select surface loop to copy: Choose another surface or press ENTER

Extract Loop Removes a complete loop from a selected surface, so that you can edit its edges. The loop may consist of one or more lines, but this option converts them to a spline or a 3D polyline for editing. If there are trim edges remaining after the selected edge or loop is removed from the base surface or face, the remaining trim edges are left on the surface. If there are no remaining trim edges, the surface is converted to a base surface. If you select a base surface with no interior trim edges, the software extracts a copy of the base edges of the base surface and converts them into four polylines. Each extracted loop is put into an AutoCAD group.

original surface

loop extracted and moved for editing

AMEDGE

|

131

The 3D polyline or spline output created by this option overlays the surface but is independent of it. The polylines exist on the current layer in the current color. AMEDGE keeps track of the relationship between the removed polylines (or splines) and the surface, so they can be projected back onto the surface precisely if not edited. To delete a single loop from a face with multiple edge loops, remove the loop with the Extract Loop option and delete the resulting 3D polylines. After using the Extract Loop option, edit surface edges using any editing command to create the surface trim shape. Retrim the base surface or face to the corrected edges using AMPROJECT with the Trim option.

Copy Edge Copies individual base surface edges. Select surface edge to copy:

Specify a surface edge

An individual base surface edge is that portion of the surface’s edge that lies between two nodes. Each selected surface edge is copied, and the edge is displayed as either a 3D polyline or a spline, depending on the setting of the Output option. The output is displayed in the current layer and color.

original surface

edges copied and moved for clarity

The surface itself is not changed, nor does the surface have any relationship with the output polylines.

Output Determines whether the output of the Extract Loop and Copy Edge options is a spline or a polyline. Enter an option [Polyline/Spline] <Spline>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Show Nodes Temporarily displays indicators at the nodes of the selected surface. The nodes mark the beginning and end of each of the individual edge lines that make up one or more closed loops. The nodes and lines are displayed in the GRIPCOLOR.

132

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Select surfaces to show nodes: Select surfaces to show nodes:

Specify a surface Specify another surface or press ENTER

Indicators are displayed on both the base and the face edges. The indicators disappear when the display is redrawn.

Untrim Converts a trimmed surface to a base (untrimmed) surface by deleting its edges, and sets the surface visibility to Unhide. Select surfaces to untrim: Specify a surface Select surfaces to untrim: Specify a surface or press ENTER

AMEDGESYM Creates a symbol that defines the condition of a selected edge

Use AMEDGESYM to define the condition of a selected edge. Information can include broken, deburred, without burr, sharp-edged, undercut, and recessed. This command is available only when you are annotating a drawing, using the DIN international drafting standard. Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Edge Symbol

Command

AMEDGESYM

Select object to attach: Specify an edge Start point: Specify a start point for the leader Next point <Symbol>: Specify another point or press ENTER

Edge Symbol Dialog Box

AMEDGESYM

|

133

Miscellaneous Places the edge symbol values in brackets.

Burr Controls whether the edge has burr information.

Attach/Detach Detaches a symbol from its associated geometry, or reattaches a detached symbol.

AMEDIT Edits welding, surface texture, datum and feature identifier symbols, feature control frames, and datum targets

Use AMEDIT to modify drawing annotations. Valid annotations include welding, surface texture, datum, and feature control symbols. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Symbols.

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Edit Symbols

Command

AMEDIT

Select object: Select an annotation object Mechanical Desktop examines the selected annotation and opens the appropriate dialog box.

AMEDITAUG Resizes, rotates, copies, and corrects vectors on augmented lines and creates augmented lines from lines and polylines

Use AMEDITAUG to make the following modifications to the vectors on an augmented line without changing the character of the line itself: ■ ■ ■ ■

134

|

Chapter 1

To change the length of the vectors To rotate the vectors to a specific angle or plane To copy the vectors to a defined vector To correct the augmented line by blending or replacing individual vectors with copies

Commands

AMEDITAUG also adds vectors to a polyline to create an augmented line.

The vectors of augmented lines describe a direction at each vertex of the augmented lines. The capability of AMEDITAUG to modify the vectors of augmented lines may be useful for controlling 5-axis NC (Numeric Control) milling machines, CMM (Coordinate Measuring Machines) checking machines, and 5-axis laser cutting devices. Rotating the vectors controls the approach angle of the cutting device. With AMEDITAUG you can also control an augmented line to be used as a rail for sweeping surfaces and the tangency of one surface to another for blending surfaces. You create augmented lines from 3D polylines, lines, and polylines with the Add Vectors option of AMEDITAUG. Toolbutton

Edit Augmented Line

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Wireframe ➤ Augment Polyline

Command

AMEDITAUG

Enter an option [Add vectors/Blend/Copy/Normal length/Rotate/Twist] <exit>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Add Vectors Creates an augmented line, which you can edit, by adding vectors to a polyline. Select lines or polylines: Select lines or polylines:

polylines selected

Select a line or polyline Select another line or polyline, or press ENTER

augmented lines created

Blend Aligns the vectors of an augmented line without changing the character of the line or the position of the vectors on the line. The Blend option creates a gradual transition in alignment between vectors that are significantly misaligned with adjacent vectors. Select vector to blend or [All/Range]: Choose an option or press ENTER

AMEDITAUG

|

135

Select Vector Blends the selected vector between the two adjacent vectors. If the selected vector is at the beginning or end of the augmented line, the software creates a smooth transition between it and the next two vectors. All Blends all vectors between the first and last vector. Select augmented line: Specify the first augmented line Select augmented line: Specify the last augmented line Range Blends all the vectors between two selected vectors, including the selected vectors. Select first vector: Specify the first vector Select last vector: Specify the last vector

Copy Replaces a vector on an augmented line with a copy of another vector. The Copy option copies a master vector from one augmented line and pastes it to the same, or a different, augmented line. Choose this option to correct a few vectors that are misaligned so you can blend an adjacent vector. Replace the misaligned vectors with a copy of one that blends better with adjacent vectors. Select vector to be copied: Select a vector to copy Select vector or [All/Range]: Choose an option or press ENTER Select Vector Replaces the vector or vectors you select with a copy of the master vector. All Replaces all vectors in an augmented line with copies of a master vector. Range Replaces all the vectors between and including the two selected vectors with a copy of the master vector.

136

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Normal Length Increases or decreases the displayed length of all vectors in an augmented line. The default length doesn’t change. Select augmented lines: Select an augmented line Select augmented lines: Select another augmented line or press ENTER Normal length <0.5000>: Specify a length

Rotate Rotates selected vectors to a plane or a specified number of degrees. Enter an option [Angle/Plane] :

Choose an option

Plane Rotates a vector parallel to the imaginary plane you specify. The vectors retain their individual orientation when viewed normal to the plane. Specify first plane location or [Last/View/Wire/Xy/Yz/zAxis/Zx]: Specify 3 points, choose an option, or press ENTER Angle Rotates selected vectors a number of degrees. Angle <90>: Specify an angle Select vector to rotate or [All/Range]: Choose an option

Twist Edits vectors of an augmented line into a spiral about the line. The vectors serve as a basis for helical surfaces, spring coils, and other useful surfaces. Enter total angle <360>: Specify an angle Enter an option [All/Range] : Choose an option or press ENTER Select augmented line: Specify an augmented line Select augmented line: Specify another augmented line or press ENTER All Twists all vectors on the selected line. Range Twists all vectors between two vectors.

AMEDITAUG

|

137

AMEDITCONST Changes distance and angle offsets in constraints and deletes individual or all assembly constraints

Use AMEDITCONST to make changes to assembly constraints. Browser

Right-click the constraint icon and choose Edit.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose 3D Constraints ➤ Edit.

Toolbutton

Edit Constraints

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ 3D Constraints ➤ Edit

Command

AMEDITCONST

NOTE In the Browser method, the dialog box allows editing of only the selected constraint. You cannot delete it. In the other command methods, the dialog box allows editing and deleting of all constraints.

Edit 3D Constraint Dialog Box (Browser)

Type Lists the type of constraint being edited.

Offset Lists the current offset value.

Expression Specifies the new value for the constraint.

Update Icon Updates the assembly to show the current settings.

138

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Edit 3D Constraints Dialog Box

Constrained Parts Lists the parts that have 3D constraints applied to them. Select a part from the list to view constraints.

Select Selects the part to edit.

Constraints Displays information about the highlighted constraint. Count Displays the number of constraints applied to the selected part. Show Displays the constraints on a selected part. Type Displays the type of constraint. Offset Displays the offset value of the current constraint.

Edit Constraint Specifies the new value.

Update Icon Updates the assembly to show the current settings.

AMEDITCONST

|

139

Delete Constraints Deletes constraints for the selected part. All Deletes all the constraints applied to the selected part. Current Deletes the current constraint.

AMEDITFEAT Edits existing features by displaying and modifying dimension values

Use AMEDITFEAT to make modifications to features that make up a part. Any feature that defines the part can be modified using this command. Browser

In the Part or Assembly tab, right-click the feature icon and choose Edit.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Features ➤ Edit.

Toolbutton

Edit Feature

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Edit Feature

Command

AMEDITFEAT

Enter an option [Independent array instance/Sketch/surfCut/Toolbody/select Feature] <select Feature>: Choose an option or select a feature to edit

Sketch Rolls back to the original sketch so you can change its geometry. Select sketched feature: Select a feature

Independent Array Instance Allows you to edit a single instance of an array feature. Select feature array instance: Select an array instance

140

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Surfcut Allows you to edit a feature created by a surface cut. Select surfcut feature:

Select a feature

Toolbody Rolls back to a toolbody used to create a combined feature. Select parametric boolean to edit: Select a combined feature

Select Feature Selects a feature to edit. Mechanical Desktop examines the selected feature and opens the appropriate dialog box if, available. Enter an option [Next/Accept] : Combine1: Enter n to cycle to the next feature or press ENTER If there are parametric dimensions controlling the feature you have selected, the following prompts are also displayed: Select the object to edit: Specify a dimension Enter the new value for dimension <current>: Specify a value or press ENTER

AMEDITSF Changes the density of surface grip points, changes the grip span and the direction of surface normals, and truncates surfaces

Use AMEDITSF to edit surfaces by ■ ■ ■ ■

Changing the density of surface grips in both the U and V directions Changing the span or distance between grips Flipping the surface normal Truncating the surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Overall Edit

Command

AMEDITSF

Select surfaces to edit: Select a surface Select surfaces to edit: Select another surface or press ENTER

AMEDITSF

|

141

Surface Edit Dialog Box

Grips The ability to modify the grips on a surface provides you with a free-form way to design complex surface models. Grips editing can be used in sheet metal panel manufacturing to supply overbend to the tools, which compensates for the springback that occurs in the stamping process. Grips editing varies the amount of springback across a surface. U Specifies the number of U-direction grip points on the surface. V Specifies the number of V-direction grip points on the surface. Span Specifies the radius of a circle of influence that a grip has across a surface when used in a stretch mode. After specifying the number of grip points, previewing your choices, and exiting AMEDITSF, use the grips to stretch, move, rotate, scale, or mirror the surface. Primitive surfaces have a different definition of U and V grips. They actually have no grips in the U and V directions and a span of 0.0. When you change the number of U grips, V grips, or the span of a primitivecone, sphere, cylinder, torus, or revolved surface the following message is displayed: Primitive surface definition has been removed.

Normal Direction Flips the normal from one side of the surface to the other. The direction of the surface normal indicates the positive side of the surface. Surfaces are offset according to the direction of their surface normals.

142

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Some applications require the normal to be on the opposite side of the surface. For example, to run a cutter path, the direction of the surface normal might need to be changed.

Preview Displays a preview of the surface grip points and span. The grips are the GRIPCOLOR and the span is the GRIPHOTCOL. The span circle is displayed perpendicular to the normal on the outer loop of the surface with the center of the circle at the normal location.

Span Controls the radius of the circle of influence that a grip has across a surface when used to stretch the surface.

Truncate Cuts the selected base surface to its minimum size, which is only large enough to support the current surface trim without changing the shape of the trimmed surface. Often, a trimmed surface is based on a base surface that is much larger than the outermost trim boundary. Selecting Truncate reduces the size of your drawing database and improves performance.

AMEDITTRAIL Modifies the explosion path start and end offsets in an assembly scene

Use AMEDITTRAIL to modify where an explosion path begins and ends in an assembly scene relative to current part positions. The options under Offset at Current Position specify the end of the trail relative to the current position of the part after it has been exploded and tweaked. The options under Offset at Assembled Position specify the end of the trail relative to the assembled position of the part before it has been exploded and tweaked. Browser

In the Scene tab, right-click a part icon and choose Edit Trail.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Trail.

Toolbutton

Edit Trail

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Exploded Views ➤ Edit Trail

Command

AMEDITTRAIL

Select trail to edit: Select a trail

AMEDITTRAIL

|

143

Trail Offsets Dialog Box

Offset at Current Position Controls the trail offset values for the current position of the part. Distance Specifies the offset between a reference point on the part and the end of the trail. Pick Closes the dialog box temporarily and allows you to use the cursor to pick points to determine the distance. Over Shoot Specifies that the trail goes beyond or outside the reference point on the part. Under Shoot Specifies that the trail stops short or inside of the reference point on the part.

Offset at Assembled Position Controls the trail offsets at the assembled position of the part. Distance Specifies the offset between a reference point on the part and the end of the trail. Pick Closes the dialog box temporarily and allows you to use the cursor to pick points to determine the distance. Over Shoot Specifies that the trail goes beyond or outside the reference point on the part. Under Shoot Specifies that the trail stops short or inside of the reference point on the part.

144

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMEDITVIEW Modifies the scale, associativity, and hidden line display of a drawing view

Use AMEDITVIEW to edit views created in Drawing mode. Browser

In the Drawing tab, right-click the view icon and choose Edit.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit View.

Toolbutton

Edit View

Desktop Menu

Drawing ➤ Edit View

Command

AMEDITVIEW

Select view to edit: Select a drawing view In the Browser method you will not be prompted to select a view.

View Type Dialog Box

Properties Controls the properties of the selected view. Scale Specifies a scale factor for the view.

AMEDITVIEW

|

145

Placement Controls the placement of the selected view. Move with Parent If the view has an associated parent view, specifies whether the view moves when the parent view is moved. No Alignment Specifies no alignment with its parent view. Horizontal Aligns the view horizontally with its parent view. Vertical Aligns the view vertically with its parent view.

Hidden Lines Tab Controls the settings for hidden lines in drawing views. Calculate Hidden Lines Turns on the Calculate Hidden Line option. If off, hidden lines are not calculated or displayed in the view. Display Hidden Lines Displays hidden lines in the view. Display Tangencies Displays tangent silhouettes in the view. Remove Coincident Edges Removes duplicate edges in the view. Display as Controls the display of hidden edges when the Calculate Hidden Lines option is disabled. Wireframe

Displays the view as a wireframe model.

Wireframe with Silh

Displays the view as a wireframe model with silhouette edges.

Display Tab Controls the display of annotations and edge properties for the selected view. Annotation Creation Controls the display of tapped holes and parametric dimensions. Centerline Settings Opens the Centerline Settings By View dialog box.

146

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Edge Properties Controls the properties of selected edges. Enter an option (edge properties) [Remove all/Select/Unhide all] <Select>: Choose an option or press ENTER Select

Selects edges to modify and then opens the Edge Properties dialog box. Select Edges: Select an edge Select Edges: Select another edge or press ENTER

Remove

Removes all edge property modifications made to the view.

Unhide All

Unhides all hidden edges in the view.

Edge Properties Dialog Box

Hide Edges Specifies that selected edges are hidden.

Color Specifies the color for the selected edges.

Layer Specifies the layer for the selected edges.

Linetype Specifies the linetype for the selected edges.

Linetype Scale Specifies the linetype scale for the selected edges.

AMEDITVIEW

|

147

AMEXTRUDE Creates an extruded solid feature

Use AMEXTRUDE to create an extruded solid feature from the selected profile.

profile

extruded feature

Before you create an extruded feature, you must create a sketch profile. See “AMPROFILE” on page 281. Sketches must have closed boundaries, using any combination of new sketch geometry, existing model edges, work planes, or work axes. Your profile can contain internal islands provided they do not intersect or overlap. Browser

Right-click an unconsumed profile icon and choose Extrude.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketched & Work Features ➤ Extrude.

Toolbutton

Extrude

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketched Features ➤ Extrude

Command

AMEXTRUDE

NOTE If more than one unconsumed profile exists, select the profile to extrude.

Extrusion Dialog Box

148

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Operation Specifies the Boolean method for creating the extrusion. Base Adds material, creating the first feature of a part. Blind, Mid Plane Blind, and To Plane are the only termination options for a Base operation. Cut Removes material from the selected part. Join Adds material to the selected part. Intersect Creates a new feature from the shared volume of the existing part and the extruded feature. Split Creates a new part by splitting the extrusion from the existing part.

Termination Determines the method for ending the extrusion. For new parts, the default termination option is Blind. For existing parts, the default is the last termination option used. Blind Extrudes the feature to a specified depth and displays direction arrows. Through Cuts all the way through the solid part. Not available when joining geometry. Mid Plane Extrudes the profile equally in both directions, terminating at the specified overall depth. Not available when joining geometry. Mid-Through Extrudes the profile through the part, using the current sketch plane as the midplane for the extrusion. To Face/Plane Defines the extrusion to a specified planar face or work plane. Select face or work plane: Specify a plane or face Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Confirm highlighted plane or face Enter termination type [Face/Plane] : Choose an option or press ENTER

AMEXTRUDE

|

149

From to Defines the start plane or face, and the end plane or face for the extrusion. Select face or work plane (first termination): Specify the first plane or face Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Confirm the highlighted plane or face Enter termination type [Face/Plane] : Choose an option or press ENTER Select face or work plane (second termination): Specify the second plane or face Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Confirm the highlighted plane or face Enter termination type [Face/Plane] : Choose an option or press ENTER

Flip Flips the direction of the extrusion.

Distance Specifies the distance for the extrusion. You may enter expressions, equations, or design variables as values. Right-click in this field for additional options, including using the Equation Assistant to define values.

Draft Angle Specifies a draft angle for the extrusion. A negative number creates a negative draft. The range is +90 to -90 degrees. Right-click in this field for additional options, including using the Equation Assistant to define values.

AMEXTRUDESF Creates a surface by extruding a line, arc, circle, ellipse, spline, or polyline

Use AMEXTRUDESF to create a surface by extruding a line, arc, circle, ellipse, spline, or polyline in a specified direction. The start point establishes the extrusion direction.

2D polyline

surface extruded

To preserve sharp corners or abrupt changes in curvature, adjust the AMPFITLEN and AMPFITANG settings prior to using AMEXTRUDESF. Multiple surfaces rather than C0 (abrupt) surfaces are created when you preserve sharp corners or abrupt changes in curvature in the surface.

150

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Toolbutton

Extruded Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Extrude

Command

AMEXTRUDESF

Select wires to extrude: Select a wire Select wires to extrude: Select another wire or press ENTER to continue Define direction and length. Specify start point or [Viewdir/Wire/X/Y/Z]: Choose an option or specify a start point

Start Point Specifies the direction for the extrusion by selecting or entering two points in 3D space. Specify end point: Specify an end point Enter taper angle <0>: Specify a taper angle

ViewDir Specifies the extrusion in the direction of the current view. Enter length <1.0000>: Specify a length Enter an option [Accept/Flip] : Choose an option or press ENTER Enter taper angle <0>: Specify a taper angle

Wire Specifies an existing wire to define the direction of the extrusion. Select wire to define direction: Specify a wire Enter an option [Accept/Flip] : Choose an option or press ENTER Enter taper angle <0>: Specify a taper angle

X/Y/Z Specifies the X, Y, or Z direction of the current UCS as the extrusion direction. Enter length <1.0000>: Specify a length Enter an option [Accept/Flip] : Choose an option or press ENTER Enter taper angle <0>: Specify a taper angle

Flip Flips the direction arrow that specifies the direction of the extrusion.

AMEXTRUDESF

|

151

Taper Angle Specifies the angle to apply to taper the extrusion. For closed curves, entering a positive angle tapers out from the base and entering a negative number tapers in. For other curves, the taper direction is relative to the direction of the curve being extruded. Specifying a taper angle for an object with sharp corners or abrupt changes in curvature might cause the surface to intersect itself.

AMFACEDRAFT Creates a face draft or slight angle on the faces of a part

Use AMFACEDRAFT to apply draft angles to part faces. Draft angles are used in manufacturing molds and cast parts. Face drafts can be created from a work plane or planar face, a part edge, or a tangent to a cylindrical face. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed Features ➤ Face Draft.

Toolbutton

Face Draft

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Face Draft

Command

AMFACEDRAFT

Face Draft Dialog Box

Type Controls the type of face draft to apply.

152

|

Chapter 1

Commands

From Plane Creates a face draft from a selected work plane or planar face.

plane selected

draft applied

From Edge Creates a face draft from a selected edge.

edge selected

draft applied

Shadow Creates a face draft from a selected plane to a point tangent to a selected cylindrical face.

plane selected

draft applied

Angle Controls the angle of the face draft.

Draft Plane Specifies a plane to use to apply a face draft. Select draft plane (planar face or work plane): Select a planar face or work plane Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n to cycle to the next face, or press ENTER Draft direction [Accept/Flip] : Enter f to flip the direction, or press ENTER

AMFACEDRAFT

|

153

Faces to Draft Controls which faces to apply a face draft to. Add Selects faces to add a face draft to. Select faces to draft (ruled faces only): Select a face Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n to cycle to the next face, or press ENTER Select faces to draft (ruled faces only): Select another face or press ENTER Reclaim Selects faces to remove a face draft from. Select faces to reclaim: Select faces to reclaim:

Select a face Select another face or press ENTER

Include Tangencies Specifies whether to include tangent faces when applying a face draft. If checked, tangent faces are automatically selected and draft is applied.

Return to Dialog Specifies whether to return to the dialog box after creating a face draft.

AMFACESPLIT Creates two faces from one face

Use AMFACESPLIT to split a face using either a planar or projected method. If you plan to apply draft to the faces after a split operation, all adjacent faces must have the coincident edge split at the same location. Browser

Right-click an unconsumed profile and choose Face Split.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketched & Work Features ➤ Face Split.

Toolbutton

Face Split

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketched Features ➤ Face Split

Command

AMFACESPLIT

Enter facesplit type [Planar/pRoject] : Choose an option

154

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Creating a Planar Face Split A planar split intersects the part with a plane, defining a planar split line.

Select faces to split [All]: Enter a to select all, or select a face to split

Select Faces Select the faces to split. Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n to cycle to the next face, or press ENTER Select faces to split or [All/Remove]: Select another face, choose an option, or press ENTER Select planar face or work plane for split: Specify a face or work plane

All Selects all part faces to split. Select faces to remove or [All/aDd]: Choose an option or press ENTER Select planar face or work plane for split: Specify a face or work plane

Creating a Projected Face Split A projected split is used to split a face with a split line sketch.

Select faces to split [All]: Enter a to select all, or select a face to split

Select Faces Select the faces to split. Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n to cycle to the next face, or press ENTER Select faces to split or [All/Remove]: Specify another face, choose an option, or press ENTER

AMFACESPLIT

|

155

All Selects all part faces to split. Select faces to remove or [All/aDd]:

Choose an option or press ENTER

NOTE If you are creating a projected face split, and more than one unconsumed split line exists, select the line to project.

AMFCFRAME Creates a feature control frame

Use AMFCFRAME to create feature control frames in Drawing mode. Feature control frames display geometric tolerances that show deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout of a feature. All tolerance information for a single dimension is contained in the feature control frame.

Feature control frames conform with variations unique to ANSI, BSI, CSN, DIN, GB, ISO, and JIS International Drafting Standards. DXF group codes are assigned to feature control frames and allow complete data exchange. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Symbols ➤ Feature Control Frame.

Toolbutton

Feature Control Frame

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Feature Control Frame

Command

AMFCFRAME

Select object to attach: Specify the object Start Point: Specify a start point Next Point <Symbol>: Specify another point or press ENTER

Feature Control Frame Dialog Box The dialog box contains two tabs, Frame and Leader.

156

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Frame Tab The Frame tab contains settings and symbols for the feature control frame. You can attach two rows of modifiers to one feature control frame. By default, only one row is used. At the bottom of the tab are buttons to facilitate numeric entry and to apply modifiers and datum names.

Sym Displays a palette of geometric symbols for straightness, cylindricity, angularity, position, symmetry, flatness, profile of a line, perpendicularity, concentricity, total runout, circularity, profile of a surface, parallelism, and circular runout.

Tolerance 1 Specifies the first tolerance. Tolerance 2 Specifies the second tolerance. Datum 1 Specifies the value for the first datum line. Datum 2 Specifies the value for the second datum line. Datum 3 Specifies the value for the third datum line.

AMFCFRAME

|

157

Leader Tab Controls leader segments, arrowhead styles, and all round symbols.

Segment / Leader Adds or removes leader segments from the current feature control frame. Attach Specifies the object to attach the leader to. Arrowhead Displays a palette of arrowhead styles for both primary and secondary leaders.

All Round Symbol Specifies whether to place an all round symbol on the leader.

Standard Properties Click the button in the lower-left corner of the Feature Control Frame dialog box to open the Standard Properties dialog box, where you can control the properties for the current symbol. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

158

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Modifying Feature Control Frames When making changes to feature control frames, consider the following: ■ ■ ■ ■

To retain the associativity of a feature control frame with the geometry it is attached to, use AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT to make changes. If you copy a feature control frame to the Windows clipboard, pasting it back into a drawing brings it in as a block. Pasting a feature control frame into other applications brings it in as a .wmf, .dwg, or .bmp file. If you explode a feature control frame, the symbol and leader become unassociated lines and text, and you can no longer edit them using AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT.

AMFEATID Creates a feature identifier symbol

Use AMFEATID to a create feature identifier symbol in Drawing mode. Feature identifier symbols identify or reference feature control frames that establish acceptable tolerances. They conform to BSI, CSN, DIN, GB, ISO, and JIS International Drafting Standards. DXF group codes are assigned to feature identifiers and allow complete data exchange. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Symbols ➤ Feature Identifier.

Toolbutton

Feature Identifier

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Feature Identifier

Command

AMFEATID

Select object to attach: Specify the object Start Point: Specify a start point Next Point <Symbol>: Specify an endpoint for the leader Next Point <Symbol>: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

AMFEATID

|

159

Feature Identifier Dialog Box

Enter a value for the feature identifier in the available field.

Arrowhead Displays a palette of arrowhead styles.

Standard Properties Click the button in the lower-left corner of the Feature Identifier dialog box to open the Standard Properties dialog box, where you can control properties for the current symbol. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

Modifying Feature Identifier Symbols When making changes to feature identifier symbols, consider the following: ■ ■ ■ ■

160

|

Chapter 1

To retain the associativity of a feature identifier symbol with the geometry it is attached to, use AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT to make changes. If you copy a feature identifier symbol to the Windows clipboard, pasting it back into a drawing brings it in as a block. Pasting a feature identifier symbol into other applications brings it in as a .wmf, .dwg, or .bmp file. If you explode a feature identifier symbol, the symbol and leader become unassociated lines and text, and you can no longer edit them using AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT.

Commands

AMFILLET Creates a smoothly fitted blend with a constant or variable radius between faces

Use AMFILLET to create parametric fillet features between faces on the active part. You can create constant, fixed width, cubic, and linear fillets with AMFILLET and edit them at any time using AMEDITFEAT. If you select multiple edges, the resulting fillets are considered to be one feature. Context Menu

Right-click the graphics area, and choose Placed Features ➤ Fillet.

Toolbutton

Fillet

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Fillet

Command

AMFILLET

Fillet Dialog Box

Constant Creates a constant radius fillet.

AMFILLET

|

161

Radius Specifies the radius for the fillet. Select edges: Select edge Select edges: Select another edge or press ENTER

edge selected

fillet created

NOTE The prompts appear when you choose OK in the Fillet dialog box.

Individual Radii Override Specifies individual radius values for each selected edge. Select edges: Select edge Select edges: Select another edge or press ENTER Select radius: Select radius to override Enter radius <0.2500>: Specify a new value Select radius: Select another radius or press ENTER R =0.25

R=0.75 R=0.25

edges selected and radius changed

fillets created

NOTE The three fillets are one feature, illustrated by one Fillet icon in the Desktop Browser.

162

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Fixed Width Creates a fillet with a fixed chord length. Select edge: Select an edge

edge selected

fillet created

Cubic Creates a variable radius fillet with a gradual blending transition between two radii that you specify on screen. Select edge: Select an edge Select radius or [Add vertex/Clear/Delete vertex]: Choose an option or select a radius Select Radius Specifies a value for the selected radius. Enter radius <0.5000>: Specify a value Select radius: Select another radius or press ENTER Add Vertex Adds a vertex to the selected line. Select location on edge: Specify a location on the selected edge Enter vertex placement <59.3922%>: Specify a value or press ENTER Clear Removes the current value from the selected radius. Select radius to clear:

Select a radius

AMFILLET

|

163

Delete Deletes a selected radius. Select radius to delete:

Specify a radius to delete

R=0.5

R=1.0 edge selected and radii specified

fillet created

Linear Creates a variable radius fillet with a linear transition between two radii that you specify on screen. Select edge: Select an edge Select radius: Select a radius Enter radius <0.5000>: Specify a value Select radius: Select another radius R=0.5

R=1.0 edge selected and radii specified

fillet created

AMFILLET3D Creates a smoothly fitted arc of constant radius between wires

Use AMFILLET3D to create a fillet between two wires. Valid wires are coplanar polylines, lines, arcs, ellipses, circles, splines, and elliptical arcs. The fillet is independent of the objects it joins. Use AMFILLET3D to fillet 3D objects received through the Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES) and other translators of mechanical CAD drawings. AMFILLET3D requires no manipulation of the UCS. It creates the fillet on the plane defined by the intersection of the objects.

164

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Toolbutton

Fillet Wire

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Wireframe ➤ Fillet

Command

AMFILLET3D

Radius=0.5000 Trim=Both Select first object or [Radius/Trim]: Choose an option or select the first wire Radius=0.5000 Trim=Both Select second object or [Radius/Trim]: Choose an option or select the second wire

Select First Object Selects the first wire.

Select Second Object Selects the second wire. This wire must be on the same plane as the first wire.

Radius Specifies the value for the fillet radius. Enter Radius <0.5000>:

Specify a fillet radius

Trim Specifies whether the wires are trimmed. Enter trim option [First/Second/None/Both] : Choose an option First Trims only the first wire selected. Second Trims only the second wire selected. None Does not trim either wire. Both Trims both wires.

AMFILLET3D

|

165

AMFILLETSF Creates a fillet surface along the intersection of two surfaces

Use AMFILLETSF to create an arc-shaped surface of variable or constant radius that is independent of the selected surfaces it joins. One or both of the selected surfaces can be trimmed to the fillet tangent. AMFILLETSF solves problems in manufacturing by rounding the edges of prod-

ucts with sharp corners. Toolbutton

Fillet Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Fillet

Command

AMFILLETSF

Select first surface: Specify a surface Select second surface: Specify another surface

Fillet Surface Dialog Box

NOTE The image tile varies, depending on the type of fillet you choose.

Trim Determines which surfaces, if any, to trim. First Surface Selects the first surface to trim.

166

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Second Surface Selects the second surface to trim.

NOTE Surfaces are trimmed in the order in which you selected them. The trim occurs tangent to the selected surfaces.

Fillet Type Determines the type of fillet to create. If neither the Variable nor Extended options are selected, a constant radius fillet is created.

constant radius fillet

Variable Creates a fillet with a variable radius. You can choose to create either a linear or a cubic fillet. Use the Radii options to set the radii values.

variable linear fillet

variable cubic fillet

Extended Extends the fillet past the first surface to the end of the second surface, usually maintaining a rolling ball fillet. If you do not select the Extended option, the fillet surface is terminated at the end of the shortest surface.

fillet not extended

fillet extended

AMFILLETSF

|

167

Base Surface Creates a fillet to the base edges rather than the trim edges. This option is available only when at least one of the input surfaces is trimmed.

fillet created to base surfaces

Linear Creates a linear blend between the two edges of a variable fillet. Cubic Creates a cubic blend between the two edges of a variable fillet.

Radii Sets the size of the fillet surface.

NOTE If you choose the Variable option, First Edge is displayed instead of the Fillet Radius option. In this case, the value given determines the radius of the first edge in the variable radius fillet. Fillet Radius Displays the current value of the AutoCAD system variable FILLETRAD. Enter a different value to change the size of the constant radius. First Edge Determines the radius of the first edge in a variable radius fillet. This option is available only when you have selected the Variable option. Second Edge Determines the radius of the second edge in a variable radius fillet. This option is available only when you have selected the Variable option.

168

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMFITSPLINE Smooths wire objects by fitting them with a smooth NURBS spline

Use AMFITSPLINE to create splines from polylines, circles, ellipses, and arcs, retaining the properties of the original wires. You can set the tolerance or the number of control points for the spline. AMFITSPLINE previews the results until you find the smoothest spline with the smallest number of control points. In certain industries, digitized data is the basis for creating surface models. Often, the digitized data is received as 3D polylines that are not smooth, even though they have hundreds of vertices. Use AMFITSPLINE in these situations to convert the polylines into smooth NURBS splines that can be used to create smooth surfaces. Toolbutton

Create Spline

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Wireframe ➤ Spline Fit

Command

AMFITSPLINE

Select wires: Select wires:

Select a wire Select another wire or press ENTER

Fit Spline Dialog Box

Fit Mode Determines the type of fit for the spline. Tolerance Creates a spline using the maximum chordal deviation between the resulting spline and the vertices of the input polyline.

AMFITSPLINE

|

169

When you specify a tolerance, AMFITSPLINE floats a smooth 3D spline through the selected polyline using the least squares approximation method to produce a spline with fewer control points. This method decreases inflections in the curvature and increases deviations in fit between the spline and the polyline. To reduce the inflections in the overall shape of a dense polyline, enter a loose (high) tolerance. To give a sparse polyline more shape, enter a tight (low) tolerance. If the Fit Tolerance setting does not provide the results you want, loosen the setting a little more, and check the Average Error again. Repeat these steps until you’re successful. Changing the value of this option does not change the default Fit Tolerance, which is based on the AMPFITTOL system variable. Control Points Creates a spline using a specified number of control points. For example, use this option on a 3D polyline that was produced by scanning a physical model that has hundreds of points that vary only a few thousandths of an inch from a theoretically smooth line. This method produces a spline with relatively few control points, compared to the original polyline. To reduce the inflections in the overall shape, select a dense polyline and enter a small number of control points. To give the polyline more shape, select a sparse polyline and enter a large number of control points. The accuracy of the fit is affected by the number of control points you enter, so check the Max Deviation and Average Error values when using this option. Using control points to fit a spline to a polyline precludes using a tolerance.

Spline Attributes Defines the attributes for the new spline. Tolerance Determines the allowable tolerance for a Tolerance Fit. If you choose to create the spline from control points, this field changes to allow you to specify the number of control points to use. Order Sets the default order of a curve for generating splines. The order of a curve is 1, plus the highest-numbered exponent in the defining polynomial equation. Generally, order 4 is used to generate a spline with C2 continuity.

NOTE If the order is 2, multiple 2-point splines are created. A warning regarding length and angle is displayed. Changing the order to a number greater than 4 may produce undesirable inflections and oscillations in the spline.

170

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Break Length Sets the value of AMPFITLEN, which holds a portion of a polyline flat in the resulting spline. This setting is available only with order 4 splines. Use the button to the right of this field to preview your setting.

If the setting of AMPFITLEN creates more than one spline, a Warning dialog box is displayed when you attempt to create the spline.

Choose cancel to abort creation of the spline. Break Angle Sets the value of AMPFITANG, which holds sharp corners of the polyline in the resulting spline. This setting is available only with order 4 splines. Use the button to the right of this field to preview your setting.

If setting AMPFITANG will create more than one spline, a Warning dialog box is displayed when you attempt to create the spline. To abort creation of the spline, choose Cancel. Close Creates a closed spline that is tangentially continuous at the closing point, even if the original polyline was not closed.

AMFITSPLINE

|

171

Spline Fit Results Displays the results of fitting the polyline to the spline. If you selected more than one polyline, the results are not available. Control Points Shows the density of the newly created spline. Try to fit your input data to the spline by lowering the number of control points, while maintaining a close fit to your original data. Max Deviation Shows the maximum chordal deviation between the input polyline and the spline. Tangency Break Shows the number of points in the curve with C1 continuity. Curvature Break Shows the number of breaks necessary to avoid creating a curve with C0 continuity.

Preview Previews your settings on screen. C1 tangent points are displayed in the GRIPCOLOR, and C0 breaks are displayed in the GRIPHOT color.

AMFLOW Creates flow wires in the U and V directions

Use AMFLOW to create 3D polylines or augmented lines and display them on the surface in the U or V direction, or in both directions, or on C1 tangencies. Flow wires of a trimmed surface begin and end at the surface borders and follow the contours of the base surface. Flow lines created by AMFLOW are different from surface display lines, which you control with AMDISPSF. Surface display lines are U and V lines that make the surface visible, whereas flow lines are actual 3D polylines that reside on the surface. By examining flow wires, you can verify the quality of the surface. Flow lines are sometimes used in manufacturing to generate tool paths. Toolbutton

Flow Wires

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Wireframe ➤ Flow

Command

AMFLOW

Select surfaces to define flow lines: Select surfaces to define flow lines:

172

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Select a surface Select another surface or press ENTER

Surface Flow Lines Dialog Box

Flow Type Establishes the direction of the flow wires. U/V Wires Creates flow wires in the U or V direction or in both directions of the surface. If you set either U wires or V wires to 0, no flow wires are created in that direction of the surface. C1 Tangents Creates flow wires along the C1 tangencies of a surface. This option is available only if you selected a surface that has C1 areas.

Preview Closes the Surface Flow Lines dialog box temporarily and displays a preview of the flow lines on your surface in the GRIPCOLOR.

U Wires Sets the number of U wires to create. Enter a number in the edit field or accept the default. Enter 0 to display no wires of this type.

V Wires Sets the number of V wires. Enter a number in the edit field or accept the default. Enter 0 to display no wires of this type.

NOTE To shorten the time it takes to display a preview, set U wires and V wires to a low setting.

AMFLOW

|

173

Augmented Creates flow wires as augmented lines. Internally, all added vectors are one unit of measurement in length, but they are displayed according to the value of AMVECAUG.

original surface

augmented flow wires created

Offset Creates flow wires offset a given distance in a direction normal to the surface. A positive offset value offsets the flow wires in the same direction as the surface normal. A negative offset value offsets the flow wires in the opposite direction of the surface normal. Use this option to create tool paths to cut more or less material than the designed surface

NOTE The offset flow wires are not the same size as the original surface.

positive offset

negative offset

Save Changes the status of flow wires from temporary to permanent by incorporating them in to the drawing database. If you do not choose Save, flow wires are erased when the drawing is redrawn.

Group Sets the name of the group that stores flow wires. Enter the group prefix in the list box, or accept the default prefix. Having flow wires in a group simplifies accessing them. For example, to modify flow wires to create a tool path, you can select all the flow wires in the group, move the flow wires away from the surface, turn off the selectable feature of groups, and select just a few flow wires for modification.

174

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMFLUSH Creates a parallel constraint at a specified offset between two planes

Use AMFLUSH to create a parallel assembly constraint between two planes. You can also specify an offset. Because assembly constraints are fully parametric, you can modify their parameters at any time.

planes selected

flush constraint created

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose 3D Constraints ➤ Flush.

Toolbutton

Flush

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ 3D Constraints ➤ Flush

Command

AMFLUSH

Select first set of geometry: Select the first plane First set = Plane Enter an option [Clear/Next/Flip/cYcle] : Choose an option or press ENTER Select second set of geometry: Select the second plane Second set = Plane Enter an option [Clear/Next/Flip/cYcle] : Choose an option or press ENTER Enter offset <0.0000>: Specify an offset or press ENTER

Clear Clears the current selection.

Next Toggles the next available geometry: an axis, a face, or a point.

Flip Flips the direction of the normal.

AMFLUSH

|

175

Cycle Cycles through available geometry.

Using the Animated Cursor Use the animated cursor to automate the selection process when you create constraints.

Cycling When the cursor appears with rotational arrows, use the left mouse button to cycle through available options. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

Flipping When the cursor appears with directional arrows, use the left mouse button to flip directions. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

NOTE By using the animated cursor, you can minimize your responses to the command prompts.

AMHOLE Creates drilled, counterbored, or countersunk holes that may be terminated on planar faces

Use AMHOLE to create hole features on planar faces. Types of holes include drilled, counterbore, and countersink. The holes are fully parametric and can be edited at any time. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed Features ➤ Hole.

Toolbutton

Hole

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Hole

Command

AMHOLE

drilled

176

|

Chapter 1

Commands

counterbore

countersink

Hole Feature Dialog Box

NOTE The image tile changes to illustrate the type of hole you have selected. Use this image to understand how the hole will be created.

Copy Values Copies the values of an existing hole feature. Select hole to copy values from: Specify a hole feature

Operation Specifies the type of hole. Drilled Creates a simple, drilled hole. C’Bore Creates a counterbore hole. C’Sink Creates a countersink hole.

Termination Specifies where the hole feature ends. Through Creates a hole that passes completely through the part.

AMHOLE

|

177

To-Plane Creates a hole that terminates at a selected plane. Blind Creates a hole that ends inside the part at a specified depth.

Placement Specifies how the hole will be located on the part. 2 Edges Places the hole at a specified distance from two selected edges. Select the first edge: Select the first edge Select the second edge: Select the second edge Specify the hole location: Specify a location point Enter distance from first edge (highlighted) <10.0502>: Specify a distance Enter distance from second edge (highlighted) <10.6066>: Specify a distance Select the first edge: Select an edge or press ENTER to exit Concentric Places the hole concentric to a selected circular edge. Select work plane or planar face [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]: Choose an option, or select a work plane or planar face Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Choose an option or press ENTER Select concentric edge: Select a circular edge Select work plane or planar face [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]: Choose an option to place another hole, or press ENTER to exit On Point Places the hole on a selected work point. Select work point for the hole location: Select a work point Specify direction or [Accept/Flip] : Choose an option or press ENTER Select work point for the hole location: Select a work point for another hole, or press ENTER to exit

178

|

Chapter 1

Commands

From Hole Places the hole at a specified x and y distance from existing holes on a specified plane. Select work plane or planar face [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]: Choose an option, or select a work plane or planar face Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Choose an option or press ENTER Specify the orientation for the hole placement. Select edge to align X axis [Rotate]: Enter r to rotate the X axis 90 degrees, or select a work axis or a straight edge Select edge to align X axis [Rotate]: Choose an option or press ENTER Select hole for the X direction reference: Select a hole Select hole for the Y direction reference or <previous>: Select a hole or press ENTER Specify the hole location: Specify a location Enter the X distance <11.3934>: Specify a value Enter the Y distance <3.3165>: Specify a value Select work plane or planar face [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]: Choose an option to place another hole, or press ENTER to exit

Tapped Specifies thread information for tapped holes. Major Dia Specifies the diameter for the threads. Full Thread Depth Specifies whether the threads run the length of the hole. Depth Specifies the depth for the threads if they do not run full length.

Drill Size Controls the depth, diameter, and point angle of the drill used to create the hole. Dia Specifies the diameter of the hole. Depth Specifies the depth of the hole. Available only with termination type Blind. PT Angle Specifies the point angle for a hole that terminates inside the part. Available with termination types Blind and To Plane.

AMHOLE

|

179

C’bore/Sunk Size Controls counterbore and countersink depth and size. Available only if a counterbore or countersink hole has been specified. C’Dia Specifies the diameter for the counterbore or countersink. C’Depth Specifies the depth for the counterbore. C’Angle Specifies the angle for the countersink.

AMHOLENOTE Creates custom diameter, depth, and angle information for standard hole notes

Use AMHOLENOTE in Drawing mode to create or edit annotations for hole features on your parts.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Annotation ➤ Hole Note.

Toolbutton

Hole Note

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Annotation ➤ Hole Note

Command

AMHOLENOTE

Enter an option [Edit/New] : Choose an option or press ENTER Select hole feature: Select a valid edge on a hole feature

180

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Create Holenote Dialog Box If you are editing an existing holenote, the Edit Holenote dialog box is displayed. It contains the same options as the Create Holenote dialog box.

Template Name Displays available holenote template names. Select the template to use.

Leader Justification Controls the placement of the holenote leader. Valid options are ■ ■ ■

Middle of top line Middle of all text Middle of bottom line

AMHOLENOTE

|

181

Edit Template Opens the Multiline Text Editor dialog box. The selected template consists of variables used by Mechanical Desktop to control the values for the dimensions that appear in the holenote. These variables are AMDIA

Controls the diameter of the hole.

AMDEP

Controls the depth of the hole.

AMCDIA

Controls the diameter of a countersink or counterbore.

AMCSANGLE

Controls the angle of a countersink.

AMCBDEP

Controls the depth of a counterbore.

NOTE Precede the variable name with %% to instruct the Multiline Text Editor that it is a variable. Otherwise, only the variable name appears in the holenote.

Use the Multiline Text Editor to modify the information you want included when the holenote is created. See the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more information about using the Multiline Text Editor.

Dimension Style Overrides Opens the Holenote Dimension Style Overrides dialog box, which controls the dimension style, precision, and type of measurement for individual expressions in the holenote.

dimension style overrides

182

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Primary Dimension Style Controls the primary dimension style to apply to the holenote. This style will be used by any expression that does not have an override applied to it.

primary dimension style applied

Apply Dimension Style to Text Height Only Controls whether to apply the dimension style to the text height only or to the entire holenote. The current dimension style is indicated in the field below the check box. Select a defined dimension style from the list.

Holenote Dimension Style Overrides Dialog Box

Expression Lists the expressions in the current holenote.

Precision Controls the precision for each expression in the holenote. Select the value you want to override, and select a value from the list.

Apply Dimstyle Controls the dimension style for the selected expression.

AMHOLENOTE

|

183

Measurement Type Controls the type of measurement for the selected expression.

Dimension Style Controls the dimension style for the selected expression.

AMIDFIN Reads printed circuit board (PCB) data in the Intermediate Data Format (IDF) and converts it to AutoCAD and Mechanical Desktop objects

Use AMIDFIN to read PCB data into the current drawing. AMIDFIN reads PCB data in IDF and translates it into AutoCAD and Mechanical Desktop objects. Desktop Menu

Insert ➤ IDF

Command

AMIDFIN

Autodesk IDF Translator Dialog Box

Board File Opens the Board File Defaults/IDF Translator dialog box. Use this dialog box to locate the board file (*.brd) you want to import.

Library File Opens the Library File Defaults/IDF Translator dialog box. Use this dialog box to locate the library file (*.lib) you want to import.

184

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Options File Opens the Options File Defaults/IDF Translator dialog box. Use this dialog box to locate the options file (*.opt) you want to import.

Edit Options Opens the Autodesk IDF Translator - Edit IDFIN Options dialog box. Use this dialog box to respecify the colors and layers to use for IDF components.

Edit IDFIN Options Dialog Box

Color Opens the AutoCAD Select Color dialog box. Specifies a color to use for the highlighted component.

Layer Opens the Layer Rename dialog box. Specifies a layer to use for the highlighted component.

Save As Opens the Save Options to File/IDF Translator dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify the location and file name of the options file (*.opt) that you want to save.

AMIDFIN

|

185

AMINSERT Creates a constraint to make two circular edges share the same axis and to make their planes coplanar

Use AMINSERT to create an assembly constraint between two parts with circular edges, or faces. AMINSERT constrains the parts by making the selected edges or faces share the same axis, while forcing their faces coplanar. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose 3D Constraints ➤ Insert.

Toolbutton

Insert

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ 3D Constraints ➤ Insert

Command

AMINSERT

Select first circular edge: Select the first edge First set = Plane/Axis Enter an option [Clear/Flip] : Choose an option or press ENTER Select second circular edge: Select the second edge Second set = Plane/Axis Enter an option [Clear/Flip]: Choose an option or press ENTER Offset <0.0000>: Specify a value or press ENTER

edges selected

insert constraint created

Clear Clears the current selection.

Flip Flips the direction of the normal.

NOTE By using the animated cursor, you can minimize your responses to the command prompts.

186

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Using the Animated Cursor The animated cursor can be used to automate the selection process when you are creating constraints.

Cycling When the cursor is displayed with rotational arrows, use the left mouse button to cycle through the available options. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

Flipping When the cursor is displayed with directional arrows, use the left mouse button to flip directions. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

AMINTERFERE Checks for interference between parts in an assembly or a combined part file

Use AMINTERFERE to check for interference between parts in an assembly or in a combined part file. AMINTERFERE analyzes the position of the selected parts and returns information about any interference found. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Analysis ➤ Check Interference.

Toolbutton

Check Interference

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Analysis ➤ Check Interference

Command

AMINTERFERE

Nested part or subassembly selection? [Yes/No] : Enter y to check nested parts and subassemblies, or press ENTER

No Selects multiple parts and subassemblies. Nested parts or subassemblies within the selected objects are ignored. Select first set of parts or subassemblies Select first part or subassembly: Select a part or subassembly Select first part or subassembly: Select another part or subassembly, or press ENTER Select second set of parts or subassemblies Select the second part or subassembly: Select a part or subassembly Select the second part or subassembly: Select another part or subassembly, or press ENTER Comparing n parts/subassemblies against n parts/subassemblies.

AMINTERFERE

|

187

Yes Moves you into a specific subassembly to compare nested parts. Select first set of parts or subassemblies Select first part or subassembly: Select a part or subassembly Instance = SUB1_1 Enter an option [Down/Next/Accept] : Choose an option, or press ENTER Select first part or subassembly: Select another part or subassembly, or press ENTER Select second set of parts or subassemblies Select the second part or subassembly: Select a part or subassembly (Instance SPACER_1) Enter an option [Down/Next/Accept] : Choose an option, or press ENTER Select the second part or subassembly: Select another part or subassembly, or press ENTER Down Moves down one level in the assembly to change your selection to a subassembly or a part lower in the tree. Next Cycles through the parts or subassemblies in the selection. Up Moves up one level in the assembly to change your selection to a subassembly or a part higher in the tree.

Interferences Found If interferences are found, information is displayed on the command line. Interference 1: PART1_1 PART2_1 Create interference solids? [Yes/No] : Choose an option Highlight pairs of interfering parts/subassemblies? [Yes/No] : Choose an option

No Interferences Found If no interferences are found, a message is displayed on the command line. Parts/Subassemblies do not interfere.

188

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMINTERSF Intersects two surfaces and creates a 3D polyline at the intersection

Use AMINTERSF to create a curve of intersection between two intersecting surfaces, to terminate one surface at another surface. In product and tooling design, oversized four-sided surfaces are usually created to capture the part contours. AMINTERSF is used to create trimmed surfaces, based on intersections with neighboring surfaces. Offset intersections are used to create tool paths and trim off tool path interference or collisions to a neighboring surface.

intersecting surfaces

one surface trimmed

both surfaces trimmed

NOTE Results of AMINTERSF may be incorrect if surfaces intersect at a point or line of tangency. Toolbutton

Intersect and Trim

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Intersect Trim

Command

AMINTERSF

Select first surface: Select the first surface Select second surface: Select the second surface

Surface Intersection Dialog Box

AMINTERSF

|

189

Intersection Specifies whether a 3D polyline is created along the intersection. Polyline Creates a 3D polyline along the intersection of the selected surfaces.

Trim Controls trimming of the input surfaces. First Surface Cuts the first surface at the intersection, extending the line of intersection, if necessary. The base surface is hidden but retained. Second Surface Trims the second selected surface.

NOTE Surfaces are trimmed in the same order in which you select them.

AMJOIN3D Joins wires to form one 3D polyline, spline, or augmented line

Use AMJOIN3D to create a polyline, spline, or augmented line by joining any combination of lines, arcs, circles, ellipses, augmented lines, splines, and polylines. The direction of input wires can vary. AMJOIN3D controls the direction of the new object resulting from the joined wires. Arcs, circles, ellipses, and splines are exploded before being joined. The new object inherits the properties, including group membership, of the first wire you select. Use this command to combine parts of your wireframe model into a single wireframe object.

190

|

Toolbutton

Join Wire

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Wireframe ➤ Join

Command

AMJOIN3D

Chapter 1

Commands

Join 3D Dialog Box

Mode Specifies whether objects are joined, without regard for their proximity to each other. Manual Joins selected wires, regardless of how far apart they are. Automatic Joins selected wires if they are not too far apart, as determined by the Gap Tolerance setting.

Output Determines the type of object produced by joining wires. Polyline Creates a polyline. Spline Creates a spline. Aug Line Creates an augmented line. If either of the input wires has vectors, the new augmented line inherits them. If neither of the input wires has vectors, the vectors of the new augmented line are normal to the curve in the plane of the display.

Gap Sets the AMJOINGAP system variable, the default gap tolerance. If the Gap setting is greater than the 3D distance between the selected wires, they are joined. Set the gap tolerance to the greatest acceptable distance between wires.

AMJOIN3D

|

191

OK Choose OK to continue. Select start wire: Select the first wire Select wire to join: Select the second wire Select wire to join: Select another wire or press ENTER Reverse direction? [Yes/No] : Choose an option or press ENTER Yes Reverses the direction of the output object. No Does not reverse the direction of the output object.

AMJOINSF Joins two or more surfaces at their untrimmed base edges into one continuous surface

Use AMJOINSF to join adjacent surfaces to create a single surface. Joining surfaces with AMJOINSF also reduces file size by decreasing the number of surfaces in a model. Surfaces are joined in the order selected and at adjacent edges, regardless of where you selected the surfaces. Toolbutton

Join Surfaces

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Join

Command

AMJOINSF

Select surfaces to join: Select the first surface (1) Select surfaces to join: Select another surface (2) Select surfaces to join: Select another surface or press ENTER 1 2

Joining Mismatched Surfaces When surfaces don’t match at their edges AMJOINSF attempts to resolve the mismatch by blending. The AMBLENDTOL system variable controls how much of the surface is blended. The total area that AMJOINSF blends is twice the value of AMBLENDTOL.

192

|

Chapter 1

Commands

NOTE AMJOINSF joins only untrimmed base edges of a surface. If the edges of the surfaces that are being joined are not tangent, a small amount of the original surface definitions are altered to create a smooth blend between the two surfaces. The AMBLENDTOL system variable defines how many of the surface definitions are used to create the smooth blend. If the edges of the two surfaces are adjacent, the endpoints of the edges must be coincident. If the edges of the two surfaces are not adjacent, the endpoints of the edges do not have to be coincident. If the gap between the edges of two surfaces is greater than 2 X AMBLENDTOL, then AMJOINSF creates a smooth blend that fills the gap between the two edges. In this situation, AMBLENDTOL does not affect the output surface. AMJOINSF blends only between the edges. If the gap between the edges of two surfaces is less than 2 X AMBLENDTOL, AMJOINSF alters the original surface definitions so that a smooth blend can be created. The amount by which the surface definition is altered is equal to AMBLENDTOL for each surface.

Joining Trimmed Surfaces A common problem in joining surfaces that have been trimmed is assuming that the surface edge you are viewing is the actual base edge of the surface. AMJOINSF joins only base surfaces, not their interior trim edges. You can use AMDISPSF to display the base surfaces to be sure which surfaces you’re joining.

AMLEGIBLE Creates 2D entities representing parts and assemblies in drawing views

Use AMLEGIBLE to create 2D entities that represent parts and assemblies in drawing views. AMLEGIBLE creates 2D geometry that lies directly over part edges in Drawing mode. The 2D entities can be used to ■ ■ ■

Calculate moments of inertia from drawing views. Generate shafts. Export 2D representations of your model to a separate drawing file.

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Legible Entities

Command

AMLEGIBLE

AMLEGIBLE

|

193

Legible Entities Dialog Box

Mode Controls legible entities. Create Creates legible entities for one or more drawing views. Select/Pick viewport (Press RETURN for all): Specify a drawing view or press ENTER Update Updates legible entities in one or more drawing views. Select/Pick viewport (Press RETURN for all): Specify a drawing view or press ENTER Highlight Highlights legible entities in a selected view. Creates a selection set of all highlighted entities. Select/Pick viewport (Press RETURN for all): Specify a drawing view or press ENTER Remove Deletes legible entities from one or more drawing views. Select/Pick viewport (Press RETURN for all): Specify a drawing view or press ENTER

194

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Export/Copy Exports selected drawing views, annotations, and legible entities to an external drawing file. Select objects: Specify a drawing view border, an annotation, or a legible entity Select objects: Specify more objects or press ENTER

Objects Controls which objects are used to create legible entities. All Creates legible entities from all possible objects. Contour Creates legible entities from the contour lines of the parts in selected drawing views. This option is always selected. Hidden Lines Creates legible entities from hidden lines. Centerlines Creates legible entities from centerlines. Available only when exporting legible entities. Hatches Creates legible entities from hatch patterns. Dimensions/Symbols Creates legible entities from dimensions and symbols. Available only when exporting legible entities.

AMLENGTHEN Extends or shortens base surface edges by a percentage or distance

Use AMLENGTHEN to add tangent-continuous rows of surface patches to extend the original surface. The original portion of the surface remains the same. The added patches follow the flow and contour of the original surface. AMLENGTHEN extends only the base edges of the surface. If the trimmed

edges of the surface are the same as the base surface, the trimmed edges are changed. If the trimmed edges of the surface are inside the base surface, the trimmed surface does not change, but the base surface does. You can shorten a base surface with AMLENGTHEN. After shortening, any trim that remains is truncated, and subsequent lengthening of the surface does not replace the original trim.

AMLENGTHEN

|

195

For product and tooling design, such as managing runoff in dies and binder surfaces, AMLENGTHEN ■ ■ ■

■

Extends surfaces to an intersection for interference checking and creates tool paths for lead-in. Stretches a short surface to the required size, rather than editing the underlying geometry. Creates a common intersection line between three filleted surfaces by stretching the surfaces in preparation for creating a blended corner surface with AMCORNER. Resizes all base edges of a surface so that you can project geometry onto another smaller surface.

Toolbutton

Lengthen Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Lengthen

Command

AMLENGTHEN

Base edge=Single Extension=Percent Method=Parabolic Value=110.0000% Select surface edge or [Base edge/Extension/Method/Value]: Choose an option or select a surface edge

original surface

surface lengthened 30%

Select Surface Edge Extends the selected surface edge according to the current settings of Extension, Method, and Value. Value is either a delta distance or a percentage, depending on the setting of the Extension option. The default setting extends surfaces by 110 percent, so as soon as you enter AMLENGTHEN and select a surface edge, it is lengthened by 10 percent. You can rapidly extend the same edge to the length you want by repeatedly selecting the same edge.

Base Edge Lengthens a surface by extending its base edges, either individually or all at once. Enter base edge type [All/Single] : Choose an option

196

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Extension Specifies the method of extending a surface (either by a percentage or by a fixed delta distance). Enter extension type [Delta/Percent] : Choose an option Percent Extends the surface by a percentage of the existing surface. If you enter 110, the surface is extended by 10 percent. If you enter 50, the surface is reduced to half its original size. Enter percent <110.0000%>:

Specify a value

Delta Extends the surface by a specified distance measured along the surface contour, rather than an axis. Entering a negative distance reduces the surface. Enter delta <1.0000>: Specify a value

Method Extends the surface using a linear transition or a parabolic transition. Enter method [Linear/Parabolic] :

linear extension

Choose an option

parabolic extension

Linear Creates a straight extension tangent to the selected surface edge. Parabolic Creates an extension that follows the curvature of the original surface. The curvature is continuous, and its distance cannot exceed the original surface length.

Value Determines how much the surface is extended or shortened. The surface is extended by either a certain distance or by a percentage, depending on the setting of the Extension option.

AMLENGTHEN

|

197

AMLISTASSM Returns information about part instances

Use AMLISTASSM in Model mode to get information about a part or set of parts, including the part name, definition name, degrees of freedom, and a list of attributes assigned to the part. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Assembly ➤ Query.

Toolbutton

List Part Data

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ Query

Command

AMLISTASSM

Enter an option (parts or subassemblies) [Name/Select] <Select>: Enter n to specify a part/subassembly name, or select a part/subassembly screen

Select Specifies a part or subassembly by selecting it on screen. Select part and subassembly instances: Select a part or subassembly Select part and subassembly instances: Select another part or subassembly, or press ENTER

Name Specifies a part or subassembly. Enter part or subassembly instance name or [?]: Specify a name or enter ? for a list of parts in the drawing Enter part or subassembly instance name or [?]: Specify another name or press ENTER

198

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMLISTPART Displays part, feature, and view information

Use AMLISTPART in Model mode to display information about parts and features in a text window. Toolbutton

List Part

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ List Part

Command

AMLISTPART

Select feature to be listed [aCtive part/All parts/Feature]: Choose an option or select a part

Select a Part Displays information about the selected part.

Feature Displays information about selected features (parent), dependent features (children), or all features. Select the feature to be listed: Select a part feature Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n to cycle to the next feature, or press ENTER Enter an option [Children/List/Parents] : Select an option List Displays information about the selected feature. Children Displays information about the dependent features associated with the selected feature. Parents Displays information about the parent feature of the selected feature.

Active Part Displays information about the active part.

All Parts Displays information about all parts in the drawing.

AMLISTPART

|

199

AMLISTVIEW Lists view information in a text window

Use AMLISTVIEW in Drawing mode to obtain information about a selected view. AMLISTVIEW lists the type of drawing view, view directions, center point of the view, name of the visible layer, names of hidden layers, number of dependent views, dimensions and notes, and how many parts are represented in the view. Toolbutton

List Drawing

Desktop Menu

Drawing ➤ List Drawing

Command

AMLISTVIEW

Select view: Specify a drawing view

AMLOCKSCENE Locks the position of part instances on a scene-by-scene basis

Use AMLOCKSCENE to lock and unlock the existing positions of all parts in a scene. This command is available in Scene mode only. When a scene is locked, changes cannot be made to the explosion factor of the scene or individual parts, and tweaks cannot be added or modified. Browser

In the Scene tab, right-click the scene icon and choose Lock Position.

Command

AMLOCKSCENE

Enter an option [Lock/Unlock] :

Choose an option or press ENTER

Unlock Unlocks a scene.

Lock Locks a scene. A small lock appears beside the scene icon in the browser.

200

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMLOFT Creates a solid shape through profiles

Use AMLOFT to create a complex, solid shape by blending it through a set of planar closed loops or sections. The closed loops can be defined using any of the following: ■ ■ ■

Profiles Planar face loops A work point

cubic loft

linear loft

Context Menu

In the graphics area, choose Sketched & Work Features ➤ Loft.

Toolbutton

Loft

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketched Features ➤ Loft

Command

AMLOFT

Select profiles or planar faces to loft: Specify a profile or face Select profiles or planar faces to loft: Specify another profile or face Select profiles or planar faces to loft or [Redefine sections]: Specify another profile or face, enter r to redefine sections, or press ENTER to continue

Redefine Returns to the first prompt so that you can redefine the sections to loft.

AMLOFT

|

201

Loft Dialog Box

Operation Controls how the loft will be used. Base Creates a loft that becomes the base feature of the active part. If a base feature already exists, this operation is not available. If a base feature does not exist, this operation is the default. Other operations are not available. Join Joins the loft to the base feature. Cut Cuts the loft from the base feature. Intersect Creates a new feature from the intersection between the loft and the base feature. Split Splits the base feature, using the loft.

Termination Controls how the loft is created. Sections Creates the loft using profiled sections. To Face Creates the loft to an existing face. From to Creates the loft from one existing face to another existing face.

202

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Type Controls the type of loft. Linear Creates a linear transition between two defined sections or faces. Cubic Creates gradual blends between defined sections or faces. Closed Cubic Creates gradual blends between defined sections along a closed path.

Minimize Twist Controls the alignment of sections in a loft feature. When selected, determines the best location for the placement of the start point, to minimize the twisting of the loft.

Sections to Loft Provides options to redefine, reorder, and delete sections and to control the start points of sections, to minimize twist. Redefine Redefines the sections to use in the loft. Select profiles or planar faces to loft: Specify a profile or face Select profiles or planar faces to loft: Specify another profile or face Select profiles or planar faces to loft or [Redefine sections]: Specify another profile or face, enter r to redefine sections, or press ENTER to continue Start Points Controls the placement of the start points of the loft, to control twist. Specify start points or [preView/Restore default]: Choose an option or specify a new point Preview

Provides a preview of the loft.

Restore Default

Restores the default start point of selected sections.

Select sections or [All]: Enter a or specify a section Select sections: Specify another section or press ENTER Reorder Reorders the selected sections or planar faces. Delete Removes the selected sections or planar faces.

AMLOFT

|

203

Start Section Controls the start section of the loft. Tangent to Adjacent Faces Forces the loft tangent to the adjacent faces of the start face; available only if the start section of the loft is a planar face. Angle Controls the takeoff angle at the start section of the loft; not available if the Tangent to Face option is selected. Weight Controls how long the loft follows the Angle or Tangent to Face option before starting to blend with the next section.

End Section Controls the end section of the loft. Tangent to Adjacent Faces Forces the loft tangent to the adjacent faces of the end face; available only if the end section of the loft is a planar face. Angle Controls the takeoff angle at the end section of the loft; not available if the Tangent to Face option is selected. Weight Controls how long the loft follows the Angle or Tangent to Face option before starting to blend with the end section.

AMLOFTU Creates a surface through a set of wires

Use AMLOFTU to construct a surface from a single set of curves (U wires) that represent how a surface looks at regular intervals. AMLOFTU controls the continuity and approximate number of internal patches in the surface, which determines how tightly the input surface fits through the input wire set.

204

|

Chapter 1

Commands

The wires may exist as polylines, arcs, lines, augmented lines, elliptical arcs, circles, ellipses, splines, or surface display lines (isolines or edges). Selected wires should not cross each other.

wires

surface overlaid on wires

The order in which you select wires determines how the surface is built. Select wires in sequential order; for example, from top to bottom. Avoid reversing the order of selection to go back to a wire you missed; AMLOFTU might create a self-intersecting surface. Toolbutton

Loft U Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ LoftU

Command

AMLOFTU

Select U wires: Select U wires: Select U wires:

Select a wire Select another wire Select another wire or press ENTER

Loft Surface Dialog Box

Input Wires Applies direction control and spline fitting to the wires you select.

AMLOFTU

|

205

Align Adjusts the direction of selected wires, if necessary, to make them unidirectional. Turn on Align to change the direction of misaligned input wires. Turn off Align to produce the surface without changing the direction of the misaligned input wires.

NOTE AMLOFTU does not align closed U wires. Before using AMLOFTU on closed U wires, check the direction of the wires with AMDIRECTION, and change the direction, as needed. Smooth Fits the surface through the points on the wires using the polyline fit tolerance (AMPFITTOL). Choose Smooth to improve the performance (in most cases) of subsequent operations on the surface. AMLOFTU reduces the complexity and number of surface patches used to create the surface and smooths input curves, by the approximation method, according to the current system tolerance (AMSFTOL). Smooth makes only a subtle difference when the surface is passed through the U wires that are within the polyline fit tolerance AMPFITTOL. Changing the polyline fit tolerance produces a more dramatic effect.

Smooth on

Smooth off

Turning off Smooth makes each point of the surface fall directly on the input curves. The complexity and discontinuity of input curves are maintained and reflected in the resulting surface. Input curves are smoothed by the interpolation method, which fits the input curve exactly, through defining points, to create the lofted surface.

Curve Ends Fit Forms the two V edges of the surface from the ends of each input curve. Defines the surface edge by smoothly fitting the ends of all the input wires. With parallel (or nearly parallel) input curves, this option creates an acceptable surface by defining the two edges of the surface from the curve ends because the ends of parallel input curves can be suitably smoothed. For better system performance, use the Curve Ends Fit option only with input polylines that have sparse point spacing, or a limited number of input curves, or both.

206

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Respace Adjusts poorly proportioned curve ends by fitting the ends of the input curves exactly. The new fit is less constrained in the V direction but it is better proportioned overall. With Respace on, a smoother surface can be produced, but the surface accuracy is degraded slightly, particularly when you select nonparallel lines.

Respace on

Respace off

With Respace off, the surface is fit exactly through the input curve ends to constrain the curve ends in that direction. Turn off Respace if input curves are perfectly or almost perfectly proportioned or if you want the effect that no respacing has on the resulting surface. Input curves are not well proportioned if they’re skewed relative to each other.

Polyline Fit Displays the Polyline Fit dialog box for changing AMPFITLEN and AMPFITANG system variables.

Polyline Fit Dialog Box

Length Prompt Measures the length of a given segment in a polyline. Use to determine which part of the polyline is the shortest.

AMLOFTU

|

207

If Length is Longer than Sets the AMPFITLEN system variable. The current value of AMPFITLEN is based on the portion of the polyline you specified at the Length prompt.

Angle Prompt Measures the angle between two segments in the polyline. Select an angle that defines the smallest variation in direction allowed before creating a sharp corner.

If Angle is Less than Sets the AMPFITANG system variable, which holds sharp corners of the polyline in the resulting spline, if the angle of the corner is less than the value you specify. The current value of AMPFITLEN is based on the portion of the polyline you specified at the Angle prompt.

Fit Tolerance Displays and specifies a tolerance for fitting a spline through the input polyline with the least squares approximation method.

AMLOFTUV Creates a surface through two sets of wires

Use AMLOFTUV to construct C2 surfaces from a set of curves that represents how a surface looks at regular intervals in the U and V directions. The quality of a surface is as good as the quality of your input wires and how they intersect in 3D space. Each set of wires defines the bounds and contours of the surface in its direction. Check, correct, and refine your input wires, if necessary, before creating a surface from them.

U and V wires

surface created

Valid input wires are lines, arcs, circles, ellipses, splines, augmented lines, or polylines.

208

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Ensure that the wires you enter are ■ ■ ■ ■

Orthogonal curves (each wire in the U set must cross every wire in the V set at approximate right angles) Consistently spaced (nearly parallel) within the U or V set Not crossing other members of the same set Not sharply inflected

NOTE To simplify selecting the sets of wires, enter f on the command line, and create a fence selection set. After you select the sets of wires, AMLOFTUV performs the following: ■ ■ ■

Aligns the wires so that all the U wires go in the same direction and all the V wires go in the same direction. Fits all input polylines smoothly, according to the settings of the AMPFITLEN, AMPFITANG, and AMPFITTOL system variables. Examines the intersection of each pair of U and V wires. The intersection of the two wires may be actual or apparent (not really intersecting in 3D space).

AMLOFTUV creates a surface that fits as tightly on the input objects as permitted by the gap tolerance. The smaller the gap tolerance, the greater the number of unacceptable gaps. Set the AMJOINGAP system variable, which represents the gap tolerance (gap = n), to the maximum acceptable distance between the U and V wires.

Toolbutton

Loft UV Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ LoftUV

Command

AMLOFTUV

Select U wires: Select a wire Select U wires: Select another wire Select U wires: Select another wire or press ENTER Select V wires: Select a wire Select V wires: Select another wire Select V wires: Select another wire or press ENTER If the maximum distance is less than or equal to AMJOINGAP, the surface is created.

AMLOFTUV

|

209

If the wires do not cross each other in 3D space, AMLOFTUV measures the distance between the wires and compares the value of the AMJOINGAP system variable with the maximum distance between the U and V wires at the apparent intersection. The following prompt is displayed: Warning - Gap exceeds tolerance (gap=n) Enter an option [eXit/Loft/Node check] :

Choose an option or press ENTER

Loft Averages the distance between the intersecting wires at each place where the distance exceeds zero, and creates the surface between them.

Node Check Reexamines the entire input wire set. Each time the gap between a pair of U and V lines exceeds the value stored in AMJOINGAP, an indicator appears at the node that needs adjusting. Warning - Gap exceeds tolerance (gap=n) Continue? [Yes/No] : Enter n to stop or press ENTER Look for a pattern. For example, one spline might be below all the others at almost every intersection.

Exit Ends the command so that you can check, correct, and refine your input wires. If the maximum distance seems too great, something may be wrong with the quality of the input wires.

Correcting and Refining Input Wires Use the following suggestions to check and refine your input wires: ■ ■

■

210

|

Chapter 1

To correct a surface with large deviations at the intersections, try presplining your input polylines with a loose tolerance to achieve smoothness. Search through the intersections of the U and V wires with the Node Check option of AMLOFTUV. Look for an inflection such as one spline that appears below all the others at frequent intersections. Correct the problem by moving the spline up by the average amount of the deviation at the intersection. Continue searching and correcting problem wires in this manner. Finally, re-create the surface. If the surface is still not satisfactory, loosen the system tolerance until you achieve the desired effect.

Commands

AMMAKEBASE Converts the active part into a static base feature

Use AMMAKEBASE to transform the active part into a base feature. Base features do not contain any of the information used to create them, such as dimensions, features, locations, primitives, and sizes. Use AMMAKEBASE to reduce the file size of the completed parts that you are certain will require no further modification, such as standard fittings, moldings, and castings. You can add new features to the static base feature at any time, but you cannot use AMEDITFEAT to modify it. Toolbutton

Make Base Feature

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ Make Base Part

Command

AMMAKEBASE

Warning - Drawing view information and ability to edit existing features will be lost. Select part to be made into a base or : Specify a part or press ENTER Base part created.

AMMANIPULATOR Dynamically rotates, copies, and moves parts along selected axes, or freely in 3D space

Use AMMANIPULATOR to dynamically rotate and move parts along selected X, Y, and Z axes, or freely in 3D space. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click, and choose 3D Manipulator.

Toolbutton

3D Manipulator

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ 3D Manipulator

Command

AMMANIPULATOR

Select objects: Specify a part Select objects: Specify another part, or press ENTER to continue [Middle handle is FREE MOVE, other handles are ROTATE and MOVE]<Exit>/ Undo/Mode[FOLLOW]/Select handle to manipulate. (Selecting no handle shows option dialog): Specify a handle, or select a point on screen to access options

AMMAKEBASE

|

211

Using Rotate/Move Handles Selecting a handle at the end of any axis of the 3D Manipulator icon allows you to rotate and move parts. To rotate a part, move your pointer about the axis of rotation. To move a part, move your pointer along the axis of the selected handle.

Rotating Parts ROTATE/MOVE handle selected; move cursor to define rotation/move axis: Specify a handle ROTATE mode, rotating around Y-axis (RETURN for options): Specify a point on screen to rotate the part, or press ENTER [Middle handle is FREE MOVE, other handles are ROTATE and MOVE]<Exit>/ Undo/Mode[FOLLOW]/Select handle to manipulate. (Selecting no handle shows option dialog): Choose an option, specify another handle, or press ENTER Exit Ends the command.

Undo Undoes the last operation. Mode Toggles between Follow mode and Free mode. Follow

The part follows the rotation or movement of the 3D Manipulator icon.

Free

The 3D Manipulator icon rotates, but the part remains stationary. This option provides more control over the rotation or movement of the part than Follow mode.

Rotate Dialog Box

Entities are Moved Specifies whether parts are moved.

212

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Angle Specifies the angle of rotation or the angle between copies. Copies Specifies the number of copies to create.

Moving Parts ROTATE/MOVE handle selected; move cursor to define rotation/move axis: MOVE mode, moving along Y-axis (RETURN for options): Specify a point along the axis of the selected handle, or press ENTER [Middle handle is FREE MOVE, other handles are ROTATE and MOVE]<Exit>/ Undo/Mode[FOLLOW]/Select handle to manipulate. (Selecting no handle shows option dialog): Choose an option, specify another handle, or press ENTER Exit Ends the command.

Undo Undoes the last operation. Mode Toggles between Follow mode and Free mode. Follow

The part follows the rotation or movement of the 3D Manipulator icon.

Free

The 3D Manipulator icon moves, but the part remains stationary. This option provides more control over the rotation or movement of the part than Follow mode.

Move Dialog Box

Entities are Moved Specifies whether parts are moved. Spacing Specifies the distance to move the part or the spacing between copies. Copies Specifies the number of copies to create.

AMMANIPULATOR

|

213

Using Free Move Handles Selecting the handle at the center of the 3D Manipulator icon allows you to respecify the location of the icon. In Follow mode, parts move relative to the new location of the 3D Manipulator. In Free mode, only the 3D Manipulator moves. FREE MOVE handle selected; move cursor in arbitrary direction: Specify a point on screen to move the 3D Manipulator [Middle handle is FREE MOVE, other handles are ROTATE and MOVE]<Exit>/ Undo/Mode[FREE]/Select handle to manipulate. (Selecting no handle shows option dialog): Choose an option, specify another handle, or press ENTER Exit Ends the command.

Undo Undoes the last operation. Mode Toggles between Follow mode and Free mode. Follow

The part follows the rotation or movement of the 3D Manipulator icon.

Free

The 3D Manipulator icon moves, but the part remains stationary. This option provides more control over the rotation or movement of the part than Follow mode.

Common Options Dialog Box

214

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Entities are Moved Specifies whether selected parts are moved.

Align Manipulator with Determines where the 3D Manipulator icon is located. Entity Aligns the 3D Manipulator icon with a selected part. Select object: Specify a part Face Aligns the 3D Manipulator icon with a selected face. Select face: Specify a face Choose the geometry you wish [Next]: Enter n to cycle through the available faces, or press ENTER UCS Aligns the 3D Manipulator icon and the part with the current UCS. WCS Aligns the 3D Manipulator icon and the part with the WCS. Only Align Axis Aligns the axis of the 3D Manipulator with the UCS, WCS, selected part, or face. Only Move Origin Moves the origin of the 3D Manipulator to the UCS, WCS, selected part, or face. Both Align Axis and Move Origin Aligns the axis and moves the origin of the 3D Manipulator to the UCS, WCS, selected part, or face. Copies Specifies the number of copies to create.

Center View on Manipulator Redraws the screen so that the 3D Manipulator is in the center of the view.

Default Position Returns the 3D Manipulator to its default position.

Settings Opens the Configuration dialog box.

AMMANIPULATOR

|

215

Configuration Dialog Box

Use Angle Snap Specifies whether angle snap is used when rotating parts.

Angle Specifies the angular increment used by angle snap.

Display Specifies display settings for the 3D Manipulator. Manipulator Size Factor Controls the size of the 3D Manipulator icon. Handle and Text Size Factor Controls the size of the handles and axes text on the 3D Manipulator icon. Autodisplay Controls how parts are displayed when manipulated. Options include None, Redraw, Shade, and Render.

Colors Specifies the colors used to display the 3D manipulator icon. You can control the color of the axes, the handles, and the text. Crosshair Color Specifies whether the 3D Manipulator uses the default crosshair color. When this option is cleared, you can set the colors to be used for the 3D Manipulator.

216

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMMATE Creates a mate constraint between two parts

Use AMMATE to create an assembly constraint between two parts defined by selecting points, axes, planes, or non-planar faces. AMMATE handles most constraint situations. The selection of the geometry determines which mate constraint to use.

Objects that can be selected include the following: ■ ■ ■ ■

Plane Axis Point Non-planar face (sphere, cone, cylinder, or torus)

NOTE You can create a mate constraint using any combination of these objects.

Plane Defined by selecting a part’s planar face, an arc, a work plane, two axis entities, a point and an axis, or three point entities.

two planes selected

mate plane/plane constraint

Axis Defined by selecting a line or a linear solid edge, an axis of an arc, a cylinder, cone, or torus, a work axis, or two point entities.

axis and plane selected

mate axis/plane constraint

AMMATE

|

217

Point Defined by selecting an end of a line, an end of a solid edge, the center of an arc, sphere, or torus, a work point, an AutoCAD point, or a near point of a selected surface edge.

axis and point selected

mate axis/point constraint

Non-planar Face Defined by selecting a face of a cylinder, cone, or sphere. These faces have a unique shape that can sometimes be used for establishing tangency.

non-planar faces selected

tangent mate constraint

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose 3D Constraints ➤ Mate.

Toolbutton

Mate

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ 3D Constraints ➤ Mate

Command

AMMATE

Select first set of geometry: Select the first part First set = Axis, (arc) Enter an option [Clear/fAce/Point/cYcle]: Choose an option or press ENTER Select second set of geometry: Select the second part Second set = Axis, (arc) Enter an option [Clear/fAce/Point/cYcle]: Choose an option or press ENTER Offset <0.0000>: Specify a value or press ENTER

218

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Clear Clears the current selection.

Face If an axis is selected, use this option to cycle to the closest face. The prompt changes so that you can respecify the axis or use the Next option to cycle to the next available face. First set = Plane [Clear/aXis/Point/Next/Flip/cYcle]:

Choose an option or press ENTER

Point Use this option to cycle to the nearest point. First set = Point, (arc) Select first set of geometry [Clear/aXis/fAce/cYcle]: Choose an option or press ENTER

Cycle Use this option to cycle to the next available object: a face, an axis, or a point.

Select First Set Specifies another piece of geometry to define a plane between that piece and the first selection. [Clear/Next/Flip/cYcle]:

Choose an option or press ENTER

Clear Clears the current selection. Next Highlights the next available object. Flip Flips the direction of the plane. Cycle Cycles to the next available object.

Select Second Set Specifies another piece of geometry to define a plane between that piece and the second selection. [Clear/Next/Flip/cYcle]:

Choose an option or press ENTER

AMMATE

|

219

Using the Animated Cursor The animated cursor can be used to automate the selection process when you are creating constraints.

Cycling When the cursor is displayed with rotational arrows, use the left mouse button to cycle through the available options. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

Flipping When the cursor is displayed with directional arrows, use the left mouse button to flip directions. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

NOTE By using the animated cursor, you can minimize your responses to the command prompts.

AMMIGRATEBB Converts data from previous Genius™ releases so that it can be used in Mechanical Desktop 4

Use AMMIGRATEBB to convert data from Genius drawings so that it can be used in Mechanical Desktop 4. Command

AMMIGRATEBB

AMMIRROR Generates a mirrored copy of a part

Use AMMIRROR to mirror a part about a line or a specified face. You can define the line by selecting existing points or by picking locations on screen. You can physically mirror the part or create a new mirrored part without removing the original definition. If you are working in the Part Modeling environment, and you choose to create a new part, Mechanical Desktop converts it to an unconsumed toolbody definition.

220

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ Mirror Part.

Toolbutton

Mirror Part

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ Mirror Part

Command

AMMIRROR

Select part to mirror: Select a part Select planar face to mirror about or [Line]:

Enter L or select a planar face

Select Planar Face Select an existing planar face as the mirror plane.

plane selected

part replaced

new part created

Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER Enter an option [Create new part/Replace instances] : Enter r or press ENTER

Line Specify a line by selecting existing geometry or by picking points on screen.

line specified

part replaced

new part created

Specify first point of mirror line: Specify a start point Specify second point: Specify an endpoint Enter an option [Create new part/Replace instances] : Enter r or press ENTER

AMMIRROR

|

221

Create New Part Creates a new part that is the mirror image of the selected part. Part Modeling Environment Enter new part name :

Specify a name or press ENTER

Assembly Modeling Environment Enter new part name : Specify a name or press ENTER

Replace Instances Mirrors the existing part.

AMMODDIM Modifies parametric dimensions on sketches and drawings

Use AMMODDIM to modify dimension values on the selected sketch or on the drawing. This command works with parametric dimensions (created in Model mode) but not reference dimensions (Drawing mode). Sketch dimensions are automatically updated. You can also use AMMODDIM to change parametric dimensions to numerical values or equations. An equation can include any dimension parameter on the part, to set up relationships between dimensions. Equations can also include global parameters. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Dimensioning ➤ Edit Dimension.

Toolbutton

Edit Dimension

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Dimensioning ➤ Edit Dimension

Command

AMMODDIM

Select dimension to change: Select a dimension (1) New value for dimension <2.5>: Specify a value Select dimension to change: Select another dimension or press ENTER 1

222

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMMODE Controls whether Model or Drawing mode is in effect

Use AMMODE to control Model and Drawing mode. Selecting the Model or Scene tab in the Desktop Browser activates Model mode. Selecting the Drawing tab activates Drawing mode. Choosing the Part, Assembly, or Scene toolbutton on the Desktop Tools toolbar activates Model mode. Choosing the Drawing Layout toolbutton activates Drawing mode. Browser

Select the Model, Scene, or Drawing tab.

Toolbutton

Select the appropriate toolbutton from the Desktop Tools toolbar.

Command

AMMODE

NOTE If you use the Browser, toolbutton, or menu method to switch modes, AMMODE functions automatically unless you have disabled Synchronize

Browser/Toolbars with Modes in the Desktop Options dialog box.

Switching to Model Mode If you are in Drawing mode, the following prompt is displayed: Restore mode [Drawing/Model] <Model>:

Press ENTER to switch to Model mode

Switching to Drawing Mode If you are in Model mode, the following prompt is displayed: Restore mode [Drawing/Model] : Press ENTER to switch to Drawing mode

AMMODE

|

223

AMMOVEDIM Controls location of dimensions in Drawing mode

Use AMMOVEDIM in Drawing mode to move dimensions on the drawing while maintaining their association to the drawing view geometry. You can reattach dimensions to silhouette edges (the point at which a curved surface turns away from the viewer) or to different vertices in a view. Parametric dimensions are placed in the drawing view when it is created. Use AMMOVEDIM to move parametric and reference dimensions within the view

or between views, to more clearly annotate your design. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Dimensions ➤ Move Dimension.

Toolbutton

Move Dimension

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Edit Dimensions ➤ Move Dimension

Command

AMMOVEDIM

Enter option [Flip/Reattach/Move] <Move>: Choose an option

Move Moves dimensions on a drawing view to a selected location. Maintains association with the drawing view geometry. Select dimension: Select a dimension Location for dimension: Specify a new location Location for dimension: Specify a different location or press ENTER Select dimension: Select another dimension or press ENTER

Flip Flips dimension text. When a dimension is created, if the text is too large to fit between the extension lines it is placed outside them, on one side or the other. This option flips the text to the opposite side of its default placement. Select dimension: Select a dimension Select dimension: Select another dimension or press ENTER

224

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Reattach Connects a dimension extension line to a point on a part after the part has been moved. You can also use this option to move a dimension extension line and reattach it to another point, to eliminate overlaps of dimensions on the edges of the part. Select extension line: Select an extension line Select attachment point: Specify the point to be attached to the extension line Select extension line: Select another extension line or press ENTER

AMMOVEVIEW Moves a drawing view in Drawing mode

Use AMMOVEVIEW in Drawing mode to move a drawing view to another location in the drawing or to another layout. Annotations move with the drawing view. The following restrictions apply: ■ ■ ■

An orthogonal view must remain aligned with its parent view. An auxiliary view must remain aligned with the edge of the plane selected from the parent view. Moving a parent view also moves all dependent views.

Browser

In the Drawing tab, right-click a view icon and choose Move.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Move View.

Toolbutton

Move View

Desktop Menu

Drawing ➤ Move View

Command

AMMOVEVIEW

Select view to move: Specify a point in the view View location: Specify a new location View location: Specify another location or press ENTER In the Browser method, the prompt to select a view is not displayed.

AMMOVEVIEW

|

225

AMNEW Converts a 3D solid into a part, and creates new part definitions, part instances, subassemblies, and scenes

Use AMNEW to convert a 3D solid into a part or to create new part definitions, part instances, subassemblies, or scenes in your drawing.

The Part Modeling Environment In the Part Modeling environment, use AMNEW to convert a 3D solid to a part, create a new part definition, or create another instance of an existing toolbody. If a grounded base part already exists in the drawing, use AMNEW to create toolbody definitions.

Converting a 3D Solid Toolbutton

New Part

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ Convert Solid

Command

AMNEW

Enter an option [Instance/Part] <Part>: Press ENTER Select an object or enter new part name : Select a solid to convert

Creating a Part Definition Browser

In the Model tab, right-click the background and choose New Part/Toolbody.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ New Part.

Toolbutton

New Part

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ New Part

Command

AMNEW

Enter an option [Instance/Part] <Part>: Press ENTER Select an object or enter new part name : Specify a name or press ENTER

226

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Creating an Instance of a Part Browser

Right-click a part icon and choose Copy.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ Instance.

Toolbutton

Instance

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ Instance

Command

AMNEW

Enter an option [Instance/Part] <Part>: Enter i Select part to instance or [?] : Specify a name or press ENTER Select insertion point: Specify a location for the copy Select insertion point: Specify a location for another copy, or press ENTER

Creating an Instance of a Toolbody Browser

Right-click a toolbody icon and choose Copy.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Toolbody ➤ Instance.

Toolbutton

Instance

Desktop Menu

Toolbody ➤ Toolbody ➤ Instance

Command

AMNEW

Enter an option [Instance/Part] <Part>: Enter i Select part to instance or [?] : Specify a name or press ENTER Select insertion point: Specify a location for the copy Select insertion point: Specify a location for another copy, or press ENTER

The Assembly Modeling Environment In the Assembly Modeling environment, use AMNEW to convert a 3D solid to a part or to create a new part or subassembly definition, a copy of a part, or a new scene.

Converting a 3D Solid Toolbutton

New Part

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ Convert Solid

Command

AMNEW

Enter an option [Instance/Part/Scene/subAssembly] : Enter p Select an object or enter new part name : Select a solid to convert

AMNEW

|

227

Creating a Part Definition Browser

In the Model tab, right-click the background and choose New Part.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ New Part.

Toolbutton

New Part

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ New Part

Command

AMNEW

Enter an option [Instance/Part/Scene/subAssembly] : Enter p Select an object or enter new part name : Specify a name or press ENTER

Creating a New Part Instance Browser

Right-click a part icon and choose Copy.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ Instance.

Toolbutton

Instance

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ Instance

Command

AMNEW

Enter an option [Instance/Part/Scene/subAssembly] : Press ENTER Select part to instance or [?] : Specify a part or press ENTER Select insertion point: Specify a location for the copy Select insertion point: Specify a location for another copy, or press ENTER

Creating a New Scene Browser

In the Scene tab, right-click the background and choose New Scene.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose New Scene.

Toolbutton

New Scene

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Scene ➤ New Scene

Command

AMNEW

Create a new [Instance/Part/Scene/subAssembly] : Enter s Enter scene name to activate or [?] <SCENE1>: Specify a name or press ENTER

228

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Creating a New Subassembly Browser

In the Model tab, right-click the background and choose New ➤ New Assembly.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Assembly ➤ New Subassembly.

Toolbutton

New Subassembly

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ New Subassembly

Command

AMNEW

Create a new [Instance/Part/Scene/subAssembly] : Enter a Enter new subassembly name <SUB1>: Specify a name or press ENTER

AMNOTE Attaches an associative note to holes, undercuts, and parts in Drawing mode

Use AMNOTE to attach an associative note to holes, undercuts, and parts in Drawing mode. Command

AMNOTE

Select object to attach: Specify a part Select objects: Specify another part or press ENTER

Note Symbol Dialog Box

Orientation Defines whether the note is oriented to the left or to the right.

AMNOTE

|

229

Landing Controls whether the leader line is extended to underline the note.

Attach Attaches new information to an existing note. Select object to attach: Specify an existing note

Edit MText Opens the MText Editor where you can modify the properties of the text.

Leader Style Pressing this button allows you to choose a style for the note leader.

Symbol Standards Pressing this button opens the Standard Properties dialog box for the international drafting standard you are currently using.

AMOFFSET3D Creates copies of 3D polylines that are set off from the original

Use AMOFFSET3D to create a new 3D polyline, located a specified distance from an existing 3D polyline, or through a specified point. The new 3D polyline is offset normal to the original, relative to the current view. The position of the offset is not related to the current UCS. The offset is 3-dimensional, because the depth values of each point in the 3D polyline are maintained.

230

|

Toolbutton

Offset Wire

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Offset Wire

Command

AMOFFSET3D

Chapter 1

Commands

Specify offset distance or [Through] : Specify a distance or press ENTER Select 3D polyline to offset or <exit>: Select a 3D polyline Specify point on side to offset: Specify a point for the side to offset Select 3D polyline to offset or <exit>: Select another 3D polyline or press ENTER

Offset Distance Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object.

Through Creates an offset from a 3D polyline that passes through a specified point.

AMOFFSETSF Creates a surface offset from a selected surface

Use AMOFFSETSF to create a copy of a surface an equal distance at every point from the original surface. Entering a positive distance creates the new surface in the same direction as the surface normal of the original surface. Entering a negative distance creates the new surface in the opposite direction from the surface normal of the original surface. Self-intersecting surfaces can be created if you ■ ■

Enter negative offset distances from a primitive surface Enter offset distances greater than the curvature of the original surface

Toolbutton

Offset Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Offset

Command

AMOFFSETSF

Select surfaces to offset: Select a surface Select surfaces to offset: Select another surface or press ENTER Enter offset distance <1.0000>: Specify a value

AMOFFSETSF

|

231

AMOPTIONS Manages part, assembly, surface, scene, drawing, and desktop preferences from a single dialog box

Use AMOPTIONS to set preferences for your parts, assemblies, scenes, drawing views, and desktop. Browser

In the Model, Scene or Drawing tab, click the Options button.

Toolbutton

Options

Desktop Menu

Assist ➤ Desktop Options

Command

AMOPTIONS

Desktop Options Dialog Box The Desktop Options dialog box controls settings for parts, assemblies, surfaces, scenes, drawings, annotations, and your desktop.

Desktop Tab

232

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Browser Specifies the settings for the Desktop Browser. Synchronize Browser with Modes Switches Browser tabs when modes are changed. Synchronize Toolbars with Modes Switches toolbars when Browser tabs are selected. Browser Font Controls the style and size of the font used by the Browser. Opens the Font dialog box. See “AMBROWSERFONT” on page 79.

File Safety Precautions Controls the auditing and saving of drawing files. Desktop Audit Control Controls when drawing audits are performed on Mechanical Desktop drawing files. Always

Performs an audit and correction on any Mechanical Desktop drawing file that is opened, attached, or inserted.

On Attach and Insert

Performs an audit and correction on any Mechanical Desktop drawing file that is attached or inserted into the current drawing file.

Never

Disables auditing of Mechanical Desktop drawing files.

AutoSAVE Edited External Files Specifies that when an AutoSAVE is performed on the current drawing, externally referenced files are also saved.

Dialog Controls Opens the Dialog Controls dialog box, where you control settings for recent values and spinner controls.

Drawing Units Opens the Drawing Units dialog box, where you control the type of units and angular measure for the drawing.

Show Messages Opens the Show Messages dialog box, where you control whether Message dialog boxes appear when you edit external files or open files with bills of materials and balloons from earlier releases.

AMOPTIONS

|

233

Object Selection Controls the display of dynamic highlighting and feature tips.

Desktop Symbol Size Specifies the size of the constraint, DOF, and axis symbols.

Edit Fade Intensity Specifies the size of the DOF, axis, and COG symbols.

AutoUCS View Alignment Controls whether each viewport has a unique UCS.

Part Tab

Sketch Setting Specifies the way sketches are handled when they are analyzed and constrained.

234

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Apply Constraint Rules Applies constraint sizes, such as pickbox size and angular tolerance, to a sketch. Assume Rough Sketch Applies horizontal and vertical constraints to a sketch. Angular Tolerance Sets the tolerance of a line assumed to be horizontal or vertical. If the angle is greater than this setting, the line is not forced horizontally or vertically. Apply to Linetype Selects the linetype to apply constraints to. Any object drawn with a different linetype is ignored, when the sketch is constrained.

NOTE Linetype names must be capitalized, or you receive an error message. Tolerance/Pickbox Size Opens the Pickbox Size dialog box. The pickbox size is used to determine whether unjoined objects are joined when constraints are added. Constraint Size Opens the Constraint Display Size dialog box, which controls the display size of 2D constraints that are added to a sketch when it is solved. Use AMSHOWCON, AMADDCON, or AMDELCON to view the constraints.

Naming Prefixes Specifies the prefix that is added to the name of a new part or toolbody when it is created. Double-click the appropriate field to specify a name.

Suppressed Dimensions and DOFs Specifies the color applied to suppressed dimensions and degrees of freedom symbols. Color Opens the AutoCAD Select Color dialog box. See the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more information about changing colors.

Saved File Format Reduces the file size when the drawing is saved.

AMOPTIONS

|

235

Assembly Tab

Automatic Updates assembly views, assemblies, or scenes after changes have been made. View Restore with Assembly Activation Restores the view associated with an assembly when the assembly is activated. Update Assembly as Constrained Updates an assembly when constraints are added or changed. Update External Assembly Constraints Updates assembly constraints in external files if the external files have been modified.

Naming Prefix Specifies the prefix that is added to the name of a new subassembly when it is created. Double-click the field to specify a name.

Attach and Insert Parts Specifies that parts are attached and inserted according to their center of geometry or absolute insertion point.

236

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Scene Tab

Existing Scenes Locks all part positions when a suppressed feature is encountered in an existing scene.

Naming Prefix Specifies the prefix that is added to the name of a new scene when it is created. Double-click the field to specify a name.

Automatic Automatically updates a scene when modifications are made.

AMOPTIONS

|

237

Surfaces Tab

Tolerances Sets tolerances to apply when a surface is created. System Tolerance Specifies the perpendicular distance between surface-derived polylines and an ideal NURBS spline or surface. Polyline Fit Tolerance Specifies a value for making an optimal fit of a spline or surface to a polyline. Join Gap Tolerance Specifies the maximum distance to join wires. Blend Tolerance Specifies the approximate width of blends when you are joining surfaces or splines to avoid C0 breaks.

Surface/Spline Options Sets polyline fit tolerances. Polyline Fit Opens the Polyline Fit dialog box.

238

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Polyline Fit Length Specifies a value for finding flat polyline segments. New splines and surfaces created from polylines lie flat against any polyline segment of a length that is greater than this value. Polyline Fit Angle Specifies a value for finding sharp corners in polylines. New splines and surfaces are split into separate objects at any angle that is less than this value.

Model Size Opens the Approximate Model Size dialog box.

Surface Properties Sets the properties of surface display lines. U & V Display Mode Applies linetypes AMULTYPE and AMVLTYPE to U and V surface display lines. U Display Wires Specifies the number of display lines on a surface in the U direction. V Display Wires Specifies the number of display lines on a surface in the V direction. Normal Length Specifies the length of the surface normal.

Augmented Line Properties Control the properties of augmented lines. Vector Length Specifies the length of vectors on augmentation lines.

Page Length Sets the number of text lines to be sent to the text window before the screen pauses.

Group Prefix Sets the default prefix for surfaces.

Keep Original Retains original settings.

AMOPTIONS

|

239

Drawings Tab

Suppress Suppresses calculations to speed up working in Drawing mode. Hidden Line Calculations Specifies suppression of hidden lines calculations in all views when you enter Drawing mode. View Updates Specifies suppression of updating associated geometry in all views when you enter Drawing mode. Drawing View Borders Hides drawing view borders.

240

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Hatch Pattern Controls the settings for hatch patterns created in drawing views. Default Hatch Pattern Opens the Hatch Patterns dialog box. One Layer for Hatch Patterns Specifies that all hatch patterns are placed on the same layer. Display Hatch in Iso Views Specifies that the hatch is displayed in isometric views. Hide Obscured Hatch Specifies that the obscured hatch is hidden.

Use Part Color for Sets the color of the part to be used for geometry in the drawing views. Visible Edges Specifies that the visible edges in drawing views match the color of the part. Hidden Edges Specifies that the hidden edges in drawing views match the color of the part. Hatch Specifies that the hatch patterns in drawing views match the color of the part.

Projection Type Sets the type of projection to use when you are creating drawing views. Third Angle Arranges drawing views to correspond with third-angle projection. First Angle Arranges drawing views to correspond with first-angle projection.

Layer/Object Settings Opens the Layer/Object Settings dialog box.

AMOPTIONS

|

241

Annotation Tab

Parametric Dimension Display Controls the display of parametric dimensions in Drawing mode. Active Part Specifies the display of parametric dimensions for the active part in drawing views. Scenes, Groups, Selected Objects Specifies the display of parametric dimensions for scenes, groups, and selected objects. Section Views Specifies the display of parametric dimensions in section views. Hide Zero Length Parametric Dimensions Specifies the display of zero-length parametric dimensions in drawing views. Automatically Arrange in Views Specifies that parametric dimensions are automatically arranged when a drawing view is created. On External Parts as Reference Dims Specifies that parametric dimensions of external parts are displayed as reference dimensions in drawing views.

242

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Drafting Standards Opens the Drafting Standards dialog box, where you apply drafting standards to tapped holes and to section and detail views.

Centerline Settings Opens the Centerlines dialog box, where you control how centerlines and centermarks appear in drawing views.

Display Tapped Holes Specifies how tapped holes are displayed in drawing views.

Save Orphaned Annotations in Group Saves orphaned annotations in a group named AM_ORPHAN, instead of removing them.

Dialog Controls Dialog Box

Preset Values Controls the preset values defined in dialog boxes. Distance Controls the default value for distances. Angle Controls the default value for angles. Draft Angle Controls the default value for draft angles.

AMOPTIONS

|

243

New Opens the New Preset Value dialog box, where you can define a new preset value.

Delete Deletes a selected preset value. Move Up Moves a selected preset value upward in the list. Move Down Moves a selected preset value downward in the list. Sort Sorts the preset values alphabetically.

Recent Values Controls the recent preset values.

Spinner Control Increments Sets values for spinner controls. Angle Specifies the angular increments used by spinner controls. Distance Specifies the linear increments used by spinner controls.

Apply & Close Applies settings and closes the dialog box.

244

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Drawing Units Dialog Box

Length Controls the type and precision of linear units.

Angle Controls the type, precision, and direction of angular units.

Drawing Units for DesignCenter Blocks Controls the scale used for DesignCenter blocks that are inserted into the drawing.

Sample Output Displays the way your units appear in the drawing.

Direction Opens the Direction Control dialog box, where you define the direction of the base angle.

OK Closes the Drawing Units dialog box.

AMOPTIONS

|

245

Direction Control Dialog Box Controls the direction of the base angle used when drawing objects. The default is East which corresponds to 0 degrees. You may change it to any quadrant, or specify an angle by selecting two points on screen.

Show Messages Dialog Box

External File Editing Controls the display of Show Messages dialog boxes while you are editing externally referenced files.

File Saving/Maintenance Controls the display of Show Messages dialog boxes while you are opening and saving files.

246

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Tolerance/Pickbox Size Dialog Box

When considering unjoined objects in a sketch, use the slider to control the size of the pickbox used by Mechanical Desktop. If the endpoints of the objects do not lie inside the pickbox, the objects will not be joined.

Constraint Display Size Dialog Box

Use the slider to control the size at which 2D constraints are displayed.

Polyline Fit Dialog Box

Length Prompt Measures the length of a given segment in a polyline. Use this option to determine which part of the polyline is the shortest.

AMOPTIONS

|

247

If Length is Longer than Sets the AMPFITLEN system variable. The current value of AMPFITLEN is based on the portion of the polyline you specified for the Length prompt.

Fit Tolerance Displays and specifies a tolerance for fitting a spline through the input polyline with the least squares approximation method.

Angle Prompt Measures the angle between two segments in the polyline. Select an angle that defines the smallest variation in direction allowed before a sharp corner is created.

If Angle is Less than Sets the AMPFITANG system variable, which holds sharp corners of the polyline in the resultant spline, if the angle of the corner is less than the value you specify.

Approximate Model Size Dialog Box

Model Size Specifies the model size.

Units Specifies the units of measure.

Measure Model Measures the model automatically, using the current drawing units.

248

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Hatch Patterns Dialog Box

Pattern Type Specifies the type of hatch to use for section views. Cycle through the available patterns, by clicking the image tile, or select a type from the drop-down list. Valid types include Predefined, User-defined, and Custom.

Hatch Style Specifies the way hatch is applied. Cycle through the available styles, by clicking the image tile, or select a style from the drop-down list.

Pattern Properties Specifies the properties of the selected hatch pattern. ISO Pen Width Specifies the ISO pen width to apply to the hatch pattern.

AMOPTIONS

|

249

Pattern Specifies the hatch pattern to use. Custom Pattern Specifies the custom hatch pattern to use. Scale Specifies the hatch pattern scale factor. Angle Specifies the angle to apply to the hatch pattern. Spacing Specifies the spacing to apply to user-defined hatch patterns. Double Specifies whether to double user-defined hatch patterns. Exploded Specifies whether to explode the hatch pattern.

Layer/Object Settings Dialog Box Controls the properties of prototype drawing layers and objects.

Use Automatic Property Management Specifies whether the prototype properties are used when drawing objects are created.

Based on Standard Specifies the standard to use for prototype objects.

Filter Specifies the filter to use when applying prototype properties.

Color/Lineweight Mapping Opens the Color/Lineweight Mapping dialog box.

250

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Layers Tab Controls the settings for prototype layers in Drawing mode.

Objects Tab Controls the settings for prototype objects in Drawing mode.

AMOPTIONS

|

251

Color/Lineweight Mapping Dialog Box Controls the lineweight mapping of prototype colors for layers and objects in Drawing mode.

New Opens the AutoCAD Select Color dialog box. Delete Deletes a color/lineweight setting. Apply Applies the settings to colors and lineweights.

Drafting Standards Dialog Box

252

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Tapped Holes Specifies the drafting standard to apply to tapped holes. Display Vanish Controls whether a vanish is applied to ANSI tapped holes. Thread Thickness Controls the thread thickness of DIN or ISO tapped holes.

Detail Views Specifies the drafting standard to apply to detail views. Detail Symbol Displays the default detail symbol, if any. Detail Label Displays the default detail label, if any.

Section Views Specifies the drafting standard to apply to section views. Section Symbol Displays the default section symbol, if any. Section Label Displays the default section label, if any.

Centerlines Dialog Box

AMOPTIONS

|

253

Parametric Sizing of Extension Lines Sizes the extension lines of centermarks parametrically.

Centermark Specifies the size of the centermark.

Gap Specifies the gap between the centermark and the extension lines.

Overshoot Specifies the distance that centermark extension lines overshoot the circular edge.

Automatic Centerlines Specifies that centerlines are automatically placed when a view containing holes, fillets, or circular edges is created. Apply to Viewtypes Specifies that automatic centerlines are created for selected views.

AMPARDIM Creates parametric dimensions in Model mode

Use AMPARDIM in Model mode to create parametric dimensions to constrain sketches and define features. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Dimensioning ➤ New Dimension.

Toolbutton

New Dimension

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Dimensioning ➤ New Dimension

Command

AMPARDIM

Select first object: Select the first object Select second object or place dimension: Select a second object or specify a point Enter dimension value or [Undo/Hor/Ver/Align/Par/aNgle/Ord/Diameter/pLace] <3.0634>: Choose an option, or specify a value, and press ENTER Solved underconstrained sketch requiring n dimensions or constraints. Select first object: Select another object or press ENTER

254

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Enter Dimension Value Specifies the value of the dimension.

Undo Undoes the current selection and returns to the first prompt.

Hor Forces a horizontal dimension.

Ver Forces a vertical dimension.

Align Forces an aligned dimension.

Par Forces a parallel dimension. You must select two objects for this option.

Angle Forces an angular dimension.

Ord Forces an ordinate dimension.

Diameter Forces a diameter dimension.

Place Respecifies the location for the dimension. Placement point: Placement point:

Specify a location Specify another location or press ENTER

AMPARDIM

|

255

AMPARTEDGE Creates a line or an arc on a selected edge to use in a new profile

Use AMPARTEDGE to create a line or an arc on a selected edge that can be used in a new sketch. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ Copy Edge.

Toolbutton

Copy Edge

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Copy Edge

Command

AMPARTEDGE

Enter an option [Face/select Edge] <select Edge>: Enter f to select a face, specify a part edge, or press ENTER

Select Edge Creates a line or an arc on selected edges. Select edge to copy: Select edge to copy:

Select an edge Select another edge or press ENTER

edge copied

Face Creates lines and arcs on all edges of a selected face. Select face edge: Select the edge of a face Next/: Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER

face copied

256

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMPARTLINE Creates a 3D polyline on the profile of the surface in the current view

Use AMPARTLINE to create a 3D polyline that represents a parting line on an existing surface. The parting line shows where to cut the surface. AMPARTLINE does not produce surface edges as output. The individual 3D polyline, created by AMPARTLINE for each surface, lies on all the surfaces intersected by the parting line. Parting lines are used in the mold and tool design industry to create a plane of separation of two halves that make a mold. Toolbutton

Parting Line

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Wireframe ➤ Parting Line

Command

AMPARTLINE

Select surfaces to define parting lines: Select a surface Select surfaces to define parting lines: Select another surface or press ENTER Specify start point or [Viewdir/Wire/X/Y/Z]: Choose an option, or specify a start point (1)

NOTE Use the direction prompt to choose a view direction for generating the parting line. The most commonly used option is View Direction.

Start Point Specifies a starting point for generating a parting line. The parting line is created perpendicular to the view direction at the edge where the surface curves away and is obscured from the view. Specify end point: Specify an endpoint (2)

2

1 view direction defined

parting line created

AMPARTLINE

|

257

Viewdir Specifies the current view for creation of the parting line.

view defined

parting line created

Wire Specifies a wire to define the view direction. The wire is projected onto the surface to determine the parting line. Select wire to define direction: Specify a wire

wire selected

parting line created

X/Y/Z Specifies the X, Y, or Z axis of the current UCS, to define the view direction.

AMPARTLIST Creates and places a parts list in a drawing

Use AMPARTLIST to place a list of parts in a drawing. The parts list uses the number of columns specified in the Symbol Standards settings, as well as the information assigned to the part references created by the bill of materials (BOM) database. Changes to any setting, or to any information in the database, are automatically reflected in the parts list.

258

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Browser

In the Drawing tab, right-click a layout icon and choose Parts List ➤ Parts List.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Parts List ➤ Parts List.

Toolbutton

Place Parts List

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Parts List ➤ Parts List

Command

AMPARTLIST

Part list name <Parts List>: Specify a name or press ENTER Select type of Parts List: [All/Parts/Range/Sheet/View] : Choose an option or press ENTER to continue Specify location or ENTER to Left direction: Specify a location or press ENTER

All Selects all part references in the drawing.

all parts included

Parts Select part references for the parts to include. Select type of Parts List: [All/Parts/Range/Sheet/View] : Select objects: Select a part reference Select objects: Select a part reference or press ENTER

part references selected

Enter p

parts list created

AMPARTLIST

|

259

Range Specify the range of rows in the BOM database to include. Select type of Parts List: [All/Parts/Range/Sheet/View] : Starting Row <1>: Enter the start row Ending Row <4>: Enter the end row

Enter r

range specified

Sheet Creates an empty parts list sheet in the drawing. Use this sheet to add nonparametric information to your drawing.

View Specify the drawing view for the parts list. Only parts in the selected view are included in the parts list. Select type of Parts List: [All/Parts/Range/Sheet/View] : Select drawing view: Specify the drawing view

view specified

260

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Enter v

AMPARTPROP Lists the mass properties of the active part

Use AMPARTPROP to list the mass properties of the active part. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ Mass Properties.

Toolbutton

Mass Properties

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ Mass Properties

Command

AMPARTPROP

Part Mass Properties Dialog Box

Density Specifies the density of the material of the part. Enter a value in this field and press APPLY for the mass properties to be recalculated. Units are based on the current drawing units. For example, if you are working in inches, the volume is represented in cubic inches and the surface area in square inches.

File Opens the Save As dialog box.

AMPARTPROP

|

261

Save As Dialog Box

Save in Specifies the folder for the new file.

File Name Specifies the file name of the new file.

Save as Type Specifies the file extension type for the new file.

Open as Read-Only Specifies the file as a read-only file.

AMPARTREF Creates a reference to a part

Use AMPARTREF to add attribute values to ■ ■

Non-parametric geometry A point in the drawing

A part reference block is created. You add information to the part reference so that it appears in the bill of material (BOM) database and can be used to create balloons and parts lists. To assign a part reference to non-parametric geometry, use BLOCK to create a block reference containing the geometry, and then insert the block into your drawing. Use AMPARTREF to assign attributes to the block.

262

|

Chapter 1

Commands

To assign a part reference to a location in your drawing, select a point, and assign attributes to the part reference that is created. Browser

In the Drawing tab, right-click a layout icon, and choose Parts List ➤ Place Part Reference.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Parts List ➤ Place Part Reference.

Toolbutton

Place Part Reference

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Parts List ➤ Place Part Reference

Command

AMPARTREF

Select point [Block/Copy/Reference]: Choose an option, or specify a point to place the part reference

Block Select a block reference, and enter values in the Part Ref Attributes dialog box.

Copy Select a part reference to copy attributes from, and enter values in the Part Ref Attributes dialog box. A new part reference is created.

Select Point Specify a point in the drawing, and enter values in the Part Ref Attributes dialog box.

Part Ref Attributes Dialog Box

Part No. Double-click the white field to enter a part number.

AMPARTREF

|

263

Material Double-click the white field to enter material information.

Vendor Double-click the white field to enter vendor information.

Mass Double-click the white field to enter the mass.

Note Double-click the white field to enter a note.

Reference Quantity Double-click the white field to enter the number of items to reference.

Sources Opens the Select Source of Data dialog box. This option is available only when you are editing a part reference. See “AMPARTREFEDIT.”

AMPARTREFEDIT Edits data associated with a part reference

Use AMPARTREFEDIT to edit attribute information for individual part references in your drawing. Changes made to the part reference information are automatically updated in the BOM database; they are reflected in balloons and parts lists in your drawing. Browser

In the Drawing tab, right-click a layout icon, and choose Parts List ➤ Part Reference Edit.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Parts List ➤ Part Reference Edit.

Toolbutton

Part Reference Edit

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Parts List ➤ Part Reference Edit

Command

AMPARTREFEDIT

Select pick object: Select a part reference Next/: Enter n to cycle to the next part reference, or press ENTER

264

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Part Ref Attributes Dialog Box

Part No. Double-click the white field to edit the part number.

Material Double-click the white field to edit the material information.

Vendor Double-click the white field to edit the vendor information.

Mass Double-click the white field to edit the mass.

Note Double-click the white field to edit the note.

Reference Quantity Double-click the white field to edit the number of items to reference.

Sources Opens the Select Source of Data dialog box.

AMPARTREFEDIT

|

265

Select Source of Data Dialog Box

The Select Source of Data dialog box displays information about the part references contained in the current BOM database. Click the plus sign in front of any entry to view the information for that entry.

Merge Merges the selected information into the current part reference. Use this option to merge data from one BOM database to another.

AMPARTSPLIT Splits the active part into two parts about a work plane or planar face

Use AMPARTSPLIT in the Part/Assembly environment to split a part into two individual parts. Use a work plane, a planar face, or a split line to define the location for the split. Specify which side of the split becomes the new part, and give it a name.

work plane selected

part split at plane

Draft can be applied to the faces of both parts, but the part split feature cannot be modified after it is created.

266

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed Features ➤ Part Split.

Toolbutton

Part Split

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Part Split

Command

AMPARTSPLIT

Select planar face, work plane, or split line for split: Select a planar face, a work plane, or a split line Define side for new part: [Accept/Flip] : Enter f to flip the direction arrow toward the new part, or press ENTER Enter name of the new part : Enter a new part name or press ENTER

AMPATTERNDEF Sets hatching pattern attributes for part definitions

Use AMPATTERNDEF in Model mode to assign a hatch pattern to a part definition, to be used when it is sectioned in a drawing. Hatch patterns help identify parts in an assembly drawing. Toolbutton

Hatch Pattern

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ Hatch Patterns

Command

AMPATTERNDEF

Hatch Pattern Dialog Box

AMPATTERNDEF

|

267

Parts/Subassemblies Lists the part and subassembly definitions in the current drawing.

Pattern Type Specifies predefined, user-defined, or custom hatch patterns. Click the image tile to cycle through the available predefined patterns.

Pattern Properties Specifies the properties to assign to the selected hatch pattern. ISO Pen Width Specifies ISO-related pattern scaling, based on the selected pen width. Pattern Lists the available predefined hatch patterns. Custom Pattern Specifies a custom hatch pattern name. Scale Sets the size of the hatch pattern. Angle Sets the angle and spacing of the hatch pattern. Spacing Sets the spacing of a user-defined hatch pattern. Double Creates a double hatch pattern image, if a user-defined hatch pattern is specified. Exploded Creates an exploded hatch pattern image.

NOTE See the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more information about creating hatch patterns.

268

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMPLANE Creates one or more planar surfaces

Use AMPLANE to create a planar surface from either two points in space or a closed object. You can create the planar surface on the current UCS or on another plane without changing the current viewport to that plane. Complex models often have many flat, irregular boundaries that can be surfaced easily with AMPLANE. Toolbutton

Planar Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Planar

Command

AMPLANE

Specify first corner or [Plane/Wires]: Choose an option, or specify the first corner (1)

First Corner Creates a planar surface relative to the current UCS when you specify two points that are diagonal corners of a rectangle. Specify second corner: Specify the second corner (2)

1

2

Plane Defines a plane other than that of the current UCS and creates a planar face using the First Corner option. Specify first plane location or [Last/View/Wire/Xy/Yz/zAxis/Zx]: Choose an option, or specify the first point First Plane Location Defines a plane by specifying three points, and creates a planar face using the First Corner option. Select second plane location: Specify a second point Select third plane location: Specify a third point Last Uses the last defined plane for the planar face.

AMPLANE

|

269

View Uses the current view as the plane. Wire Uses an existing wire to define the plane. Valid wires are circles, arcs, and ellipses. The origin of the new plane is at the center point of the wire, and the plane is oriented to the wire. Select an arc, circle or ellipse: Select a wire Xy Uses the XY axes of the current UCS to define the plane. Specify point on XY plane: Specify a point for the origin of the new plane Yz Uses the YZ axes of the current UCS to define the plane. Specify point on YZ plane:

Specify a point for the origin of the new plane

Z Axis Defines a plane using an origin point and a point on the Z axis of the new plane. Specify point on plane: Specify an origin point Specify point on Z-axis (normal) of the plane: Specify a point defining the Z axis Zx Uses the ZX axes of the current UCS to define the plane. Specify point on ZX plane:

Specify a point for the origin of the new plane

Wires Creates one or more trimmed, planar surfaces from a selected wire or a set of selected wires. Valid wire input includes arcs, circles, ellipses, lines, polylines, and splines. Each selected wire must be planar and closed. Select wires: Select wires:

Select a closed wire (1) Select another closed wire or press ENTER

If you select a single object, AMPLANE creates a trimmed planar surface.

1

270

|

Chapter 1

Commands

If you select multiple objects, AMPLANE creates one or more trimmed planar surfaces, based on the boundaries of the selected objects.

AMPOWERDIM Creates dimensions in Model mode and Drawing mode

Use AMPOWERDIM to create dimensions in Model mode and Drawing mode. Power dimensions are parametric and can have tolerances and fit symbols applied to them.

Power Dimensioning in Model Mode Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Dimensioning ➤ Power Dimensioning.

Toolbutton

Power Dimensioning

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Dimensioning ➤ Power Dimensioning

Command

AMPOWERDIM

(SINGLE) First extension line origin or [Angular/Options/Baseline/Chain/Update] <Select>: Choose an option or specify the origin of the first extension line

First Extension Line Origin Determines the origin of the first extension line of the dimension. Second extension line origin: Specify the origin of the second extension line Place dimension line [Options/Pickobj] : Choose an option or specify a location for the dimension

Angular Creates an angular dimension. (SINGLE) Select arc, circle, line, or RETURN [Linear/Options/Baseline/Chain/Update]: Choose an option, or specify an arc, a circle, or a line

AMPOWERDIM

|

271

Arc Creates an angular dimension between the endpoints of an arc. After the dimension has been placed, the Power Dimensioning dialog box opens. Dimension arc line location (Angle): Specify a dimension location Circle Creates an angular dimension between the point used to select a circle and a second point on the circle. After the dimension has been placed, the Power Dimensioning dialog box opens. Second angle endpoint: Specify the second point on the circle Dimension arc line location (Angle): Specify a dimension location Line Creates an angular dimension between two lines. After the dimension has been placed, the Power Dimensioning dialog box opens. Second line: Specify the second line Dimension arc line location (Angle): Specify a dimension location Return Creates an angular dimension specified by a vertex and two endpoints. After the dimension has been placed, the Power Dimensioning dialog box opens. Angle vertex: Specify the vertex for the dimension First angle endpoint: Specify the endpoint for the first extension line Second angle endpoint: Specify the endpoint for the second extension line Dimension arc line location (Angle): Specify a dimension location

Linear Creates linear dimensions, using the First Extension Line Origin option.

Options Opens the Power Dimensioning dialog box. You can specify the settings to be applied to dimensions before they are created.

Baseline Creates baseline dimensions using an existing dimension. Second extension line origin <Select>: Specify a point

272

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Chain Creates a chain of dimensions, aligning them with an existing dimension. After the dimension has been placed, the Power Dimensioning dialog box opens. Select: Specify an existing dimension Second extension line origin <Select>: Specify the origin of the second extension line (CHAIN) Next extension line origin [Baseline/Single/New] <Exit>: Choose an option, specify another extension line origin, or press ENTER Baseline Creates dimensions from a specified baseline, using the Baseline option. Single Creates a single dimension. New Creates a new chain of dimensions from an existing dimension.

Update Updates a specified dimension. Select DIMENSION. Specify a dimension

Power Dimensioning in Drawing Mode Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Power Dimensioning.

Toolbutton

Power Dimensioning

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Power Dimensioning

Command

AMPOWERDIM

NOTE See “Power Dimensioning in Model Mode” on page 271 for a complete description of options.

Power Dimensioning Dialog Box The Power Dimensioning dialog box controls the settings for power dimensions. It contains two tabs, Tolerances and Fits.

AMPOWERDIM

|

273

Dimension Text Controls the text used by the dimension. You can add text to the default dimension value, underline or put a box around the text, and specify whether alternate units are used.

Expression Specifies the expression to use for the dimension. You can use either an equation or a design variable to control the size of the dimension.

Decimals Controls the precision of the dimension value.

Apply to Applies settings to selected dimensions.

Copy from Copies settings from a selected dimension. Opens the Parameters to Copy dialog box.

Enable Enables tolerance and fit settings.

Tolerances Tab

Upper Deviation Controls the upper deviation value.

274

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Lower Deviation Controls the lower deviation value. Type Controls the type of deviation to use.

Fits Tab

Fit Symbol Controls the fit symbol to use. Type Controls the type of fit to use.

Parameters to Copy Dialog Box

Copies selected parameters from a specified dimension and applies them to the dimension being created.

AMPOWERDIM

|

275

AMPOWEREDIT Edits parametric dimensions, reference dimensions, and annotation objects

Use AMPOWEREDIT to edit parametric and reference dimensions, and annotation objects, including ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Welding symbols Feature control frames Datum identifiers Datum targets Parts lists Balloons

Power Editing in Model Mode Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Dimensioning ➤ Power Edit.

Toolbutton

Power Edit

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Dimensioning ➤ Power Edit

Command

AMPOWEREDIT

Select object: Specify a dimension After a dimension has been selected, the Power Dimensioning dialog box opens. See AMPOWERDIM for a complete description of the options available.

Power Editing in Drawing Mode Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Power Edit.

Toolbutton

Power Edit

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Edit Dimensions ➤ Power Edit

Command

AMPOWERDIT

Select object: Specify a dimension

276

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMPRIMSF Creates a cone, cylinder, torus, and sphere

Use AMPRIMSF to create primitive surface models. AMPRIMSF creates a cone, cylinder, sphere, or torus that can be used to create more complex surfaces. The direction of revolution is determined by the AutoCAD system variable ANGDIR. If ANGDIR = 0, the direction of revolution is counterclockwise. If ANGDIR = 1, the direction of revolution is clockwise. The ANGDIR setting affects the prompt string, (+=ccw, -=cw).

Creating a Cone Creates a cone or a partial cone, depending on option settings, using the Z axis of the current UCS as the conic axis. Mechanical Desktop cones can have a top with a specified radius. Toolbutton

Cone

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Primitives ➤ Cone

Command

AMPRIMSF

Enter an option [Cone/cYlinder/Sphere/Torus] <Sphere>: Enter c to create a cone Specify base center point: Specify a center point Enter base radius or [Diameter] <1.0000>: Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER Enter top radius or [Diameter] <0.0000>: Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER Enter height <1.0000>: Specify a value or press ENTER Enter start angle <0>: Specify a value or press ENTER Enter included angle (+=ccw, -=cw) : Specify a value or press ENTER The first prompt is not available in toolbutton and menu methods.

AMPRIMSF

|

277

Creating a Cylinder Creates a cylindrical or a partially cylindrical surface, depending on option settings. Toolbutton

Cylinder

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Primitives ➤ Cylinder

Command

AMPRIMSF

Enter an option [Cone/cYlinder/Sphere/Torus] <Sphere>: Enter y to create a cylinder Specify base center point: Specify a point Enter base radius or [Diameter] <1.0000>: Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER Enter height <1.0000>: Specify a value Enter start angle <0>: Specify a value Enter included angle (+=ccw, -=cw) : Specify a value or press ENTER The first prompt is not available in toolbutton and menu methods.

Creating a Sphere Creates a spherical or a partially spherical surface, depending on option settings.

278

|

Toolbutton

Sphere

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Primitives ➤ Sphere

Command

AMPRIMSF

Chapter 1

Commands

Enter an option [Cone/cYlinder/Sphere/Torus] <Sphere>: Press ENTER Specify center of sphere: Specify a point Enter radius or [Diameter] <1.0000>: Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER Enter start angle <0>: Specify a value Enter included angle (+=ccw, -=cw) : Specify a value or press ENTER The first prompt is not available in toolbutton and menu methods.

Creating a Torus Creates a toroidal or partially toroidal surface parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. This type of surface is similar to a tube connected end to end to form a circle. Toolbutton

Torus

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Primitives ➤ Torus

Command

AMPRIMSF

Enter an option [Cone/cYlinder/Sphere/Torus] <Sphere>: Enter t to create a torus Specify base center point: Specify a point Enter radius or [Diameter] <1.0000>: Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER Enter tube radius or [Diameter] <1.0000>: Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER Enter start angle <0>: Specify a value Enter included angle (+=ccw, -=cw) : Specify a value or press ENTER The first prompt is not available in toolbutton and menu methods.

AMPRIMSF

|

279

Using Grips with Primitive Surfaces Each surface primitive can be edited (stretched, moved, rotated, scaled, or mirrored) using grips. Assuming Grip mode is turned on, select the primitive to display the grips. In general, use grips on primitive surfaces the same way you use them on AutoCAD objects. See the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more information about editing with grips.

NOTE If more than the specified number of grips are displayed on a surface, it has lost its primitive definition. AMREFINESF or AMEDITSF destroys the definition of a primitive.

Cone On a cone with no top radius, three grips are displayed: top center, base center, and base radius. On a cone with a radius on its top, four grips are displayed: top center, top radius, base center, and base radius. Use the base center grip to stretch or shrink the height of the cone and turn it upside down. To stretch the height of the cone, work in an appropriate view such as the front view. Use the base radius grip to stretch or shrink the radius of the base. To stretch or shrink the base radius of the cone, work in an appropriate viewport such as the isometric viewport. The top center and top radius grips work like the base center and base radius grips. Use the top center grip to stretch or shrink the height of the cone and turn it upside down. Use the top radius grip to stretch or shrink the radius of the top. If you shrink the radius of the top to 0, the top radius grip merges with the top center grip, leaving only the top center grip. You cannot use the remaining top center grip to reverse the operation.

280

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Cylinder Three grips are displayed on a cylinder: base center, base radius, and top. Use the top and base center grips to stretch or shrink the height of the cylinder and turn it upside down. The front view is appropriate for using the top and base grips. Use the base radius grip to stretch or shrink the radius of the cylinder. The top view is good for using the base radius grip. When stretching the base radius grip, if the point you specify lies on the base center grip, an error message is displayed. You cannot change a cylinder to a cone.

Sphere Two grips are displayed on a sphere: center and radius. Use the center grip to move the sphere. Use the radius grip to stretch or shrink the sphere.

Torus Three grips are displayed on a torus: center, torus tube radius, and torus radius. Use the center grip to move the torus. Use the torus tube radius grip to stretch or shrink the radius of the tube. Use the torus radius grip to stretch or shrink the overall radius of the torus. If you stretch the radius so much that the torus intersects itself, an error message is displayed.

AMPROFILE Solves 2D geometry to create a constrained sketch

Use AMPROFILE to solve a closed sketch. AMPROFILE creates a constrained sketch that can be used as a profile for extrude, revolve, loft, or sweep features. A profile can include 2D geometry such as model edges, sketch planes, work axes, and dimensions. To create a profile, you can combine newly sketched geometry and existing part edges or use only model edges. Profiles can also consist of multiple loops. The following guidelines apply: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Nested loops must be enclosed by a closed loop that serves as a boundary for the profiled sketch. A nested loop cannot serve as a boundary for another nested loop. Sketched loops cannot overlap, intersect, or touch. Disjointed loops may be used provided they do not overlap, intersect, or touch. Model edges and sketched entities cannot be combined to form a loop.

AMPROFILE

|

281

Solving a Profile Containing One Object Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ Single Profile.

Toolbutton

Single Profile

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Single Profile

Command

AMPROFILE

Use this option to have a profile automatically created from a closed object.

ellipse

circle

closed polyline

Solving a Profile Containing Multiple Objects Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ Profile.

Toolbutton

Profile

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Profile

Command

AMPROFILE

Select objects for sketch: Select objects for sketch:

lines and arcs

282

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Select objects Select more objects, or press ENTER

Solving a Profile Containing Nested Loops Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ Profile.

Toolbutton

Profile

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Profile

Command

AMPROFILE

Select objects for sketch: Select objects for sketch:

Select objects Select more objects, or press ENTER

nested loops

Solving a Profile Containing Disjointed Loops Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ Profile.

Toolbutton

Profile

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Profile

Command

AMPROFILE

Select objects for sketch: Select objects for sketch:

Select objects Select more objects, or press ENTER

disjointed loops

AMPROFILE

|

283

AMPROJECT Projects a wire onto a surface

Use AMPROJECT to project wires either in a given direction or normal to a surface. AMPROJECT projects a 2D line that represents an opening onto a 3D surface, to create a hole in the surface (a trimmed surface). It can also project a 3D polyline that represents the extents of the opening onto a surface. Valid input for wires includes arcs, augmented lines, circles, ellipses, lines, points, polylines, and splines. Output from AMPROJECT can include the 3D opening line, if required. An error message is displayed if the selected wire and surface don’t intersect or if the nearest points on the surface are not within the system tolerance. For Coordinate Measuring Machines (CMM) surface verification, AMPROJECT can be used to project an augmented line consisting of a single point.

NOTE To trim a surface, select the portion of the surface you want to keep. Toolbutton

Projection Wire

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Wireframe ➤ Project Wire

Command

AMPROJECT

Select wires to project: Select a wire Select wires to project: Select another wire or press ENTER Select target surfaces: Select a surface Select target surfaces: Select another surface or press ENTER

Project To Surface Dialog Box

284

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Direction Defines the direction of the projection. View Projects the wire perpendicular to the view in the active viewport. This option is used most often. Normal to Surface Projects the wire perpendicular to the surface. If the surface is curved, the relative size of the wire can be stretched or shrunk as it is projected. This option is often used to project edited surface trim lines for retrimming a surface. Normal to UCS Projects the wire normal to the current UCS, straight into or out of the plane specified by the UCS, regardless of which view is active. Vector Prompts Provides prompts on the command line to specify the direction of the projection. Specify start point or [Viewdir/Wire/X/Y/Z]: Choose an option, or specify a start point Start Point Specifies a start point on screen. Specify end point: Specify an endpoint to determine the direction Viewdir Uses the current view direction. Wire Specifies a direction, based on a selected wire. Select wire to define direction: Select a wire X/Y/Z Specifies a direction along the X, Y, or Z axis of the current UCS.

Output Type Determines the result of projecting the selected wire onto a surface. Trims a surface or shapes a wire.

AMPROJECT

|

285

Trim Surface Trims the surface with the selected wire.

wire selected

surface trimmed

NOTE Pick the surface on the side you want to retain when it is trimmed. Augmented Line Shapes the wire according to the surface to create a 3D polyline with vectors. The vectors are normal to the surface at each vertex.

wire selected

augmented line projected

Polyline Shapes the wire according to the surface to create a 3D polyline.

wire selected

3D polyline projected

Options Opens the Surface Projection Options dialog box, which controls how the wire is projected onto the surface.

286

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Surface Projection Options Dialog Box

Spacing Controls the spacing of the points in the wire that results from the projection.

NOTE This option is available only when Output is set to Polyline or Augmented Line. Optimal Inserts points into the resulting wire to hold the surface shape. If you project a flat, 2-point line onto a surface, enough points are added to maintain the curvature of the surface. The number of points added is based on the system tolerance, AMSFTOL. Pt. to Pt. Projects only the points in the selected wire onto the surface. If the selected wire lacks sufficient points to carry the shape of the surface, the shape of the resulting 3D polyline does not match the surface. Using the Point to Point option with the Trim Surface option gives unpredictable results.

Taper Angle Applies a draft value to the wire as it is projected onto the surface. If the wire is a closed loop, applying a positive taper angle creates a wire that is larger than the original. Applying a negative taper angle to a closed loop creates a smaller wire. For projected wires that are not closed, the results depend on the direction of the projection. A positive taper value causes the wire to expand to the right side, when walking down the wire from the beginning to the end and looking down the projection direction. The Spacing option you choose affects the taper angle.

NOTE The Taper Angle option is available only when you choose the Normal to Surface or View, UCS, or Vector options.

AMPROJECT

|

287

AMPROJECT2PLN Projects planar objects and 3D faces to a work plane, sketch plane, or 3D face

Use AMPROJECT2PLN to project planar objects and face edges to a selected work plane, sketch plane, or 3D face. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ Project Objects to Plane.

Toolbutton

Project to Plane

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Project Objects to Plane

Command

AMPROJECT2PLN

Projection Options Dialog Box

Projection of Specifies which type of objects to project, 2D objects or 3D face edges.

Projection to Specifies whether objects will be projected to a work plane, sketch plane, or 3D face edges.

288

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Work Plane Projects selected objects to a specified work plane. Projecting a 2D Object to a Work Plane

Select Workplane: Specify a work plane Select objects: Specify an object to project Select objects: Specify more objects or press ENTER

Projecting a 3D Face to a Work Plane

Select Workplane: Specify a work plane Select edge: Specify an edge Choose the geometry you wish [Next]: Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER

Sketch Plane Projects selected objects to the current sketch plane. Projecting a 2D Object to a Sketch Plane

Select objects: Select objects:

Specify an object to project Specify more objects or press ENTER

Projecting a 3D Face to a Sketch Plane

Select edge: Specify an edge Choose the geometry you wish [Next]: Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER

3D Face Projects selected face edges to a specified 3D face. Projecting a 2D Object to a 3D Face

Select plane-defining 3D-face: Specify a face Choose the geometry you wish [Next]: Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER Select objects: Specify an object to project Select objects: Specify more objects or press ENTER

Projecting a 3D Face to a 3D Face

Select plane-defining 3D-face: Specify a face Choose the geometry you wish [Next]: Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER Select edge: Specify an edge Choose the geometry you wish [Next]: Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER

AMPROJECT2PLN

|

289

AMRECOVER Audits a file and fixes any errors

Use AMRECOVER to audit a file. This audit examines Mechanical Desktop drawing files and corrects any errors. Use AMRECOVER if data has been problematic or crashes have occurred when you are loading certain files. Use Desktop Options to set automatic audit options. When you use AMRECOVER, the Recover Drawing dialog box is displayed. Command

AMRECOVER

Recover Drawing Dialog Box

Look in Specifies the directory for the file.

File Name Displays the file name of the selected file.

Files of Type Displays files with the specified extension type.

Preview Displays a bitmap of the selected file. The Preview area is blank if you do not select a file, if you select a file that is not an AutoCAD file, or if you select a file from a previous version of AutoCAD.

290

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Locate Searches for the file name you enter in the File Name window.

Find File Displays the Browse/Search dialog box.

Browse/Search Dialog Box Browses through your folders or searches for a specific drawing file.

Browse Tab

File Name Displays the file name of the drawing you select. Directories Specifies the name of the folder to look in. Drives Specifies the name of the disk drive to look in. List Files of Type Specifies the file type to look for. Size Changes the size of the preview image to small, medium, or large. Network Opens the Map Network Drive dialog box.

AMRECOVER

|

291

Map Network Drive Dialog Box

Drive Specifies the drive to map the network drive to on your machine. Path Specifies the network location to map. Reconnect at Logon Specifies whether to reconnect the network drive each time you log on.

Search Tab

Search Pattern Specifies the name of a specific file to search for. Wild cards are valid. File Types Specifies the type of file to search for. Date Filter Searches for drawings by date.

292

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Search Location Specifies where to look for the drawing file. Drive

Specifies the drive to search.

All Drives

Specifies all local or all fixed drives to search.

Path

Specifies a path to search.

Edit

Opens the Edit Path dialog box.

Search

Initiates the search.

Edit Path Dialog Box

Path Displays the current path.

Directories Provides a means of searching for a specific directory.

Drives Specifies the drive to search.

Search Path Specifies the path to search.

Add Adds a selected directory to the search path.

Delete Deletes a selected directory from the search path.

AMRECOVER

|

293

Delete All Deletes all selected directories from the search path.

Network Opens the Map Network Drive dialog box.

AMREFDIM Creates Drawing mode reference dimensions between part edges created in Model mode, and a limited set of objects created in Drawing mode

Use AMREFDIM in Drawing mode to create reference dimensions between the part edges created in Model mode and the following entities created in Drawing mode: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Lines Arcs Circles Ellipses Centerlines

NOTE Before Drawing mode entities can be used in a reference dimension, they must be associated to a drawing view.

line created and attached to view

294

|

reference dimension created

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Reference Dimension.

Toolbutton

Reference Dimension

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Reference Dimension

Command

AMREFDIM

Chapter 1

Commands

Select first object: Select first object Select second object or place dimension: Select second object or place dimension Specify placement point or [Undo/Hor/Ver/Align/Par/aNgle/Ord/reF/Basic]: Specify another point to relocate the dimension, choose an option, or press ENTER Select first object: Place another dimension or press ENTER

Undo Undoes the previous selection.

Hor Forces a horizontal dimension.

Ver Forces a vertical dimension.

Align Forces an aligned dimension.

Par Forces a parallel dimension.

Angle Forces an angular dimension.

Ord Forces an ordinate dimension.

Ref Places dimension text in brackets.

Basic Places a box around the dimension text.

Placement Point Allows you to respecify the dimension location.

AMREFDIM

|

295

AMREFINE3D Changes the point density of lines and 3D polylines

Use AMREFINE3D to refine lines and polylines used to create surfaces. Drawings containing polyline data that has been digitized, such as data received from an Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES) translator, often have too many vertices. Fitting a surface to a polyline with more vertices than are necessary for expressing its 3D shape may result in too many internal patches on the surface, poor surfaces, or a decrease in system performance. A polyline with too few points may create a surface that doesn’t hold the desired shape. The AMREFINE3D command increases or decreases the number of points in a polyline to achieve the best surface.

before AMREFINE3D

after AMREFINE3D

Toolbutton

Refine Wire

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Wireframe ➤ Refine

Command

AMREFINE3D

Select lines or polylines to refine: Select a line or polyline Select lines or polylines to refine: Select another line or polyline, or press ENTER Enter tolerance or [Points] <0.0010>: Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER

Tolerance Reduces the point density of a polyline by applying the specified tolerance to each vertex in the polyline. Vertices outside the specified tolerance are deleted. A higher tolerance reduces the number of points defining the polyline.

Points Reduces or increases the point density of a polyline or line by removing or adding points. To manipulate a straight line, add points which you can then move using grips. Enter number of points <5>: Specify a value

296

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMREFINESF Refines surfaces by increasing or decreasing the number of U and V patches

Use AMREFINESF to create a new bi-cubic, nonrational, non-offset C2 continuous surface by changing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■

The number of U and V patches The order of the equation of the surface The surface, from rational to nonrational From offset to non-offset

before AMREFINESF

after AMREFINESF

Toolbutton

Refine Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Refine

Command

AMREFINESF

Select surfaces: Select a surface Select surfaces: Select another surface or press ENTER Tolerance [Uv patches] <0.0010>: Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER

Tolerance Regenerates the surface, based on the specified tolerance.

NOTE The default tolerance is set to the value of the AMSFTOL system variable.

UV Patches Rebuilds the surface with the specified number of patches. The default number of patches shown in the prompt is 10, regardless of the actual number of patches in the original surface. U and V patches are not the same as U and V lines. The U and V patches are internal and invisible. U patches <10>: Specify a value V Patches <10>: Specify a value

AMREFINESF

|

297

AMREFRESH Updates external part or subassembly definitions

Use AMREFRESH to update the external part or subassembly definitions that have changed since the initial reference or the last refresh command.

NOTE If an externally referenced file references another file, AMREFRESH will not list it. To work around this, open and save all top-level files to ensure that nested references are also updated. Use AMAUDIT to detect files that need to be updated. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Assembly ➤ Refresh.

Toolbutton

Update External Refs

Desktop Menu

Assembly➤ Assembly ➤ Refresh

Command

AMREFRESH

Refresh External Part/Subassembly Dialog Box

Select External Part/Subassembly to Refresh Specifies the external part definitions (references) that are out of date and need to be updated.

298

|

Chapter 1

Commands

All Specifies that all out-of-date, external part definitions are to be updated. Use AMASSEMBLE to resolve the constraints and update the assembly.

NOTE If all external parts are up to date, the Refresh External Part/Subassembly dialog box does not appear. Instead, an AutoCAD Message dialog box appears, indicating that all external parts and subassemblies are up to date.

AMRENAME Renames an active part definition, part instance, scene, or drawing view

Use AMRENAME to rename part definitions, part instances, and scenes in Model mode, and drawing views in Drawing mode.

Renaming a Part Instance Browser

Right-click a part instance and choose Rename.

Toolbutton

Rename Part

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ Rename

Command

AMRENAME

Enter an option [part Definition/part Instance/Scene] <part Instance>: Press ENTER Select part instance to rename or [?] : Enter ? for a list of parts, specify a part name, or press ENTER Enter new name for part instance: Enter a new name If you use the Browser method, the prompts do not appear.

Renaming a Part Definition Command

AMRENAME

Enter an option [part Definition/part Instance/Scene] <part Instance>: Select part definition to rename or [?] : Enter ? for a list of parts, specify a part name, or press ENTER

Enter d

AMRENAME

|

299

Rename Definition Dialog Box

Old Name Lists the existing part definition name.

New Name Specifies the new name for the part definition.

Instance Renaming Specifies whether instances are also renamed. No Instances No instances are renamed. Only Instances with Like Prefix Only instances with the same prefix as the part definition are renamed. All Instances All instances are renamed.

Renaming a Scene

300

|

Browser

In the Scene tab, right-click a scene icon and choose Rename.

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Scene ➤ Rename Scene

Command

AMRENAME

Chapter 1

Commands

Enter an option [part Definition/part Instance/Scene] <part Instance>: Enter scene to rename or [?] <SCENE1>: Enter ? for a list of scenes, specify a scene name, or press ENTER Enter new name for scene : Specify a new name for the scene, or press ENTER for a list

Enter s

If you use the Browser method, the prompts do not appear.

Renaming a Drawing View Browser

In the Drawing tab, right-click a view icon and choose Rename.

AMREORDFEAT Changes the order of a feature in the part creation history

Use AMREORDFEAT to change the order of a feature in the part hierarchy.

before AMREORDFEAT

after AMREORDFEAT

AMREORDFEAT

|

301

Browser

In the Model tab, click a feature and drag it to a different location in the part hierarchy.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Features ➤ Reorder.

Toolbutton

Reorder Feature

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Reorder Feature

Command

AMREORDFEAT

Select feature to reorder: Select the feature to reorder Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n to cycle to the next feature, or press ENTER Select destination feature: Select the destination feature Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n to cycle to the next feature, or press ENTER If you choose the Browser method, and try to reorder a feature to a location that is inconsistent with other features, a circle with a diagonal line through it is displayed, and you are prevented from reordering the feature. Move the feature to a location that is allowed. If you use the Toolbutton, Desktop Menu, or Command method, you cannot reorder the feature to an inconsistent location.

AMREPLACE Changes definitions for part or subassembly instances

Use AMREPLACE to replace selected instances with other parts or subassemblies. The parts or subassemblies must be referenced into the drawing before they can be used to replace instances.

before AMREPLACE

after AMREPLACE

NOTE If the selected part or subassembly instances have associated assembly constraints, the Verify Replace dialog box is displayed to warn you that the new instances need to be reconstrained after the replacement.

302

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Assembly ➤ Replace.

Toolbutton

Replace Part

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ Replace

Command

AMREPLACE

Replace Part/Subassembly Dialog Box

Replace Specifies the part or subassembly instance to replace. To select more than one definition, use Shift or Control while selecting.

All Instances Specifies that all instances of the same type are to be replaced by the specified definition.

Pick Closes the dialog box temporarily and displays a prompt for selecting the part or subassembly with the cursor. After you select a part or subassembly, the dialog box is redisplayed, with the name of the selected part highlighted under Replace.

With Specifies the replacement part or subassembly.

AMREPLACE

|

303

AMREPLACEDGE Replaces a surface edge with an edge of another surface

Use AMREPLACEDGE to replace a surface edge with the edge of another surface. AMREPLACEDGE trims the selected surface to the apparent intersection with a control surface, or quilted surface, and blends the transition between the two surfaces.

before AMREPLACEDGE

after AMREPLACEDGE

Toolbutton

Replace Surface Edge

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Replace Edge

Command

AMREPLACEDGE

Select Surface near edge to be replaced: Specify a surface Select control Surface (or) Quilt: Specify a surface Specify Percentage to Blend Back from Edge <20.0000>: Specify a value

AMREPLAY Displays the steps used to create features of the selected part

Use AMREPLAY to redisplay, in sequence, the steps used to create features of a selected part.

feature creation replayed

NOTE AMREPLAY includes suppressed features during replay.

304

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ Replay.

Toolbutton

Feature Replay

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ Replay

Command

AMREPLAY

Select part to replay or : Select a part or press ENTER Enter an option [Display/Exit/Next/Size/Truncate] : Choose an option, or press ENTER to cycle to the next step

Display Available when replay reaches a sketch. Use this option to display 2D sketch constraints.

Exit Exits the command.

Next Advances to the next step in the feature replay. When AMREPLAY encounters a feature, the following options are displayed: Enter an option [Exit/Next/suPpress/Truncate] : Choose an option or press ENTER Suppress Suppresses all features created after the current step. When AMREPLAY encounters a suppressed feature, the following options are displayed: Feature name (suppressed) Enter an option [Exit/Next/suPpress to end/Truncate/Unsuppress]: Choose an option or press ENTER Suppress to End

Suppresses all features created after the current step.

Unsuppress

Allows you to manually unsuppress features in the replay process.

Size Opens the Constraint Display Size dialog box.

Truncate Deletes all features created after the current step.

AMREPLAY

|

305

Constraint Display Size Dialog Box Controls the display size of 2D constraints on screen.

AMRESTOREUCS Restores a sketch plane associated with a saved UCS

Use AMRESTOREUCS to restore a previously saved UCS and its associated sketch plane. AMRESTOREUCS uses a block created by AMCAPTUREUCS to restore UCS settings. Toolbutton

Restore UCS

Desktop Menu

Assist ➤ Restore 3D UCS

Command

AMRESTOREUCS

Select UCS block:

Specify a UCS block

AMREVOLVE Creates a revolved solid feature from the selected profile

Use AMREVOLVE to revolve a profile about a selected axis to create a solid feature. An axis can be a model edge, a work axis, or a sketched line included in the profile. If the sketched line is not part of the profile boundary, its linetype must be different from the linetype associated with the system variable AMSKSTYLE.

axis

profile

306

|

Chapter 1

Commands

revolved feature

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketched & Work Features ➤ Revolve.

Toolbutton

Revolve

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketched Features ➤ Revolve

Command

AMREVOLVE

Select profile: Specify a profile Select revolution axis: Specify an axis If only one profile exists, or if you are using the Browser method, the first prompt does not appear.

Revolution Dialog Box

Operation Determines the Boolean operation of the revolution. Base Adds material, creating the first feature in a part. Cut Cuts the revolved volume from the active part. Join Adds the revolved volume to the active part. Intersect Creates a new feature from the shared volume between the existing part and the revolved feature. Split Creates a new part from the shared volume between the existing part and the revolved feature.

Termination Determines the method for ending the revolution.

AMREVOLVE

|

307

By Angle Revolves the profile to a specified angle and displays direction arrows. Full Revolves the profile 360 degrees. To Face/Plane Revolves the profile to a specified planar face or work plane. Select face or work plane: Select a face or work plane Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Choose an option, or select a work plane or planar face Enter termination type [Face/Plane] : Choose an option or press ENTER Face

Terminates the feature at the selected face.

Plane

Terminates the feature at the selected plane.

Mid Plane Revolves the profile equally in both directions, terminating at the specified overall angle. From_To Defines the origin and destination faces. Select face or work plane (first termination): Specify a face or work plane Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n or press ENTER Enter termination type [Face/Plane] : Choose an option or press ENTER Select face or work plane (second termination): Specify a face or work plane Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n or press ENTER

Flip Flips the direction of the revolution.

Angle Specifies the angle of revolution. The default angle is 90 degrees.

308

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMREVOLVESF Creates a surface by rotating a path wire around a selected axis

Use AMREVOLVESF to create a surface of revolution by rotating any number of path curves, or closed loops, around a selected axis. AMREVOLVESF creates a NURBS surface which meets the design criterion of C1 (smooth) continuity. Revolved surfaces have grips. To move a revolved surface, select its grip point and specify a new location for the surface.

NOTE AMREVOLVESF creates rational surfaces only. The path curve defines the U direction of the surface. Valid curves are lines, arcs, splines, and polylines. Selecting a closed polyline as the path curve creates a surface that is closed in the U direction.

path and axis

revolved surface

Toolbutton

Revolved Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Revolve

Command

AMREVOLVESF

Select path curves to revolve: Select a curve Select path curves to revolve: Select another curve or press ENTER Specify axis start point or [Wire]: Enter w to select a wire, or specify a start point for the axis

AMREVOLVESF

|

309

Start Point of Axis Specifies the start point of an axis on screen. Specify axis end point: Specify a second point Enter start angle <0>: Specify a value or press ENTER Enter included angle (+=ccw, -=cw) : Specify a value or press ENTER

Wire Uses the wire you select as the axis of revolution. Select wire to define axis: Select a wire Enter start angle <0>: Specify a value or press ENTER Enter included angle (+=ccw, -=cw) : Specify a value or press ENTER The selected axis of revolution determines the V direction of the surface. If you select a polyline, the actual segment you select becomes the rotation axis, and all other vertices are ignored.

Start Angle/Included Angle The start angle specifies where the revolution starts, relative to the path curve. If you specify a start angle other than 0, the revolution starts at a position from the path curve defined by that angle. The included angle specifies how far the surface extends around the axis of revolution. A negative angle revolves the surface in a clockwise manner. A positive angle revolves the surface in a counterclockwise manner.

AMROTCENTER Calculates a new center of rotation at the 3D center of all visible objects

Use AMROTCENTER to calculate a new center of rotation of all visible objects. This includes Parts, Assemblies, NURBS Surfaces and AutoCAD wires. The new center of rotation stays in effect until the command is repeated or the select rotation center (AMSELROT) command is initiated.

310

|

Toolbutton

New Rotation Center

Command

AMROTCENTER

Chapter 1

Commands

AMRSOLVESK Displays the number of constraints needed to fully constrain a sketch, or appends new geometry to a sketch

Use AMRSOLVESK to re-solve consumed and unconsumed sketches or append geometry to existing sketches.

Re-Solving a Sketch Use AMRSOLVESK to re-solve a single unconsumed path, profile, cut line, or split line. The number of constraints required to fully constrain it is displayed. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ Re-Solve.

Toolbutton

Re-Solve Sketch

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Re-Solve

Command

AMRSOLVESK

Enter an option [Append/Solve sketch] <Solve sketch>:

Press ENTER

Appending a Sketch Use AMRSOLVESK to add new geometry to a selected path, profile, cut line, or split line, and display the number of constraints required to fully constrain it. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ Append.

Toolbutton

Append to Sketch

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Append

Enter an option [Append/Solve sketch] <Solve sketch>: Enter a Select geometry to append to sketch: Select an object to append to the sketch Select geometry to append to sketch: Select another object to append to the sketch or press ENTER

AMRSOLVESK

|

311

AMRULE Creates a straight element surface between two wires

Use AMRULE to create a surface consisting of noncurving elements in the V direction. AMRULE uses only two wires to construct the surface. The resulting surface is a NURBS surface. Valid wires include lines, arcs, splines, polylines, circles, ellipses, augmented lines, and surfaces. Toolbutton

Ruled Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Rule

Command

AMRULE

Select first wire: Select the first wire Select second wire: Select the second wire

wires selected

ruled surface

AMSCALE Scales wires and surfaces along their axes by a specified factor

Use AMSCALE to scale wires and surfaces along their axes, either individually or uniformly. Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Scale

Command

AMSCALE

Select wires and surfaces: Select a wire or a surface Select wires and surfaces: Select another wire or surface, or press ENTER Scaling: [Independent/Uniform] : Enter i or press ENTER

312

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Uniform Uniformly scales the selected wire(s) or surface(s) along all three axes. Scale factor <1.0000>: Specify a scale factor Locate origin<0.000000,0.000000,0.000000>:

original surface

Specify an origin

uniformly scaled

Independent Scales the selected wire(s) or surface(s) independently along each of three axes. X scale factor <1.0000>: Specify a value Y scale factor <1.0000>: Specify a value Z scale factor <2.0000>: Specify a value Locate origin<0.000000,0.000000,0.000000>:

original surface

Specify an origin

independently scaled

AMSCALE

|

313

AMSECTION Creates section cuts through one or more surfaces

Use AMSECTION to cut a single cross section or a group of cross sections from a set of surfaces you select. AMSECTION produces sections that can be plotted as a series of incremental cross sections. AMSECTION is useful for visualizing and inspecting a surface and for designing

3D products. For example, you can cut a section through an automobile to check clearances for adjacent components. To section a surface with AMSECTION, you first orient the section cuts by establishing the initial plane at any angle. The initial plane is the base cutting plane for the first section cut. AMSECTION interprets all input relative to the initial plane. Toolbutton

Section Cuts

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Wireframe ➤ Section Cuts

Command

AMSECTION

Select surfaces: Select surfaces:

Select a surface Select another surface or press ENTER

Surface Cross Sections Dialog Box

Section Type Specifies the type of cut to make.

314

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Single Cuts only one section. Parallel Cuts multiple sections parallel to one another and to the initial plane. Parallel sections begin at the initial plane and terminate at the specified distance from it. After you establish the location and orientation of the first section, define the remaining section cuts with the Step and Stop options under Multiple Cuts. The Parallel option interprets both Step and Stop as distances. Radial Cuts multiple sections by rotating the initial plane about its X axis. After you establish the location and orientation of the first section, define the remaining section cuts with the Stop and Step options under Multiple Cuts. The Radial option interprets both Step and Stop as angles.

single section

parallel sections

radial sections

NOTE The orientation of the surface has been adjusted for clarity.

Initial Plane Establishes the initial plane used to generate the sections. Once you have established the initial plane, all other input to AMSECTION is relative to this plane. View Direction Establishes the initial plane perpendicular to the plane of the active viewport. After selecting this option, choose Define. Digitize a two-point cut line that cuts the surface straight into the screen. This option is dependent on the current view, which must be established before you start AMSECTION.

NOTE Look at your model in another view to see the multiple cuts made in the current view direction.

AMSECTION

|

315

UCS Plane Establishes the initial plane directly on the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Choose Define to change the origin of the UCS. Position the UCS exactly where you want to cut one or more sections. In the case of radial sections, the X axis of the UCS becomes the pivot for the radial sections. You are returned to your original UCS after the sections are cut. Define Specifies the direction of the initial plane. Locate first point: Specify a point Locate second point: Specify a second point

Multiple Cuts Specifies whether multiple cuts are created. Stop Sets the total distance to be covered with parallel sections, starting from the initial plane. Sets the total angle to be covered with radial sections, starting from the initial plane. To enter a distance or angle, use the Locate Stop button to digitize a screen location or enter coordinate values. Step Sets the incremental distance between parallel sections or sets the incremental angle between radial sections. The step value must be less than or equal to the stop value.

NOTE Stop and Step are not available if you selected the Single option. Locate Stop Displays prompts for you to graphically locate the distance or angle to be covered with parallel or radial sections, respectively.

Output Determines whether the output sections are augmented lines or 3D polylines and whether they are offset from the surface. You can also save the output. Augmented Creates the section cuts with augmented lines instead of 3D polylines. Internally, the augmented vectors are the size of one unit of measurement, but they are displayed according to the current value of AMVECSF. Offset Creates section cuts normal to the surface and at a specific distance from the surface.

316

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Save Retains section cuts as part of a group. Group Specifies the name of the group to associate to the section cuts.

AMSELROT Calculates a new center of rotation by allowing the user to specify a point for the rotation

Use AMSELROT to calculate a new center of rotation of all visible objects. This includes Parts, Assemblies, NURBS surfaces and AutoCAD wires. The new center of rotation stays in effect until the command is repeated or the new rotation center command (AMROTCENTER) is initiated. Toolbutton

Select Rotation Center

Command

AMSELROT

Select rotation center <8.0188, 4.5000, 0.0000>: Enter X, Y, Z coordinates or manually select a point

AMSHELL Creates a shell feature with an assigned wall thickness or multiple wall thicknesses

Use AMSHELL to create a shelled feature on the active part. You can assign an overall wall thickness or multiple wall thicknesses and select faces to exclude.

after AMSHELL

before AMSHELL

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed Features ➤ Shell.

Toolbutton

Shell

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Shell

Command

AMSHELL

AMSELROT

|

317

Shell Feature Dialog Box

Default Thickness Specifies values for the wall thickness of the shell and which faces, if any, to exclude. Inside Specifies the wall thickness, using the part faces as the outside walls of the shell. Outside Specifies the wall thickness, using the part faces as the inside walls of the shell. Midplane Specifies the wall thickness of the shell, using the part faces as the midplane of the shell. Excluded Faces Specifies the faces to exclude from the shell feature. Add

Closes the Shell Feature dialog box temporarily so that you can add faces to exclude from the shell. Select faces to exclude: Select a face Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER Select faces to exclude: Select another face or press ENTER

Reclaim

Closes the Shell Feature dialog box temporarily so that you can reclaim the excluded faces. Select faces to reclaim: Select a face Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n or press ENTER Select faces to reclaim: Select another face or press ENTER

318

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Multiple Thickness Overrides Specifies values for multiple wall thicknesses. Thickness Specifies a value to apply to individual faces, to override the default thickness. Set Creates or deletes override values. Faces Specifies faces to apply multiple thickness overrides to or to reclaim faces from a set to which overrides have been applied.

Reset Resets all values in the Shell Feature dialog box to default values.

AMSHOWACT Highlights the active part or sketch plane

Use AMSHOWACT to highlight the active part or active sketch plane. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ Show Active Part.

Toolbutton

Show Active

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part ➤ Show Active Part

Command

AMSHOWACT

Enter an option [Sketchplane/Part] <Part>: Choose an option and press ENTER to continue

Part Highlights the active part.

Sketch Plane Highlights the active sketch plane, if one exists. After the sketch plane or part has been highlighted, press ENTER to exit the command.

AMSHOWACT

|

319

AMSHOWCON Displays 2D constraint symbols on the selected sketch

Use AMSHOWCON to display the 2D constraints that already exist on a selected sketch and to assist in fully constraining the sketch.

2D constraints

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose 2D Constraints ➤ Show Constraints.

Toolbutton

Show Constraints

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ 2D Constraints ➤ Show Constraints

Command

AMSHOWCON

Enter an option [All/Select/Next/eXit] <eXit>: Choose an option or press ENTER

All Displays all constraints for the selected sketch.

Select Displays constraints for selected objects in the active sketch. Select objects in active sketch. Select objects: Select objects and press ENTER to display the constraints

Next Displays constraints by cycling through the selected objects. Select objects in active sketch. Select objects: Select objects and press ENTER to continue Select constraint or [Exit/Next] : Choose an option or press ENTER to cycle through the constraints

Exit Exits the command.

320

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMSHOWINST Highlights selected part instances in the Desktop Browser

Use AMSHOWINST to highlight selected part instances in the Desktop Browser. This command is very useful for locating specific instances in the Browser, when you are working in large assembly files. Command

AMSHOWINST

Select an instance:

Select a part

The selected part instance is displayed and highlighted in the Desktop Browser.

AMSHOWSKETCH Highlights geometry on the current sketch plane

Use AMSHOWSKETCH to highlight geometry on the current sketch plane. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ Highlight Sketch Plane Entities.

Toolbutton

Highlights Sketch Data

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Highlight Sketch Plane Entities

Command

AMSHOWSKETCH

Select objects: Specify the objects to consider Select objects: Specify more objects or press ENTER AMSHOWSKETCH highlights valid geometry. Press ENTER to end the command.

AMSHOWINST

|

321

AMSKPLN Sets the sketch plane location and XY axes orientation

Use AMSKPLN to specify the sketch plane location and the orientation of the XY axes. You can sketch a feature profile, path, cut line, or split line on the active part on this plane. Sketch planes can be placed on planar (flat) faces of the active part, on work planes, or on planes defined by a user coordinate system (UCS). The sketch plane is an infinite plane on which the next feature is sketched. The orientation of the X and Y axes on the sketch plane determines the orientation of the horizontal and vertical constraints. Use the Z-flip option to change the direction of the Z axis of the UCS along the axis that is aligned with the selected edge. A temporary sketch plane graphic appears on screen, on the plane you have specified. You can select a part edge, a work plane edge, or a work axis to reorient the XY axes. Select the directional arrow to reorient the Z direction.

temporary sketch plane graphic

NOTE You can use the animated cursor to cycle through the available options. Browser

Right-click in the background and choose New Sketch Plane.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose New Sketch Plane.

Toolbutton

New Sketch Plane

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ New Sketch Plane

Command

AMSKPLN

Select work plane, planar face or [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]: Choose an option, or select a part face or a work plane

322

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Select Work Plane or Planar Face Choose a face on the active part, or choose a work plane. Valid faces will be highlighted as the cursor approaches them. Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n to cycle to the next face, or press ENTER Plane=Parametric Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] : Choose an option, select an edge, or press ENTER

WorldXy Uses the XY plane of the World Coordinate System (WCS). Plane=World XY Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] : Choose an option, select an edge, or press ENTER

WorldYz Uses the YZ plane of the WCS. Plane=World YZ Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] : Choose an option, select an edge, or press ENTER

WorldZx Uses the ZX plane of the WCS. Plane=World ZX Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] : Choose an option, select an edge, or press ENTER

Ucs Uses the XY plane of the current UCS. Plane=UCS Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] : Choose an option, select an edge, or press ENTER Z-flip Changes the direction of the Z axis of the sketch plane. Rotate Rotates the XY axes of the sketch plane.

AMSKPLN

|

323

Using the Animated Cursor When you create a sketch plane, you can use the animated cursor to automate the selection process.

Cycling When the cursor is displayed with rotational arrows, use the left mouse button to cycle through the available options. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

UCS Orientation When the cursor is displayed with rotating axes, use the left mouse button to rotate the XY axes. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

AMSOLCUT Cuts an AutoCAD solid model with a Mechanical Desktop surface

Use AMSOLCUT to integrate free-form surface shapes with solid models, effectively creating a sculptured solid. AMSOLCUT essentially trims any AutoCAD solid object to the intersection of a Mechanical Desktop surface. The surface must extend beyond all faces of the AutoCAD solid, or the solid will not be trimmed. See “AMSURFCUT” on page 340 for information about cutting surfaces from parametric solid models. The resultant solid is a valid AutoCAD solid object. You can use AutoCAD solid operations, such as filleting along an edge, Boolean operations, and AMSOLCUT to refine the solid.

before AMSOLCUT

324

|

Chapter 1

Commands

after AMSOLCUT

To cut a solid with more than one surface, either join the surfaces or cut the solid with one surface at a time. Surfaces can be joined only along untrimmed edges. See “AMJOINSF” on page 192.

NOTE A direction arrow points from the surface to the side of the solid that will be removed. Toolbutton

Solid Cut

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Solid

Command

AMSOLCUT

Select solid to cut: Specify a solid Select surface: Specify a surface Portion to remove [Accept/Flip] :

Enter f to flip direction or press ENTER

AMSPLITLINE Solves an open or closed line sketch to divide a part or a face

Use AMSPLITLINE to split a part using a sketch projected onto a set of faces. When a split line is created, the sketch is consumed by the split feature. A new Split Line icon is added to the Browser.

split line

Multiple, unconsumed split lines can exist for one part. Use AMPARTSPLIT to split a part using a split line. After the split is completed, draft can be applied to the faces on each side of the split line.

AMSPLITLINE

|

325

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving ➤ Split Line.

Toolbutton

Split Line

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Split Line

Command

AMSPLITLINE

Select objects: Select the geometry for the split line Select edge to include in splitline or press ENTER to accept: Select a part edge, or press ENTER Solved underconstrained sketch requiring n dimensions or constraints. When the split line has been solved, use AMFACESPLIT to project the split line to the desired surfaces.

AMSTITCH Stitches surfaces together and heals gaps between existing surfaces

Use AMSTITCH to stitch surfaces together and heal gaps between existing surfaces. Toolbutton

Stitches Surfaces

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Surface Stitching

Command

AMSTITCH

Select objects to be stitched: Specify a surface Select objects to be stitched: Specify another surface or press ENTER

Surface Stitching Dialog Box

326

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Stitching Type Controls the type of stitching that is performed. Optimal Stitching Stitches and simplifies objects, using optimal settings. The Custom settings for stitching, healing, and simplifying are not available. Custom Stitching Specifies tolerances for each type of stitching function: stitching, healing, and simplifying objects. You access the custom settings by selecting the Settings button in the dialog box.

Operation Controls the operation that is performed. Stitch Surfaces Stitches surfaces together. Heal Gaps Heals the gaps between selected surfaces. Simplify Objects Simplifies the selected surfaces.

Enclosed Surfaces Output Controls whether the output is to a part or to a quilted surface. Part Outputs stitched surfaces to a solid model. Quilt Outputs stitched surfaces to a surface quilt.

Preview Provides an on-screen preview of the stitch operation.

Settings Opens the Custom Settings dialog box, where you can control the display of the stitched surface output and the tolerances that are applied, when the stitch calculation is made.

Custom Settings Dialog Box The Custom Settings dialog box contains two tabs: Stitch/Heal/Simplify and Display.

AMSTITCH

|

327

Stitch/Heal/Simplify Tab

Option Specifies the function the settings are applied to: stitch, heal, or simplify. Reset Resets the settings to their default values. Settings Controls the settings for the specified function.

Display Tab

Preview Settings Controls the colors of resultant edges, tolerant edges, spline geometry, original entities, bad edges, bad faces, and bad vertices.

328

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMSTLOUT Outputs solids, regions, parts, and subassemblies to the STL format used for stereo lithography

Use AMSTLOUT to create output files of solids, regions, parts, and subassemblies for stereo lithography. The STL format reduces an entire model into multiple flat facets that approximate its shape. Command

AMSTLOUT

Select object: Specify a solid, region, part, or subassembly Angular tolerance=15.0000 aSpect ratio=0.0000 sUrface tolerance=0.0000 Vertex spacing=0.0000 Enter an option [Angular tolerance/aSpect ratio/sUrface tolerance/Vertex spacing] : Choose an option or press ENTER

Angular Tolerance The surface normal of each facet of the model is compared to the surface normal of each adjacent facet. These normals are not allowed to deviate more than the value in degrees set by this option. Enter maximum facet angle deviation (degrees) <15.0000>:

Enter a value

The default setting of 15 degrees may produce very coarse output, depending on the size of the part. For large parts, you may find it beneficial to lower the angular tolerance, especially if a large surface tolerance setting is used, because smaller features such as holes or fillets may not translate well.

NOTE Lowering this value increases the density of the mesh, resulting in a large file.

Aspect Ratio This setting controls the height/width ratio of the facets. A value of 1 forces the height of a facet to be no greater than its width. Enter maximum aspect ratio of facets <0.0000>:

Enter a value

The default value is 0, meaning that the aspect ratio is not calculated. The aspect ratio does not affect planar faces, but this setting is sometimes needed to avoid "sliver" facets, or long slender facets, that may be created when translating long, cylindrical parts.

AMSTLOUT

|

329

Surface Tolerance This setting has the greatest effect on the STL output. The surface tolerance controls the chordal deviation, or the maximum distance allowed between the edge of a facet and the face’s actual surface or edge geometry. It is the maximum allowable deviation that the faceted output can deviate from the actual surface. Enter maximum surface deviation <0.0000>:

Enter a value

The default setting is 0, meaning that the surface tolerance is not calculated.

Vertex Spacing This setting controls the maximum distance allowed between the adjacent vertices of a facet. For example, if a vertex spacing value of 1 is used, no facet can have an edge that is more than 1 unit long. Enter maximum distance between vertices <0.0000>: Enter a value The default setting is 0, which means that vertex spacing is not calculated.

Save File Dialog Box

Save in Specifies the location for the output file.

File Name Specifies the name of the output file.

Save as Type Specifies the type of file to create.

330

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMSTYLEI Imports dimension styles defined in any DWG file without your having to attach and detach or insert an entire drawing

Use AMSTYLEI in Drawing mode to import dimension styles from other drawings without inserting the entire drawing. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Dimensions ➤ Style Importer.

Toolbutton

Style Importer

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Edit Dimensions ➤ Style Importer

Command

AMSTYLEI

AMSTYLEI opens the Select Drawing dialog box, where you choose the drawing

from which to import dimension styles. Then, it opens the Dim Style Importer dialog box.

Select Drawing Dialog Box

Look in Specifies the directory for the file.

File Name Displays the name of the selected file.

Files of Type Displays files with the specified extension type.

AMSTYLEI

|

331

Preview Displays a bitmap of the selected file. The Preview area is blank if you do not select a file, if you select a file that is not an AutoCAD file, or if you select a file from a previous version of AutoCAD.

Locate Searches for the file name displayed in the File Name field.

Find File Displays the Browse/Search dialog box. See “AMRECOVER” on page 290.

Dim Style Importer Dialog Box

Dimension Styles to Import Displays the dimension styles available to import.

Current Dimension Styles Displays the dimension styles available in the current drawing. To import a dimension style, select a style from the Dimension Styles to Import list, and click the arrow button. The style name appears in the Current Dimension Styles list. If the style being imported duplicates the name of a current style, the Substitute Dimension Style Name dialog box is displayed.

332

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Substitute Dimension Style Name Dialog Box

New Name Specifies a new name for the imported dimension style.

AMSUPPRCOLOR Controls the color of suppressed dimensions and DOF symbols

Use AMSUPPRCOLOR to control the color of dimensions with soft dependencies to suppressed features and the color of the DOF symbols on parts with suppressed assembly constraints. Command

AMSUPPRCOLOR

AMSUPPRCOLOR opens the AutoCAD Select Color dialog box. Select a color.

For more information about changing colors, see the AutoCAD User’s Guide. You can also use AMOPTIONS to access AMSUPPRCOLOR. See “AMOPTIONS” on page 232.

AMSUPPRCOLOR

|

333

AMSUPPRESS Suppresses the display of instances in a scene

Use AMSUPPRESS to suppress the display of part instances in a scene-based section view. Browser

In the Scene tab, right-click a part icon and choose Section Suppressed.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Scene ➤ Suppress Sections.

Toolbutton

Suppress Sections

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Scene ➤ Suppress Sections

Command

AMSUPPRESS

NOTE If you use the Browser method, the part is automatically suppressed. If you use any other method, the Instance Suppression dialog box is displayed.

Instance Suppression Dialog Box

Active Scene Displays the active scene name.

334

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Visible Instance Lists all instances in the active scene and indicates whether they are visible in section views.

Select All Selects all instances.

Unselect All Unselects all instances.

Select Temporarily closes the Instance Suppression dialog box so that you can select instances on screen.

Sectioning Controls the suppression of section views of selected instances. Suppress Suppresses section views of selected instances. Unsuppress Unsuppresses section views of selected instances.

AMSUPPRESSFEAT Suppresses features on the active part, either manually or by using an external table

Use AMSUPPRESSFEAT to suppress active part features manually or by using an external spreadsheet. Browser

Right-click a feature icon and choose Suppress.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Features ➤ Suppress Feature or Edit Features ➤ Suppress by Type.

Toolbutton

Suppress Features

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Feature Suppression ➤ Suppress Feature, or Part ➤ Feature Suppression ➤ Suppress by Type

Command

AMSUPPRESSFEAT

Select a feature to suppress or [By type/Table]: Choose an option or select a feature

AMSUPPRESSFEAT

|

335

Select Feature Select feature(s) to suppress. Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Enter n to cycle to the next feature, or press ENTER The highlighted features will be suppressed. Press Enter to continue or [Cancel] : Choose an option or press ENTER Continue Suppresses the highlighted feature(s). Cancel Cancels the command.

By Type Opens the Suppress by Type dialog box.

Table Opens the Table Driven Setup dialog box.

Suppress by Type Dialog Box Use this dialog box to control which features to suppress, for the active part or all parts. Choose the features by type.

Active Part Suppresses specified features on the active part only.

All Local Parts Suppresses specified features on all local parts.

336

|

Chapter 1

Commands

All Except Base Feature Suppresses all features except the base feature on the active part only or on all local parts.

Placed Features Suppresses all placed features of the specified type(s).

Sketched Features Suppresses all sketched features of the specified type(s).

Work Features Suppresses all work features of the specified type(s).

Table Driven Setup Dialog Box Use this dialog box to generate a spreadsheet for features that are already suppressed in your drawing. In the Active Part tab, you can add the suppressed features to an existing spreadsheet by concatenating tables, or you can create a separate spreadsheet to control their suppression. For a complete description of the options in this dialog box, see “AMVARS” on page 380.

Active Part Tab

Layout Controls the Start Cell and Sheet Name and whether the Version Names appear in rows or in a column.

AMSUPPRESSFEAT

|

337

Type Controls whether the table includes variables or suppressed features, or both. If you choose both, the Format option becomes available. Format Specifies whether suppressed features appear in the same table with the variables or in a separate table. Create Opens the Create Table dialog box. Link Opens the Link Table dialog box.

Create Table Dialog Box

Save in Specifies the directory for the file.

File Name Displays the name of the selected file.

Save as Type Displays files with the specified extension type.

338

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Link Table Dialog Box

Look in Specifies the directory for the file.

File Name Displays the name of the selected file.

Files of Type Displays files with the specified extension type.

Locate Searches for the file name displayed in the File name field.

Find File Displays the Browse/Search dialog box. See “AMRECOVER” on page 290.

AMSUPPRESSFEAT

|

339

AMSURFCUT Cuts free-form surface shapes on solid models

Use AMSURFCUT to cut free-form surface shapes from Mechanical Desktop parametric solid models. The surface is associated with a work point so that it can be parametrically repositioned. The surface can be associated to a work point constrained to the active part. If the position of the work point changes, the surface moves, and the part is parametrically updated.

before AMSURFCUT

after AMSURFCUT

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed Features ➤ Surface Cut.

Toolbutton

Surface Cut

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Surface Cut

Command

AMSURFCUT

Type: Cut Select surface or [Type]: Enter t or select a surface

Select Surface Specifies the surface and the work point it is associated to, and then completes the operation. Select work point: Specify a work point Specify portion to remove [Flip/Accept] : Enter f to flip direction or press ENTER

Type Specifies the type of operation, protrusion, or cut. Enter an option [Cut/Protrusion] :

340

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Choose an option or press ENTER

Protrusion Joins the part with the portion of a surface extending above or beyond the part. Cut Cuts material from the part on the specified side of the surface.

AMSURFPROP Calculates the mass properties of surfaces

Use AMSURFPROP to get information that is essential to analyzing the characteristics of a surfaced model. AMSURFPROP calculates the approximate volume and surface area of an enclosed model. The mass properties are useful for determining static and dynamic mechanical behaviors, performing weight and cost analyses, and getting other information from the model.

NOTE AMSURFPROP calculates values for the sum of the selected surfaces. Toolbutton

Surface Mass Properties

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Utilities ➤ Mass Properties

Command

AMSURFPROP

Select surfaces: Select a surface Select surfaces: Select another surface or press ENTER Density=1.0000 Thickness=0.0000 tYpe=Shell Enter an option [Density/Thickness/tYpe] : Choose an option or press ENTER

Calculate Properties Opens the AutoSurf Mass Properties dialog box, which displays information about the selected surface(s). If Type is set to Shell, the mass and area of the selected surfaces and the default density, type, and thickness settings are displayed. If Type is set to Enclosed Model, the mass properties for an enclosed model are displayed.

Density Sets the density for the mass properties calculations. Enter density <1.0000>:

Specify a value

AMSURFPROP

|

341

Thickness Sets the skin thickness of the surface(s). Enter thickness <0.0000>:

Specify a value

Type Specifies the surface type to analyze. Enter a type option [Enclosed model/Shell] <Enclosed model>: Choose an option or press ENTER Shell Specifies that the surface(s) does not enclose a volume. Only area and mass are calculated. Enclosed Model Specifies that the surface(s) encloses a volume.

AutoSurf Mass Properties Dialog Box Displays properties for the selected surface(s).

Shell Type

Properties Shows the mass and area of the selected surface(s). Settings Shows the thickness, density, and type of the selected surface(s).

342

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Enclosed Model Type

Properties Shows the mass, volume, and area of the selected surface(s). Settings Shows the density and type of the selected surface(s). Center of Gravity Displays the center of gravity for the selected surface(s). Principal Moments Displays the moments of inertia that correspond to the principal axes. Principle Axes Displays the three mutually orthogonal coordinate axes that define a coordinate system in which all products of inertia are zero. Moments of Inertia Displays the moments of inertia for the surface(s).

AMSURFPROP

|

343

Products of Inertia Displays the products of inertia for the surface(s). Together, the moments of inertia and products of inertia compose the inertia tensor which is comparable to mass in a mechanical system involving linear motion. The inertia tensor relates the angular momentum of a rigid body about a given axis to its regular velocity. This is necessary in order to perform dynamic analysis on a mechanical system that involves rotation. Radii of Gyration Displays the radii or gyration of the surface(s). A radius of gyration is the effective distance between the mass and the specified X, Y, or Z axis. Write to File Saves the displayed mass properties information in a file. File Opens the Create Mass and Area Properties File dialog box.

Create Mass and Area Properties File Dialog Box

Save in Specifies the directory for the file.

File Name Displays the name of the specified file.

Save as Type Displays files with the specified extension type.

344

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMSURFSYM Adds surface texture finish symbols to drawings

Use AMSURFSYM in Drawing mode to create surface texture symbols that conform to ANSI, BSI, CSN, DIN, GB, ISO, and JIS Drafting Standards. DXF group codes are assigned to surface texture symbols and allow complete data exchange. Surface texture symbols describe variations and tolerances of surface finish. The symbol controls minimum and maximum roughness, waviness, type of production method, and appearance or direction of tool marks.

NOTE Before you create surface texture symbols, choose a Drafting Standard using AMSYMSTD. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Symbols ➤ Surface Texture.

Toolbutton

Surface Texture

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Surface Texture

Command

AMSURFSYM

Surface Texture Symbols with Leaders Select object to attach: Specify an object, or select a point Start Point: Specify a start point for the leader Next Point <Symbol>: Specify an endpoint for the leader Next Point <Symbol>: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

AMSURFSYM

|

345

Surface Texture Symbols without Leaders Select object to attach: Specify an object, or select a point Start Point: Specify a start point for the leader Next Point <Symbol>: Specify an endpoint for the leader Next Point <Symbol>: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER Select Side: Specify a point to orient the symbol

Surface Texture Dialog Box The Surface Texture dialog box contains two tabs, Symbol and Leader.

Symbol Tab

Surface Type Specifies the type of surface referenced by the symbol. ■ ■ ■

Basic surface Removal of material required Removal of material prohibited

Miscellaneous Forces a tail on the surface texture symbol.

346

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Surface Texture Symbol Modifiers In the Symbol tab, you can specify additional values for the surface texture symbol. Modifier

Description

A’

Roughness Average - Maximum Value

A

Roughness Average - Minimum Value

B

Production Method

C’

Roughness Cutoff or Sampling Length

C

Sampling Length

D

Direction of Lay

E

Machining Allowance

F

Roughness Value, Other than Ra

F’

Other Roughness - Minimum Value

Leader Tab

AMSURFSYM

|

347

Segment/Leader Controls the addition or removal of leader segments. Add

Adds leader segments to a symbol. Select object to attach: Specify an object to attach the leader to Start Point: Specify a start point Next Point: Specify an endpoint New leader segment was added.

Remove

Removes leader segments from a symbol. Select leader node or leader segment: Specify a segment to remove Leader segment was deleted.

Arrowhead Displays a palette of arrowhead styles from which to choose.

Symbol on the Leader Readjusts the position of the symbol on the leader.

Standard Properties Click the button in the lower-left corner of the Surface Texture dialog box to open the Standard Properties dialog box, where you can control the symbol properties for the current standard. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

Modifying Surface Texture Symbols When making changes to surface texture symbols, consider the following: ■ ■ ■ ■

348

|

Chapter 1

To retain the associativity of a surface texture symbol with the geometry it is attached to, use AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT to make changes. If you copy a surface texture symbol to the Windows clipboard, pasting it back into a drawing brings it in as a block. Pasting a surface texture symbol into other applications imports it as a .wmf, .dwg, or .bmp file. If you explode a surface texture symbol, the symbol and leader become unassociated lines and text, and you can no longer edit them using AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT.

Commands

AMSWEEP Creates a solid feature from a profile moved along a path

Use AMSWEEP to create a solid feature defined by a planar cross section swept along a 2D or 3D path. Before you use AMSWEEP, you need a path and a profile from which to create the swept feature. The profile sketch plane is dependent on the path sketch plane. See “AM2DPATH” on page 18 and “AM3DPATH” on page 20.

2D sweep

3D sweep

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketched & Work Features ➤ Sweep.

Toolbutton

Sweep

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Sketched Features ➤ Sweep

Command

AMSWEEP

Select profile (sweep cross section):

Specify a cross section

Sweep Dialog Box

AMSWEEP

|

349

Operation Specifies the type of Boolean operation to perform. Base Creates a base feature. Cut Cuts the sweep feature from the base feature. Join Joins the sweep feature to the base feature. Intersect Creates a new feature defined by the intersection between the sweep feature and the base feature. Split Uses the sweep feature to split the base feature.

Body Type Specifies how the sweep is performed. Normal Sweeps the feature normal to the path. Parallel Sweeps the feature parallel to the path.

Termination Specifies the type of termination for the sweep. Path Only Sweeps the profile along a path. To Face Sweeps the profile to a selected face. From to Sweeps a profile from one face to another.

Size Specifies a draft angle to apply to the sweep feature. Draft Angle Uses this value to apply a draft angle to the sweep feature.

NOTE Some options are not available when you are creating a 3D sweep.

350

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMSWEEPSF Creates a surface by sweeping cross sections along one or two rails

Use AMSWEEPSF to create a surface from one or more cross sections and one or two rails (boundary curves). The cross sections are blended as they are swept along the rails.

cross section swept along two rails

You can also sweep a single cross section, using an augmented line as a rail. If you are using more than one rail, the augmented line must be the first rail selected. AMSWEEPSF associates the cross section with the direction of vectors on the augmented line, as it sweeps the cross section along the rail. The new surface maintains the characteristics of the vectors by positioning the cross sections relative to the augmented line vectors.

cross section swept along an augmented line

Valid wires for AMSWEEPSF are lines, arcs, splines, polylines, circles, ellipses, surface wires, and an augmented line. Toolbutton

Swept Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Sweep

Command

AMSWEEPSF

Select cross sections: Select a wire Select cross sections: Select another wire or press ENTER Select rails: Select a wire Select rails: Select another wire or press ENTER

AMSWEEPSF

|

351

Sweep Surface Dialog Box

Orientation Defines the relationship of one or more cross sections to the rail as either Normal, Parallel, or Direction. These options are available only when a single rail is selected. The rail cannot be an augmented line. Normal Holds the selected cross sections perpendicular to the rail as the cross section is swept along the rail. Parallel Holds the selected cross sections parallel to the rail as the cross section is swept along the rail. Direction Specifies the orientation for the sweep. Direction: Viewdir/Wire/X/Y/Z/<Start point>: Choose an option, or specify a start point Start Point

Defines the direction using two points. End point:

Specify a second point

Viewdir

Defines the direction using the current view.

Wire

Defines the direction from a selected wire. Select wire:

X/Y/Z

Select a wire

Defines the direction using the X, Y, or Z axis of the current UCS.

Transition Fits the cross section uniformly between two rails by either stretching or scaling the surface as the distance between the rails fluctuates. This option is not available if only one rail is selected.

352

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Scale Extends or shrinks the entire cross section uniformly, according to the distance between the rail curves. Stretch Extends or shrinks the entire cross section only in the direction across the rails.

Direction Holds the cross sections perpendicular to the rail as the cross section is swept along the rail. Unlike the Normal option, the Direction option uses the reference vector to prevent the cross section from twisting as it is swept along the rail. Choosing the Direction option temporarily closes the Sweep Surface dialog box and displays the vector prompt for holding the selected cross section parallel to the orientation you specify.

NOTE By default, AMSWEEPSF creates a C2 surface. You can override the default by changing AMPFITLEN and AMPFITANG or by imposing a second-order spline on the cross section, using the Order option of AMFITSPLINE.

AMSYMLEADER Adds or removes leaders from existing symbols

Use AMSYMLEADER to attach or remove a leader from an existing symbol. Command

AMSYMLEADER

Enter an option [Add/Remove] : Choose an option or press ENTER

Add Adds a leader to an existing symbol. Select symbol to add leader: Specify a symbol Select object to attach: Specify an object to attach leader Start point: Specify a start point Next point: Specify a second point or press ENTER

Remove Removes a leader from an existing symbol. Select leader node or leader segment: Specify a leader

AMSYMLEADER

|

353

AMSYMSTD Edits and defines drafting standards for symbols

Use AMSYMSTD to specify the drafting standard to apply to the symbols you create in the current drawing. You can define your own standard by changing a base International Standard. Browser

In the Drawing tab, right-click a Layout icon and choose Symbol/BOM Standards.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Symbols ➤ Symbol/BOM Standards.

Toolbutton

Symbol/BOM Standards

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Symbol/BOM Standards

Command

AMSYMSTD

Symbol Standards Dialog Box

The Symbol Standards dialog box controls the symbol standards defined in your drawing. A list shows the available standards. An open-book symbol preceding a standard indicates that it is the current standard. Double-click a standard to make it the current standard. Click the plus sign in front of a standard to expand it. Click the plus sign in front of the standard’s categories to expand them. To access the symbol standard properties, rightclick a standard or any of its categories, and choose Properties from the menu.

354

|

Chapter 1

Commands

The following dialog boxes control symbol properties: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■

The Standard Properties dialog box controls overall symbol properties. Surface Texture Properties determines the availability of surface texture options. Feature Control Frame Properties controls merging, end padding, geometric dimensioning, and tolerancing. Welding Properties determines the availability of welding symbol attributes. Datum Target Properties sets attributes such as linetypes, hatch size, and target point color. BOM Properties sets information such as column, caption, width, data type, size, precision, equivalents, caption alignment, and data alignment for a BOM spreadsheet. Balloon Properties sets attributes such as balloon style, arrow type, text height, color, and the columns to be displayed. Parts List Properties sets attributes such as insert heading, text color and height, frame color, row gap, lines of text, output direction, wrap text, and the columns to be displayed.

NOTE The current drafting standard determines the contents of the symbol properties dialog boxes. All options may not be available.

Standard Properties Dialog Box The dialog box opens with settings that are specific to the current International Drafting Standard.

AMSYMSTD

|

355

Symbol Specifies the overall scale factor and color to use for the symbol.

Text Controls the text style, height, and color used by text added to the symbol.

Leader Controls the arrowhead style, size, and color for the symbol.

Modify Provides access to dialog boxes used to change the properties for the surface texture, feature control frame, welding, datum target, and BOM and Balloon symbols.

Default Sets all values back to the default defined by the current standard.

Surface Texture Properties Dialog Box

Revision Displays the current standard.

Symbol Sets the size of the Machining Prohibited designation.

356

|

Chapter 1

Commands

All Round Sets the all round designation on symbols.

Multiline Sets the use of multiline symbols.

Force Tail Forces a tail on the symbol.

The Direction of Machining Lay Controls machining lay specifications.

Feature Control Frame Properties Dialog Box

Revision Displays the current standard.

Merge Sets the following merging options: ■ ■ ■

Removes duplication of tolerance types with the same data. Removes duplication of tolerance zones with the same data. Removes duplication of merge datum references with the same data.

End Padding Sets spacing to align all similar zones.

AMSYMSTD

|

357

Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing Sets the types of available symbols. Show Symbols for Sets the symbols to be displayed. Select a type from the list, and select the control symbols in the window. Available types are ■ ■

Geometric Characteristic Material Removal Modifier

Style Sets the text style for symbols.

Default Returns all values to the default values for the current standard.

Welding Properties Dialog Box

Revision Displays the current standard.

Identification Line Sets the linetype to use for identification lines.

Gap Sets the gap distance between the identification line and the reference line.

358

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Weld Symbols Specifies the weld symbols to use. Show Symbols for Sets the symbols to be displayed. Select a type from the list, and select the control symbols in the window. Available types are ■ ■ ■

Weld Symbols Contour Symbols Backing Symbols

Default Returns all values to the default values for the current standard.

Datum Target Properties Dialog Box

Revision Displays the current standard.

Target Point Sets the size and color of the target point.

Area Hatch Sets the distance between hatch lines and the hatch angle.

Draw Arrowheads Specifies whether arrowheads are drawn when the symbol is created.

AMSYMSTD

|

359

Hidden Leader Linetype Specifies the linetype to use for hidden leaders.

Boundary Linetype Specifies the linetype to use for the datum target boundary.

Default Returns all values to the default values for the current standard.

BOM Properties Dialog Box

Revision Displays the current standard.

Column Lists the columns defined in the Bill of Material database. Column names in red cannot be modified, as they are used internally by AMBOM. To modify other column names, double-click in the field and enter a new value.

Caption Lists the caption used by AMBOM for each column when a parts list is created. To modify a caption, double-click in the field, and enter a new value.

360

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Width Lists the width of each column used by AMBOM when a parts list is created. To modify a width, double-click in the field, and enter a new value.

Equivalents Lists the equivalent variable names for columns. Double-click to edit.

Data Type Specifies the data type for the selected column. Data types are text, integer, and real.

Size Sets the maximum character size of the data in the selected column.

Precision Sets the precision of the data in the selected column. Available only if the data type is real.

Caption Alignment Specifies the alignment for the caption in each column of the parts list.

Data Alignment Specifies the alignment for the data in each column of the parts list.

Modify Provides access to the Balloon Properties and Standard Properties dialog boxes.

Default Returns all values to the default values for the current standard.

AMSYMSTD

|

361

Balloon Properties Dialog Box

Standard Balloon Controls the type of balloon to use. Available types are ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

362

|

Chapter 1

Circular Open Polygon Circular 2 Text Linear

Commands

Text Height Sets the text height for the balloon text. Color Sets the color of the balloon.

Use Custom Block Uses a user-defined block as the balloon type. Leader to Center of User Block Specifies that the leader is attached to the center of the user-defined block. Leader to Extents of User Block Specifies that the leader is attached to the extents of the user-defined block.

Arrow Type Sets the type of arrow for the balloon leader.

Use Auxiliary Arrow Type Sets the type of arrow for auxiliary leaders.

Columns to Display Determines the information that will display in the balloon.

Default Resets values to the default values.

Apply Applies the settings to use when creating balloons.

Properties for ISO Dialog Box The Properties for ISO dialog box controls the Parts List settings. It contains two tabs, Standard and Custom Blocks.

AMSYMSTD

|

363

Standard Tab

Parts List Heading Controls the settings for the parts list headings. Insert Heading

Controls whether a heading is applied to the parts list and how it is formatted. You can place the heading at the top or bottom of the parts list.

Heading Gap

Controls the size of the gap between the parts list and the heading.

Text Color

Controls the color of the heading text.

Text Height

Controls the height of the heading text.

Title

Controls whether or not a title is used.

Attach Point Controls the location of the point used to attach the parts list to the drawing. Frame Color Controls the color of the parts list frame. Row Gap Controls the spacing between rows. Line Spacing Controls the spacing between lines in a row.

364

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Wrap Text Controls whether the text is wrapped to fit in the columns of the parts list. Printer Setup Opens the Print Setup dialog box. Columns to Display Determines which columns are displayed in the parts list. Default Resets all values to default values. Apply Applies the settings to use when creating parts lists.

Custom Blocks Tab

Use Custom Block for Parts List Specifies whether a custom block is used for a parts list. Block Name Scheme Specifies the name of the custom block to use. Parts List Heading Controls whether a parts list heading is used in the custom block. Attach Point Controls the location of the point used to attach the parts list to the drawing.

AMSYMSTD

|

365

Filter Empty References Filters references that are not attached to a part from the parts list. Evaluate dsk-File Reads a specified data file containing custom block information. Apply Applies the settings to use when creating parts lists.

Print Setup Dialog Box

Margins Sets values for the printer margins, and specifies whether the parts list is centered on the page.

Print Specifies whether captions and headings are printed.

Fonts Tab Controls the fonts to use for the title, heading, and body of the parts list.

Line Tab Controls the line thicknesses to use in the parts list.

Printer Opens the Windows Print Setup dialog box.

366

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Preview Opens the Preview dialog box.

Default Returns all values to the default values for the current standard.

Preview Dialog Box

Previous Displays the previous parts list, if more than one exists in the current drawing.

Next Displays the next parts list, if more than one exists in the current drawing.

Close Closes the dialog box.

AMTEMPLATE Creates, renames, and edits templates for hole notes

Use AMTEMPLATE to create, edit, delete, and rename hole templates. Modified templates can be saved. Text can be imported from a separate file. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Annotation ➤ Hole Note Template.

Toolbutton

Hole Note Template

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Annotation ➤ Hole Note Template

Command

AMTEMPLATE

AMTEMPLATE

|

367

Hole Templates Dialog Box

Templates Lists all currently defined hole note templates. Select the hole note template you want to use.

Name Specifies the name of the current template. To create a new template from an existing one, enter a new name and choose Save.

Save Saves any modifications to the current template or saves a selected template to the specified name.

Delete Deletes the selected template. Standard templates cannot be deleted.

Rename Renames the current template. Standard templates cannot be renamed.

Edit Template Opens the Multiline Text Editor dialog box containing the settings for the current template. Change these values as needed. For more information about using the Multiline Text Editor, see the AutoCAD User’s Guide.

368

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMTOLCONDITION Controls tolerances used by parametric dimensions

Use AMTOLCONDITION in Drawing mode to control tolerances used by parametric dimensions. With AMTOLCONDITION, you can control which tolerances are used to calculate the size of a part. The part and its dimensions are updated in your drawing views. Context Menu

Toleranced Model Edit

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Toleranced Model Edit

Command

AMTOLCONDITION

Transformation of Model Dialog Box

Nominal Size Calculates the part, using the nominal values of its dimensions.

Real Size Calculates the part, using the real values of the dimensions. Dimensions with Control for Each Tolerance Opens the Manual Control of Dimension dialog box, where you can control each tolerance value of the part’s dimensions. Dimensions to Middle of Tolerance Field Uses the middle of the tolerance field to calculate the part’s dimensions.

Manual Selection of Dimensions Controls each tolerance value of selected dimensions, using the Manual Control of Dimension dialog box. Select dimensions: Specify a dimension Select dimensions: Specify another dimension or press ENTER

AMTOLCONDITION

|

369

Manual Control of Dimension Dialog Box

Minimum Uses the lower tolerance value.

Middle Uses the average of the tolerance values.

Maximum Uses the upper tolerance value.

Manual Uses the value you specify in the adjacent field.

AMTRAIL Adds an explosion path to an assembly scene

Use AMTRAIL to create trails from tweaked or exploded parts in scenes. AMTRAIL is parametric and is updated automatically to reflect changes in the model.

unexploded scene

370

|

Chapter 1

Commands

exploded scene with trails added

Browser

In the Scene tab, right-click a part or subassembly icon, and choose New Trail.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose New Trail.

Toolbutton

New Trail

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Exploded Views ➤ New Trail

Command

AMTRAIL

Select reference point on part/subassembly: Specify a point Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Choose an option or press ENTER If you use the Browser method, these prompts do not appear.

Trail Offsets Dialog Box

Offset at Current Position Controls whether a trail overshoots or undershoots the part and by how much, at its tweaked position. You can also specify the distance, by picking points on screen.

Offset at Assembled Position Controls whether a trail overshoots or undershoots the reference part and by how much, at its assembled position. You can also specify the distance, by picking points on screen.

AMTRAIL

|

371

AMTUBE Creates a tubular surface around a selected wire that becomes the axis of the tube

Use AMTUBE to create tubular surfaces. AMTUBE constructs a surface around a wire that represents the axis of the tube. If a line is selected, AMTUBE creates one cylindrical surface; it creates a cylindrical surface at each segment around a 2D polyline and toroidal surfaces at each vertex. If a spline is selected, the tube blends with the curvature of the spline. AMTUBE creates only rational surfaces.

2D spline

line

2D polyline 3D spline

tubes created using different wires

Toolbutton

Tubular Surface

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Tubular

Command

AMTUBE

Select wire: Select a wire Tube diameter <1.0000>: Specify a value or press ENTER If a 2D polyline is selected, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option [Automatic/Manual] <Manual>:

Choose an option

Automatic Creates the bends using the same radius as specified for the tube.

Manual Allows you to specify the radius at each bend. Enter bend radius at point <1.0000>:

372

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Specify a value or press ENTER

AMTWEAK Adjusts the position of a part or subassembly in an exploded assembly scene

Use AMTWEAK to position a part or subassembly in an exploded scene. Each tweak is incremental to the last position of the part or subassembly. The root part of an assembly or a subassembly cannot be tweaked. Its position remains fixed.

before AMTWEAK

after AMTWEAK

Browser

In the Scene tab, right-click a part or subassembly icon, and choose New Tweak.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose New Tweak.

Toolbutton

New Tweak

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Exploded Views ➤ New Tweak

Command

AMTWEAK

Select part/subassembly to tweak: Select a part or subassembly Enter an option [Accept/Next] : Choose an option or press ENTER If you use the Browser method, these prompts do not appear.

Tweak Part/Subassembly Dialog Box

AMTWEAK

|

373

Move Moves the part or subassembly along a line in the direction of the arrow displayed on the selected reference geometry. Enter a negative value to move the geometry in the opposite direction. Select reference geometry: Select a part Enter distance <0.0000>: Specify a value

Rotate Rotates the part or subassembly about the axis of the reference geometry. Select reference geometry: Select a part Enter angle of rotation <0>: Specify a value

Transform Applies a 3D transformation to the part or subassembly, using distances and angles to precisely position the part of subassembly in 3D space. Enter an option [eXit/Move/Rotate] <Move>:

Choose an option or press ENTER

Move Begins the transformation by specifying a distance to move the part or subassembly. Define direction and length. Specify start point or [Viewdir/Wire/X/Y/Z]: Choose an option or specify a point Start Point

Defines the direction using two points. Specify end point:

Specify a second point

Viewdir

Defines the direction using the current view.

Wire

Defines the direction from a selected wire. Select wire to define direction: Select a wire

X/Y/Z

Defines the direction using the X, Y, or Z axis of the current UCS. Enter length <1.0000>: Specify a value Enter an option [Accept/Flip] : Enter f or press ENTER Enter an option [eXit/Move/Rotate] <Move>: Choose an option or press ENTER

374

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Rotate Begins the transformation by specifying a rotation for the selected part or subassembly about a specified point in a specified direction. Specify center of rotation: Specify a point Define direction. Specify start point or [Viewdir/Wire/X/Y/Z]: Choose an option or specify a point Enter angle of rotation <0>: Specify a value Enter an option [eXit/Move/Rotate] : Choose an option or press ENTER

NOTE For more information about creating 3D transformations, see the AutoCAD User’s Guide.

AMUCSFACE Aligns the UCS with a selected face

Use AMUCSFACE to align the current UCS with a selected face. Toolbutton

UCS on Face

Command

AMUCSFACE

Select planar face: Specify a face Enter an option [Accept/Next] :

Choose an option or press ENTER

AMUCSPERP Creates a UCS perpendicular to a line

Use AMUCSPERP to create a UCS perpendicular to a selected line. You have the option of creating a sketch plane on the new UCS. Toolbutton

UCS Perpendicular

Command

AMUCSPERP

Select entity: Specify a line Create Sketch plane to current UCS? [Yes/No] : Choose an option or press ENTER

AMUCSFACE

|

375

AMUNSPLINE Converts a spline to an angular or smooth polyline

Use AMUNSPLINE to break down splines into approximations or interpolation points (fit points) or to convert splines directly into polylines that are fit to a specific tolerance. AMUNSPLINE creates smooth polylines for various applications, such as producing input for CAM (computer-aided manufacturing) equipment that doesn’t accept splines. A method called presplining is used. Presplining converts a polyline to a spline and then back to a polyline. The conversion and reconversion smooths the polyline without the polyline losing its character.

To prespline a polyline, enter raw, digitized 3D data in the form of a polyline through an Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES) translator, or create polylines in your current drawing. Next, convert the polyline to a spline using a loose tolerance. Finally, use AMUNSPLINE to reconvert the spline into a smooth version of the original polyline.

NOTE The conversion option isn’t displayed if the original fit points have been lost. Editing with AutoCAD grips destroys the original fit points of a spline. Toolbutton

Unspline

Desktop Menu

Surface ➤ Edit Wireframe ➤ Unspline

Command

AMUNSPLINE

Select splines: Select a spline Select splines: Select another spline or press ENTER Enter tolerance or [Original fit points] <0.0010>: Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER

Tolerance Specifies the tolerance to use when converting the spline. The smaller the tolerance, the more closely the smooth polyline will follow the path of the spline.

Original Fit Points Converts the spline to its original interpolation or fit points. This option creates an unsmoothed polyline passing through each fit point of the spline. This option is not available if the original fit points have been lost.

376

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMUNSUPPRESSFEAT Unsuppresses suppressed part features

Use AMUNSUPPRESSFEAT to unsuppress features that have been suppressed manually. You cannot use this command to unsuppress table driven (versioned) suppressed features. Unsuppressing manually suppressed features from the Browser does not require selection. Simply right-click the icon and choose Unsuppress. If you unsuppress features from the command line, menu, or toolbar, you must specify the feature, as it cannot be selected during the command process. Alternately, you can use AMREPLAY to manually unsuppress individual features. Browser

Right-click a suppressed feature and choose Unsuppress.

Context Menu

Right-click the graphics area and choose Edit Features ➤ Unsuppress, or Edit Features ➤ Unsuppress by Type.

Toolbutton

Unsuppress Features

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Feature Suppression ➤ Unsuppress Feature, or Part ➤ Feature Suppression ➤ Unsuppress by Type

Command

AMUNSUPPRESSFEAT

Enter an option [By type/All] : Choose an option, or press ENTER

By Type Unsuppresses features by type. Opens the Unsuppress by Type dialog box.

All Unsuppresses all suppressed features for the active part, all parts, or a selected part. Enter an option [Active part/aLl parts/select Part] <select Part>: Choose an option, or press ENTER to continue Select Part Unsuppresses features for a selected part. Active Part Unsuppresses all suppressed features on the active part. All Parts Unsuppresses all suppressed features in your drawing.

AMUNSUPPRESSFEAT

|

377

Unsuppress by Type Dialog Box

Active Part Unsuppresses specified features on the active part only.

All Local Parts Unsuppresses specified features on all local parts.

All Except Base Feature Unsuppresses all features except the base feature on either the active part or all local parts.

Placed Features Unsuppresses all placed features of the specified type(s).

Sketched Features Unsuppresses all sketched features of the specified type(s).

Work Features Unsuppresses all work features of the specified type(s).

378

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMUPDATE Regenerates the active part, assembly, scene, or drawing view to reflect new dimensions, constraints, and changes to existing features

Use AMUPDATE to update parts, links, assemblies, scenes, and drawing views after changes have been made to features, constraints, or dimensions. AMUPDATE recalculates the model to reflect the modifications.

Update Part Browser

Click the Update Part icon.

Toolbutton

Update Part

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Update Part

Command

AMUPDATE

Enter an option [active Part/Assembly/aLl parts/linKs] : Press ENTER

Update Links Command

AMUPDATE

Enter an option [active Part/Assembly/aLl parts/linKs] : Enter k Variables have been updated for all local parts.

Update Assembly Browser

Click the Update Assembly icon.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Update Assembly.

Toolbutton

Update Assembly

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Update Assembly

Command

AMUPDATE

Enter an option [active Part/Assembly/aLl parts/linKs] : Enter a

AMUPDATE

|

379

Update Scene Browser

Click the Update Scene icon.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Update Scene.

Toolbutton

Update Scene

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Update Scene

Command

AMUPDATE

Enter an option [Assembly/Part/Scene] <Part>: Enter s Enter scene name to activate or [?] <SCENE1>: Specify a scene, choose ? for a list, or press ENTER

Update Drawing View Browser

Click the Update View icon.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Update View.

Toolbutton

Update View

Desktop Menu

Drawing ➤ Update View

Command

AMUPDATE

Enter an option [active Part/View/aLl parts] : Enter v The option to update the current layout will update all views that are on it. Select view to update [All layouts/current Layout]: Choose an option or select a view

AMVARS Creates and manages active part and global design variables and provides table driven parts by linking to Microsoft® Excel spreadsheets

Use AMVARS to control the use of global and active part design variables. You use design variables to create parametric equations for the dimensions controlling your features and parts. You also use them in an external spreadsheet to control table driven parts. With AMVARS you can perform a full search and replace when renaming or deleting active part and global design variables, automatically update a linked .prm or Excel spreadsheet file when saving the drawing file, and move active part design variables to global design variables to use in more than one part. You can also specify feature suppression in an external spreadsheet for table driven parts.

380

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Browser

In the Model tab, right-click a part icon and choose Design Variables.

Toolbutton

Design Variables

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Design Variables

Command

AMVARS

Design Variables Dialog Box The Design Variables dialog box contains two tabs, Active Part and Global.

Active Part Tab Provides settings to create and control active part design variables.

New Creates a new active part design variable. Delete Deletes a selected active part design variable. Purge Deletes all unused active part design variables. Table Driven (T) Provides options for setup and control of table driven parts. Active Version

Selects which version of a table driven part is active.

Setup

Opens the Table Driven Setup dialog box.

AMVARS

|

381

Move to Global Provides options for moving active part design variables to global design variables. Selected

Moves highlighted active part design variables to global design variables.

Referenced

Moves referenced active part design variables to global design variables.

All

Moves all active part design variables to global design variables.

Table Driven File Name Displays the name of the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet driving the active part. When you create design variables that will be assigned to a spreadsheet, to externally drive versions of a part, set up the table from the Design Variables dialog box.

Global Variables Tab Provides settings to create and control global design variables.

The Global Variables tab contains options for controlling global design variables. These options are identical to the Active Part tab, with the following exceptions.

382

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Global Variable File (.prm) Controls external parameter files. Import

Imports an external parameter file.

Link

Links an external parameter file to the current drawing.

Export

Exports global design variables to an external parameter file.

Unlink

Unlinks a linked parameter file.

Copy to Active Part Copies specified design variables to the active part. Selected

Copies highlighted global design variables to active part design variables.

Referenced

Copies referenced global design variables to active part design variables.

All

Copies all global design variables to active part design variables.

Table Driven Setup Dialog Box This dialog box controls the external spreadsheets used to drive part versions in your drawing.

Active Part Tab Contains settings to create and control external spreadsheets using Active Part design variables.

AMVARS

|

383

Layout Controls how the spreadsheet will be laid out, which cell to use as the start cell, its orientation, and name. Active Version Controls which version in the table is active in the drawing. Type Controls the type of information to use when the spreadsheet is generated. Variables

Uses design variables to create the table.

Feature Suppression

Uses currently suppressed features to create the table. If no features are suppressed, all features are added by default.

Both

Uses both variables and currently suppressed features to create the table.

Format Controls the format of the spreadsheet. Concatenate Tables

Creates one table containing both variables and suppressed features.

Separate Tables

Creates a separate table for variables and suppressed features.

Global Variables Tab Contains settings to create and control external spreadsheets using global design variables.

384

|

Chapter 1

Commands

The Global Variables tab contains the same controls as the Active Part tab, except that Type and Format are not available. Both tabs contain the following options. Create Creates a new spreadsheet file. Link Links an existing spreadsheet file to the drawing. Append Appends new information to an existing spreadsheet file. Edit Edits an existing spreadsheet file. Update Link Updates the link to an existing spreadsheet file. Unlink Unlinks an existing spreadsheet file from the drawing.

AMVIEW Controls viewing in Model mode

Use AMVIEW to rotate view orientation, fit visible geometry to the screen, and set the view to a plan view of the current sketch. The coordinate system is established irrespective of the viewpoint location. The option you select remains in effect until you choose another. Command

AMVIEW

Enter an option [Angle/Down/eXit/Left/Right/Sketch/Up] : Choose an option or press ENTER

Angle Specifies the angle to rotate a view. Specify rotation angle <15>:

Specify a value

AMVIEW

|

385

Down Rotates the view downward, in increments specified by Angle.

Exit Exits the command.

Fit Fits the view to the current viewport and exits the command.

Left Rotates the view to the left, in increments specified by Angle.

Right Rotates the view to the right, in increments specified by Angle.

Sketch Displays a plan view of the current sketch and exits the command.

Up Rotates the view upward, in increments specified by Angle.

AMVIEWOUT Converts Mechanical Desktop drawing views to AutoCAD 2D data

Use AMVIEWOUT to convert views created in Drawing mode into 2D AutoCAD data and to write them to a new drawing file. Only views created with the command AMDWGVIEW are converted. After conversion, all objects in the file are AutoCAD 2D objects and can be manipulated with AutoCAD commands. You can select which views to convert.

386

|

Browser

Right-click a view icon and choose Export View.

Desktop Menu

Drawing ➤ Export View

Command

AMVIEWOUT

Chapter 1

Commands

Export Drawing Views to AutoCAD Dialog Box

Select a file name in the dialog box and choose Save. n drawing views found. Select objects, or for all: Select a view or press ENTER Select objects: Select another view or press ENTER

AMVISIBLE Controls the visibility of work features, parts, assemblies, scenes, drawings, and geometric objects

Use AMVISIBLE to control the visibility of work features, parts and subassemblies, DOF and COG symbols, individual geometry, balloons, parts lists, reference and parametric dimensions, and drawing view edges.

Controlling Part Visibility Browser

Click the Visible icon.

Toolbutton

Part Visibility

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Part Visibility

Command

AMVISIBLE

AMVISIBLE

|

387

Controlling Assembly Visibility Browser

Click the Visible icon.

Toolbutton

Assembly Visibility

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Assembly Visibility

Command

AMVISIBLE

Controlling Scene Visibility Browser

Click the Visible icon.

Toolbutton

Scene Visibility

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Scene Visibility

Command

AMVISIBLE

Controlling Drawing Visibility Browser

Click the Visible icon.

Toolbutton

Drawing Visibility

Desktop Menu

Drawing ➤ Drawing Visibility

Command

AMVISIBLE

Desktop Visibility Dialog Box The Desktop Visibility dialog box contains three tabs: Part, Assembly, and Objects.

388

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Part Tab

Hide Hides specified objects. Unhide Unhides specified objects. Objects Controls the visibility of work features and cut lines. Select Choose this option to specify which objects to hide or unhide by selecting them on screen. Except If you select All, this option allows you to exclude objects by selecting them on screen.

AMVISIBLE

|

389

Assembly Tab

Hide Hides specified objects. Unhide Unhides specified objects. Objects Controls the visibility of work features, parts, subassemblies, and COG and DOF symbols. Work Objects Controls the visibility of work features. Select Choose this option to specify which objects to hide or unhide by selecting them on screen. Except If you select All, this option allows you to exclude objects by selecting them on screen.

390

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Objects Tab

Hide Hides specified objects. Unhide Unhides specified objects. Objects Controls the visibility of geometry. Properties Controls the visibility of objects of a specific color, linetype, or layer. Select Choose this option to specify which objects to hide or unhide by selecting them on screen. Except If you select All, this option allows you to exclude objects by selecting them on screen.

AMVISIBLE

|

391

Scene Tab

Hide Hides specified objects. Unhide Unhides specified objects. Objects Controls the visibility of parts, subassemblies, and trails. Select Choose this option to specify which objects to hide or unhide by selecting them on screen. Except If you select All, this option allows you to exclude objects by selecting them on screen.

392

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Drawing Tab

Hide Hides specified objects. Unhide Unhides specified objects. Objects Controls the visibility of balloons, parts lists, parametric and reference dimensions, and viewport edges. Select Choose this option to specify which objects to hide or unhide by selecting them on screen. Except If you select All, this option allows you to exclude objects by selecting them on screen.

AMVISIBLE

|

393

AMVRMLOUT Converts selected objects to VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language) to be viewed on a Web page

Use AMVRMLOUT to export selected objects to Virtual Reality Modeling Language so that they can be displayed on Web pages. Desktop Menu

File ➤ Export ➤ Desktop VRML

Command

AMVRMLOUT

Select objects: Select an object Select objects: Select another object or press ENTER The Save File dialog box is displayed. Specify a location and a name for the file, and choose OK.

AMWELDSYM Creates a welding symbol

Use AMWELDSYM to create welding symbols that conform to international drafting standards. DXF group codes are assigned to welding symbols and allow complete data exchange.

394

|

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Symbols ➤ Welding.

Toolbutton

Welding Symbol

Desktop Menu

Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Welding

Command

AMWELDSYM

Chapter 1

Commands

Select object to attach: Specify an object Start Point: Specify a start point for the leader Next Point <Symbol>: Specify an endpoint for the leader Next Point <Symbol>: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

Weld Symbol Dialog Box The Weld Symbol dialog box controls the settings for welding symbols. The dialog box contains four tabs: General, Arrow Side, Other Side, and Leader.

General Tab

Orientation Controls the location and orientation (left or right) of the welding symbol. Stagger Offsets dual fillet welds to indicate staggered welds. This option is available only when fillet welds are applied to both sides of the symbol. Symbol Controls the number of reference lines added to the symbol. Additional Controls In the lower section of the General tab, you can add a tail, a field weld symbol, an all round symbol, and notes for the weld symbol. You can also set the symbols to use on either side of the arrow. Hold your cursor over an area, and wait for the tooltip to be displayed for a description.

AMWELDSYM

|

395

Arrow Side Tab

The contents of this tab vary, depending on the type of weld you have specified. Specify values for the fields that apply.

Other Side Tab

The contents of this tab vary, depending on the type of weld you have specified. Specify values for the fields that apply.

396

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Leader Tab

Segment/Leader Controls the addition and removal of leader segments. Arrowhead Displays a palette of arrowhead styles. Attach Changes geometry association.

Standard Properties Click the button in the lower-left corner of the Surface Texture dialog box to access the Standard Properties dialog box, where you can control the symbol properties for the current standard. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

Modifying Welding Symbols When making changes to welding symbols, consider the following: ■ ■ ■ ■

To retain the associativity of a welding symbol with the geometry it is attached to, use AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT to make changes. If you copy a welding symbol to the Windows clipboard, pasting it back into a drawing brings it in as a block. Pasting a welding symbol into other applications imports it as a .wmf, .dwg, or .bmp file. If you explode a welding symbol, the symbol and leader become unassociated lines and text, and you can no longer edit them using AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT.

AMWELDSYM

|

397

AMWHEREUSED Shows where a part or subassembly definition is used

Use AMWHEREUSED to display the location of a specified part or subassembly definition. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Assembly ➤ Where Used.

Toolbutton

Where Used

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ Where Used

Command

AMWHEREUSED

Part/Subassembly Locations Dialog Box

Parts/Subassemblies Lists the parts and subassemblies in the current file. Select the definition you want located.

Highlight Specifies whether to highlight the specified instances.

List Specifies whether or not to list the locations of the instances on the command line.

398

|

Chapter 1

Commands

File Out Writes the information to an external file.

File Opens the Output File dialog box, where you specify a file name for the external file.

AMWORKAXIS Creates a work axis at the centerline of a cylindrical, conical, or toroidal surface

Use AMWORKAXIS to create a work axis. You can create a work axis by selecting an existing circular edge or by sketching its position on the current sketch plane. You can dimension or constrain new sketches to a work axis and create a work plane through it, to use in sketch and feature creation. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketched & Work Features ➤ Work Axis.

Toolbutton

Work Axis

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Work Features ➤ Work Axis

Command

AMWORKAXIS

Select cylinder, cone, torus or [Sketch]: Choose an option or select a cylindrical edge

Sketch Draws a two-point line on the current sketch plane. Specify first point: Specify first point for axis Specify second point: Specify second point for axis

AMWORKAXIS

|

399

AMWORKPLN Creates a work plane at a specified location

Use AMWORKPLN to define a parametric work plane with a combination of modifiers selected from a dialog box. In most cases, you must select a modifier from each column. After you have selected an option in one column, inappropriate combinations are dimmed in the other column. Four additional options create nonparametric work planes: UCS, World Xy, World Yz, and World Xz. After you select the modifiers to define the work plane, you specify geometry to orient it. The Create Sketch Plane option is selected to orient the sketch plane on the new work plane automatically. To override the default, clear the check box. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketched & Work Features ➤ Work Plane.

Toolbutton

Work Plane

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Work Features ➤ Work Plane

Command

AMWORKPLN

Work Plane Feature Dialog Box

400

|

Chapter 1

Commands

1st Modifier Controls the type of geometry to select for the first modifier. On Edge/Axis Creates a work plane on an existing part edge or work axis. Select work axis, straight edge or [worldX/worldY/worldZ]: Choose an option, or select a work axis or a part edge WorldX

Uses the X axis of the World Coordinate System (WCS) as the first edge.

WorldY

Uses the Y axis of the WCS as the first edge.

WorldZ

Uses the Z axis of the WCS as the first edge.

On Vertex Creates a work plane at a selected vertex or datum point. Select vertex or datum point:

Select a vertex or a datum point

Tangent Creates a work plane tangent to a cylindrical or conical face. Select cylindrical or conical face: Select a cylindrical or a conical face Planar Parallel Creates a work plane parallel to an existing work plane or planar face. Select work plane, planar face or [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]: Select an existing work plane or planar face WorldX

Uses the X axis of the WCS as the first edge.

WorldY

Uses the Y axis of the WCS as the first edge.

WorldZ

Uses the Z axis of the WCS as the first edge.

Planar Normal Creates a work plane perpendicular to an existing work plane or planar face. Select work plane, planar face or [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]: Choose an option, or select the edge of a work plane or planar face. WorldX

Uses the X axis of the WCS as the first edge.

WorldY

Uses the Y axis of the WCS as the first edge.

WorldZ

Uses the Z axis of the WCS as the first edge.

AMWORKPLN

|

401

Normal to Start Creates a work plane perpendicular to the start point of a sketched work axis, a 2D path, or a 3D path. This option does not require a second modifier. Select end point: Select a sketched work axis, a 2D path, or a 3D path On UCS Creates a work plane using the XY plane of the current UCS. This option does not require a second modifier. On World XY Creates a work plane using the XY plane of the WCS. This option does not require a second modifier. On World YZ Creates a work plane using the YZ plane of the WCS. This option does not require a second modifier. On World XZ Creates a work plane using the XZ plane of the WCS. This option does not require a second modifier.

2nd Modifier Controls the type of geometry to select for the second modifier. On Edge/Axis Creates a work plane on an existing part edge or work axis. Select work axis, straight edge or [worldX/worldY/worldZ]: Choose an option, or select a work axis or a part edge WorldX

Uses the X axis of the WCS as the second edge.

WorldY

Uses the Y axis of the WCS as the second edge.

WorldZ

Uses the Z axis of the WCS as the second edge.

On Vertex Creates a work plane at a selected vertex. Select vertex:

Select a vertex

Tangent Creates a work plane tangent to a cylindrical or conical face. Select cylindrical or conical face: Select a cylindrical or a conical face

402

|

Chapter 1

Commands

Planar Parallel Creates a work plane parallel to an existing work plane or planar face. Select work plane, planar face or [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]: Select an existing work plane or planar face WorldX

Uses the X axis of the WCS as the second edge.

WorldY

Uses the Y axis of the WCS as the second edge.

WorldZ

Uses the Z axis of the WCS as the second edge.

Planar Normal Creates a work plane perpendicular to an existing work plane or planar face. Select work plane, planar face or [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]: Choose an option, or select the edge of a work plane or planar face. WorldX

Uses the X axis of the WCS as the second edge.

WorldY

Uses the Y axis of the WCS as the second edge.

WorldZ

Uses the Z axis of the WCS as the second edge.

Planar Angle Creates a work plane at a specified angle from an existing work plane or planar face. On 3 Vertices Creates a work plane defined by three vertices. Select vertex: Select vertex: Select vertex:

Select first vertex Select second vertex Select third vertex

Offset Creates a work plane offset a specified distance from a selected work plane or planar face. Angle Creates a work plane at a specified angle from a selected work plane or planar face.

Create Sketch Plane Specifies whether a sketch plane is created on the work plane.

AMWORKPLN

|

403

AMWORKPT Creates work points on the active sketch plane

Use AMWORKPT to create work point features on the active sketch plane. Work points are useful for placing holes in parts, for serving as the center of a polar array, and as a parametric point for constraining surfaces. To create a work point, create a sketch plane and place the work point; then dimension and constrain the work point. Points appear as three perpendicular lines originating from the point center. Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketched & Work Features ➤ Work Point.

Toolbutton

Work Point

Desktop Menu

Part ➤ Work Features ➤ Work Point

Command

AMWORKPT

Workpoint will be placed on the current sketch plane. Specify the location of the workpoint: Specify a location

AMXFACTOR Controls the explosion factor for scenes

Use AMXFACTOR to specify an overall explosion factor for a scene or to apply specific explosion factors to parts in an assembly.

Setting a Scene Explosion Factor

404

|

Browser

In the Scene tab, right-click a scene icon and choose Explode Factor.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Scene Explosion Factor.

Toolbutton

Scene Explosion Factor

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Exploded Views ➤ Scene Explosion Factor

Command

AMXFACTOR

Chapter 1

Commands

Select part or subassembly or [sCene]: Enter c Enter scene name to change or [?] <SCENE1>: Enter ? for a list, specify a name, or press ENTER Enter new explosion factor for "SCENE1" or [Reset] <0.0000>: Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER If you choose the Browser method, the first prompt is not displayed.

Setting a Part or Subassembly Explosion Factor Browser

In the Scene tab, right-click a part or subassembly icon and choose Explode Factor.

Context Menu

In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part Explosion Factor.

Toolbutton

Part or Subassembly Explosion Factor

Desktop Menu

Assembly ➤ Exploded Views ➤ Part Explosion Factor

Command

AMXFACTOR

Select part or subassembly [sCene]: Specify a part or subassembly Enter new explosion factor for "PART1_1" [Reset] <0.0000>: Choose an option, specify a value, or press ENTER If you choose the Browser method, the first prompt is not displayed.

Reset Resets the explosion factor to the default value.

Using the Browser to Set Explosion Factors If you choose the Browser method to set explosion factors, the Explode Factor dialog box appears. Specify a value in the dialog box.

Explode Factor Dialog Box

Explode Factor Sets the explosion factor for the specified scene, part, or subassembly. The value is the distance, in model units, by which the part(s) will be separated.

AMXFACTOR

|

405

AMXREFCONVERT Simplifies the names of layers, blocks, linetypes, text styles, dimension styles, and multiline styles that are imported with external references and remain after the external references have been localized

Use AMXREFCONVERT to simplify the names of layers, blocks, linetypes, text styles, dimension styles, and multiline styles that are imported with external references and remain after the external references have been localized. AMXREFCONVERT will attempt to strip the drawingname$0$ that is appended to names when a drawing is externally referenced. Unreferenced symbols are purged from the drawing.

Command

406

|

Chapter 1

Commands

AMXREFCONVERT

System Variables

2

In This Chapter

This chapter provides descriptions of Mechanical

■ Using system variables

Desktop® system variables in alphabetical order. System variables contain the settings (or values) for the Mechanical Desktop operating environment and for some of its commands. Each system variable has an associated type: integer, real, or text string. To examine or change a value, type the variable name on the command line.

407

System Variables Variable

Characteristic

Description

ACISOUTVER

Type: Integer Initial value: 0

Sets the value for exporting SAT file data to a specific ACIS version. Possible values: 0 - Version of ACIS currently in use 15 - ACIS 1.5 16 - ACIS 1.6 17 - ACIS 1.7 18 - ACIS 1.8 20 - ACIS 2.0 21 - ACIS 2.1 30 - ACIS 3.0 40 - ACIS 4.0 50 - ACIS 5.0

AMANNOTEPRESERVE

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls whether annotations that do not update are deleted or saved to a group. Occasionally, dimensions or other annotations, do not update correctly. Possible values: 0 - Orphaned objects are deleted 1 - Orphaned objects are placed in an AutoCAD® group

AMAUTOASSEMBLE

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Solves each newly created constraint and updates the assembly. If AMAUTOASSEMBLE is turned off, the constraint is solved to check that it is valid, but the assembly is not updated. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

AMAUTOCL

Type: Integer Initial value: 0

Controls whether automatic centerlines are created at view creation for the following features. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

AMAUTODIMARRANGE Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls the automatic arrangement of parametric dimensions. Possible values: 0 - Off (do not automatically arrange parametric dimensions) 1 - On (automatically arrange parametric dimensions)

408

|

Chapter 2

System Variables

System Variables (continued) Variable

Characteristic

Description

AMAUTOLOCKSCN

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls whether scenes can be locked. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

AMBLENDTOL

Type: Real Initial value: 0.0100

Avoids the creation of CO breaks when surfaces and splines are joined in surface modeling. Possible values: [0.0001 to Inf]

AMCLCM

Type: Real Initial value: 0.11

Controls the length of centerline annotations. Possible values: Any positive number

AMCLFEAT

Type: Integer Initial value: 5 (circular extrusions and holes)

Controls whether automatic centerlines are generated and for which features. Possible values: 0 - No features 1 - Holes 2 - Fillets 4 - Circular extrusions NOTE To obtain combinations of settings, simply add the values. For example, to create centerlines for just holes and fillets, set AMCLFEAT=3.

AMCLGAP

Type: Real Initial value: 0.156

Controls gaps in centerline annotations. Possible values: Any positive number

AMCLOSHT

Type: Real Initial value: 0.11

Controls the length of centerline overshoot beyond an object. Possible values: Any positive number

AMCLPAR

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls whether the overshoot line length of a centerline parametrically changes during updates. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

System Variables

|

409

System Variables (continued) Variable

Characteristic

Description

AMCLVIEW

Type: Integer Initial Value: 63 (all except ISO)

Defines which view types automatic centerlines should be generated for. Possible values: 0 - No views 1 - Base views 2 - Ortho views 4 - Auxiliary views 8 - Broken views 16 - Detail views 32 - Section views 64 - Isometric views NOTE To obtain combinations of settings, simply add the values. For example, to create centerlines for Ortho and detail views, set AMCLVIEW=18.

AMCMDDIM

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls if dimensions can be selected when editing sketches. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

AMCOMPSV

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls compressed save format for Mechanical Desktop data within a file. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

AMCONDSPSZ

Type: Integer Initial value: 5

Controls the height of displayed constraints in a sketch. Possible values: 1 to 19

410

|

Chapter 2

System Variables

System Variables (continued) Variable

Characteristic

Description

AMDWGCOLOR

Type: Integer Initial value: 0

Sets the color of part edges and hatch patterns in drawing views. Controls whether hatch patterns, visible edges, hidden edges, or all edge types use the color of the model, or the color of the layer where they reside. Possible values: 0 - Visible edge, hidden edge, and hatch colors come from their layers. 1 - Visible edge color comes from the model; hidden edge and hatch color come from their layers. 2 - Hidden edge color comes from the model; visible edge and hatch color come from their layers. 3 - Visible and hidden edge colors come from the model; hatch color comes from its layer. 4 - Hatch color comes from the model; visible and hidden edge colors come from their layers. 5 - Visible edge and hatch colors come from the model; hidden edge color comes from their layers. 6 - Hidden edge and hatch colors come from the model; visible edge color comes from its layer. 7 - Visible edge, hidden edge, and hatch colors come from the model.

AMEXTREFDIM

Type: Integer Initial value: 0

Controls whether or not parametric dimensions on external parts will be shown as reference dimensions. Possible values: 0 - Do not display parametric dimensions on external parts as reference dimensions 1 - Display parametric dimensions on external parts as reference dimensions

AMGRPREFIX

Type: String Initial value: ASG

Specifies the prefix name for groups. Possible values: Any 3 characters

AMHATCHISO

Type: Integer Initial value: 0

Controls the automatic calculation of hatch patterns in an ISO view. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On 2 - Hide obscured

AMHIDEZERODIM

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Hides the display of zero-length parametric dimensions. Possible values: 0 - Do not hide zero-length parametric dimensions 1 - Hide zero-length parametric dimensions

System Variables

|

411

System Variables (continued) Variable

Characteristic

Description

AMHLCALC

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Suppresses or activates hidden line calculations in drawing views. Possible values: 0123-

AMINSERTABS

Type: Integer Initial value: 0

Hidden lines are not removed Removes hidden lines with full occlusion Removes hidden lines with no occlusion Removes hidden lines with no occlusion on splines

Controls the insertion point of parts or subassemblies inserted into the current file. Possible values: 0 - Center of geometry 1 - Insertion point of external file

AMINTERPOLY

Type: Integer Initial value: 0

Determines if a polyline is created at the intersection between two surfaces. Possible values: 0 - Polyline is not created 1 - Polyline is created

AMJOINGAP

Type: Real Initial value: 0.0100

Determines the gap tolerance between two endpoints of wires and surfaces in surface modeling. Possible values: [0.0001 to Inf]

AMLINETHICK

Type: Real Initial value: .0275 mm

Sets the line thickness used in calculating thread annotation for ISO and DIN standards. Possible values: No limits

AMPAGELEN

Type: Integer Initial value: 25

Controls the number of lines output to the text window before pausing. Possible values: [0 to 1000]

AMPFITANG

Type: Real Initial value: 150

Set the value for finding sharp corners in polylines. New splines and surfaces created from polylines will be broken at any angle less than this value. Possible values: [0 to 180] degrees

412

|

Chapter 2

System Variables

System Variables (continued) Variable

Characteristic

Description

AMPFITLEN

Type: Real Initial value: Inf

Sets the value for finding flat polyline segments. New splines and surfaces created from polylines will lie exactly flat against any polyline segment whose length is greater than this value. Possible values: [0.0 to Inf]

AMPFITTOL

Type: Real Initial value: 0.0100

Controls the tolerance for fitting a spline to a polyline. Possible values: [0.0001 to Inf]

AMPROJOUTPUT

Type: Integer Initial value: 2

Controls the output created when a wire is projected onto a surface. Possible values: 0 - Creates an augmented line 1 - Creates a polyline 2 - Trims the surface

AMPROJTYPE

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls the drawing view projection method for orthographic or ancillary views. Possible values: 0 - Uses first angle projection 1 - Uses third angle projection

AMPSNAPCOORDO

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls the display of on-screen coordinates. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

AMREUSEDIM

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Toggles automatic display of parametric dimensions in drawing views. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

AMRULEMODE

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls whether constraints are automatically applied. Possible values: 0 - Off (constraint rules not applied) 1 - On (constraint rules applied)

System Variables

|

413

System Variables (continued) Variable

Characteristic

Description

AMSCENEUPDATE

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls automatic scene updates. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

AMSECLTYPE

Type: String Initial value: Phantom2

Sets the linetype for section lines in the parent view of a cross section. Possible values: Any valid AutoCAD linetype

AMSECTIONDIM

Type: Integer Initial value: 0

Controls if parametric dimensions are placed in section views. May also be set as an option in AMOPTIONS. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

AMSELDYNAMIC

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls the dynamic highlighting of all selectable entities. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

AMSELTIPS

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls the dynamic display of help tips. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

AMSFDISPMODE

Type: String Initial value: On

Controls the linetype of the surface display lines. Possible values: On - Use ASULTYPE and ASVLTYPE Off - Use surface’s default linetype

AMSFTOL

Type: Real Initial value: 0.001

Controls the surface accuracy tolerance. Possible values: [0.0001 to Inf]

414

|

Chapter 2

System Variables

System Variables (continued) Variable

Characteristic

Description

AMSINGLEHATLAY

Type: Integer Initial value: 0

If set to 0 (On), Mechanical Desktop allows you to place all hatch patterns on a single layer rather than individual layers. This must be a preset layer that has already been created. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

AMSKANGTOL

Type: Real Initial value: 4

Controls the tolerance angle for constraints. Possible values: [.001 to 10.0]

AMSKMODE

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls whether a sketch is interpreted as precise or rough. Possible values: 0 - Off (precise sketch) 1 - On (rough sketch)

AMSKSTYLE

Type: String Initial value: CONT*

Controls AutoCAD linetypes used for sketch boundaries. Possible values: All defined linetypes (Linetype must be entered in upper case.)

AMSTDDTL

Type: String Initial value: ANSI

Controls the current drafting standard to apply when Mechanical Desktop drafting details are created. Possible values: None Default ANSI DIN ISO JIS GB

AMSTDSCT

Type: String Initial value: ANSI

Controls the appearance of cut lines for section views. Possible values: None ANSI DIN ISO JIS GB

System Variables

|

415

System Variables (continued) Variable

Characteristic

Description

AMSTDTAP

Type: Drawing Initial value: ANSI

Controls which drafting standard is used for tapped holes. Possible values: None ANSI ISO JIS DIN GB

AMTAPANNOTE

AMULINES

Type: Integer Initial value: 0 - Pre-Mechanical Desktop 3 1 - Mechanical Desktop 3+ Type: Integer Initial value: 5

Controls the calculation of tapped holes in drawing views. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On Controls the number of U surface display lines. Possible values: [0 to 1000]

AMVANISH

Type: Integer Initial value: 0

Controls whether a vanish is displayed for ANSI tapped holes. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

AMVECAUG

Type: Real Initial value: 0.500

Controls the vector lengths of augmented lines. Possible values: [0.0 to Inf]

AMVECSF

Type: Real Initial value: 0.500

Controls the vector length of surfaces. Possible values: [0.0 to Inf]

AMVIEWREFRESH

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls drawing view updates. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

416

System Variables (continued) Variable

Characteristic

Description

AMVIEWRESTORE

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls assembly view updates after modifications have been made to the edit target. Possible values: 0 - Off 1 - On

AMVLINES

Type: Integer Initial value: 3

Controls the number of V surface display lines. Possible values: [0 to 1000]

AMVPBORDER

Type: Integer Initial value: 1

Controls display of drawing viewport borders. Possible values: 0 - Off (borders are visible) 1 - On (borders are invisible)

AMXASSEMBLE

Type: Integer Initial value: 0

Determines if external assembly constraints will be updated. AMXASSEMBLE by default is set to 0 (Off) for performance reasons. Possible values: 0 - Off (external constraints are not updated) 1 - On (external constraints are updated)

System Variables

|

417